.<i>^ 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 /. 
 
 (/ <^A 
 
 / 
 
 "<>.% 
 
 
 f/. 
 
 
 1.0 Jr'i^ IM 
 
 I.I 
 
 !^ ^ Ilia 
 
 :: 1^ 12.0 
 
 6" 
 
 1.8 
 
 IL25 11114 111.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 /i 
 
 VI 
 
 5^ 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 &.. 
 
 /^ 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 A 
 
 ■e^ 
 
 4< 
 
 ■m-^ 
 ■ ^ 
 
 s 
 
 \ 
 
 ■''55^. 
 
 ,.'' ^ 
 
 4^^' 
 ^^. 
 
 %. 
 
 ^^. 
 
 ^ 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ -'.^ ^.v 
 
 '6^ 
 
 c."^ 
 
 ^^^> 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <> 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHfVI/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut canadien de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m6thode normala de filmage 
 sont indiqu6s ci-dessous. 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 Covers damaged/ 
 Couverture endommagee 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur6e et/ou pelliculde 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le litre de couverture manque 
 
 □ Coloured maps/ 
 Cartes geographiques en couleur 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag^es 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaur^es et/ou pellicul^es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d^color^es, tachet^es ou piqu^es 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages detach^es 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Relie avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serree peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge int^rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes 
 lors dune restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas ete filmees. 
 
 n/ 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of print varies/ 
 Qualite in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t6 filmdes ck nouveau de facon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 □ 
 
 Additional communts:/ 
 Commentaires suppl^mentaires: 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est film^ au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 
 
 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 
 
 18X 
 
 
 
 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 
 SOX 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
ails 
 
 du 
 
 >difier 
 
 une 
 
 nage 
 
 The copy filmed hare hat baan raproducad thanks 
 to tha ganarosity of: 
 
 Library Division 
 
 Provincial Archives of British Columbia 
 
 Tha imagas appaaring hara ara tha bast quality 
 possible considering tha condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in Itaeping with tha 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 L'exemplaira fi'mi fut reproduit grAce A la 
 gAnAiositi de: 
 
 Library Division 
 
 Provincial Archives of British Columbtd 
 
 Les images suivantas ont AtA raproduites avec la 
 plus grand soin. compta tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetA de I'exemplaire filmA, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmaca. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the bacit cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and en ing on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol —^ (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimAe sont filmAs en commenqant 
 par la premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 derniAre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par la rtarond 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film^s en commengant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la derniire page qui comporte une telle ' 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — ♦- signifia "A SUIVRE ", le 
 symbole V signifie "Flfvi". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film^s d des taux de reduction diff^rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clich6, il est film6 A partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche i droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images n^cessaire Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la m6thode. 
 
 rrata 
 
 
 
 pelure, 
 1 d 
 
 □ 
 
 32X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
IN) 
 
 NO 
 
 \ 
 
 m\ 
 
Bvitiol) Bssocialion foi* il)c BC)uanccmcnt 
 
 of Science. 
 
 U' 
 
 NEWCASTLE-Ul»ON-TYNE iMEETINU, 188<J. 
 
 FIFTH REPOUT OF THE COMMITTEE 
 
 APPOINTED KOK THE PURPOSE OF 
 
 INVESTIGATING AND PUBLISHING REPORTS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PHYSICAL (JHAKACTERS, LANGUAGES. AND 
 
 INDUSTRIAL AND SOCIAL (H)NI)ITI()N 
 
 OF THE 
 
 NOETH-WESTEEN TRIBES OF THE 
 
 DOMINION OF CANADA. 
 
 [I'LATEH I.- VI. 
 
 
 (L^Jffitcs of the Association : 
 22 ALBEMARLE STREET, LONDON, W. 
 
 il 
 
 i 
 

[/iV(/(/ tit t/'if Xrnvitstlr-ujhin-Tyjw Mriiing of the HuiTisii Association, 1889.] 
 
 J.U'ifiC'O JloDOcitttion for f()c Jl()uttnccmcuf of 
 
 Science. 
 
 Fifth Report of the Coniiiilitee, consisilnf/ of Dr. 1]. B. Tyloh, 
 Dr. (r. yi. Dawson, General Sir J. H. lii:FHov, Dr. Danikl 
 WiLS(jx, Mr. K. (t. Hai-iucktox, and Mr. GI':ok(jk W. Hloxam 
 {Spci'ff<irij), appointi'd for t/ip piirpose of invcstif/afuif/ and 
 palillsJiin;/ rcptnis on the phjj.'^ical charocfer.^, [(iiiguuf/ci^, and 
 indnst rial and social condition of the North- Western Trlhes of 
 the Dominion of Canada. 
 
 [PLATKS I.— VI.J 
 
 Remarks on North American 'Ethnnloriy : Infrnductory to the lieport on the 
 Indians (f Jh-itlsh Columbia. Ihj IIohatio Hai.k. 
 
 TlTi- Province of British Cnlnmhia o(T(TS probnbly tlio best fiold of othnn- 
 li^trical research uow to ho round in North America. This dislinction ia 
 diio to two circujnstanccs, each of much importance. The one is the f;ict 
 tliat the tribes of this Province have thus far suffered less displaeemetit 
 and ehanpjo from foreiirn influonce.s than tlio.se of any othej- rerjion. Tliey 
 still I'or tiie most part occupy their original seats, and they retain to a 
 laryje extent their priniitive customs and beliefs. The other circunistnnce, 
 and (uic of special scientific interest, is the n^reat number of linguistic 
 stocks, or fanulios of languages, wliich are fcnind in the Province. There 
 are, as will appear from the report and map, no less than eight of thci^o 
 stocks, being twice as many as now exist in the whole of Europe. 
 
 The importance of this fact will bo appreciated if we bear in mind 
 
 that in America the linguistic stock is the universally accepted unit of 
 
 ethnological classification. It is not that the physical distinctions which 
 
 have elsewhere been proposed as the basis of classifications are lacking cm 
 
 this continent. On the contrary, they are markedly apiiarcjit. In colour 
 
 the difference is great between the fm'r fjkinned ITaidas and Tsimshians 
 
 of the nortliern coasts and islands, and tlie swarthy, almost black, natives 
 
 |of SoutIi(>rii California. I'Jven more notable is the difference lietween the 
 
 hort, scpiat, broad-faced, and coarse-featured niembcn's of the coast tribes 
 
 f Oregon and British Columbia, and the tall, slender, oval-visaged 
 
 ndiaiis of the interior. The striking differences of ci-anial mensurt'ment 
 
 re shown in Sir l)a.iu"el Wilson's work on 'Prehistoric Man.' llair vary. 
 
 g from coarse, straighf, and black to fine, brown, and curly; eyes with 
 
 orizontal and eyes with (d)li(pu' openings ; noses in some tril)es a(|nilino, 
 
 "d in others depressed, show varieties as gnNat as those of colour, stature, 
 
 d cranial outlines. These and other ])hysical diRt'uctioiis, however, 
 
 ve not been acce[)ted by any scientific inipnrer in America of late 
 
 'ears as grounds of dassifu'ation of the native tribes, for the simple 
 
 f^f^ction ]l. A 
 
 
 < I 
 
 J 
 
 
iiEroRT— 1889. 
 
 reason tliat tlipy aro manifestly duo to climatic or other local or casual 
 induonCfH, and cjuuiot 1><> held to indicato any difrcrcTicc of raco. 
 
 Hut- tlu; distinction ot" lin^^uistic; sttK.'ks is radical and ju-ofouiid. Tlio 
 ditlcrcncos wliicii it indicatos extend far beyond langnii^'c, and aro 
 displayed in tlie whole laturo and ciiaracter of tho speakers of each 
 lann'uuf^o. This fa(;t became apparent to ine many years a<,'o, in makiu}^ 
 for tho U.S. (lovernmont an ethnn^raphieal survey of Oregon and of a 
 part of Ih'itisli Colunibiii.' Its I'xisteiice perplexed me at tlio titm , as it 
 has since perplexed other investifrjitors ; and the (piestion of the oi-i^iu 
 of so many linguistic stocks, or langiuiLres radically and totally distinct, 
 found in so limited ii district, ha.s api)eareJ to present a problem of tho 
 highest scientific interest.^ 
 
 In an address d(;liverod before the American Association for tho 
 Advancement of Science in 188(5, and ])ub!islied in their volume of 
 ' Proceedings ' for that year, T ventured to propose an cx])lanation of tho 
 origin, not only of these American lanifuages, but of all stock langiuvges 
 whatsoever, except, of coni'se, tho pi-iinitive language (whatever it may 
 have been) which was spoken by the lirst community of the human 
 species. A succinct but clear outline of this theory was given by I'ro- 
 fesscn' Sayco in his I'residential Address at the Manchester meeting in 
 1887. While pointing out what he considered the merits of the theory, 
 !Mr. Sayce asked, very reasonably, for moi'o evidence to sustain it than I 
 had been able to include in my brief essay. This evidence I have en- 
 deavoured to give in a pa])er read last year before the Canadian Institnto 
 of Toronto, and published in tho * Proceedings ' of that society for 
 1888- 8.>. 
 
 ^Vith Professor Sayce's address in the hands of the members of tho 
 Association, I need only say, briefly, that the theory supposes these isolated 
 idioms to have had their origin in the natural language-making faculty 
 of young children. !Many instances of languages thus spontaneously 
 created by children were given; and in my Toronto paper evidence was 
 produced to show that the words and grammar of such languages might, 
 and probably would in many cases, be totally different from those of the 
 parental speech. Tho fact was pointed out that in the first peopling of 
 every country, when, from various causes, families must often be scattered 
 at very wide distances from one another, many cases must have occurred 
 
 ' ' In the lonp and nuvrow section of tliis continent, included hetwoen the Rocky 
 MountiiinH and the I'acilic, and extending' from tlie country of tlie Eskimo on the 
 north t(j tho Californian Peninsula on the south, there are found perhajjs a ^>freater 
 numlier of tribes sii(>akin,ir distinct lan.Lfuages than in any other territory of tlie same 
 size in the world. Not (^nly do these tribes dill'iT in their idioms, but also in jiersonal 
 appearance, character, and \;sages.' — Cnitcil States E.ri>loriiiij /J.r/>,'ilifi«n vmhr 
 VharU'x \VUh'», ml. rii. 'Ktlnnu/ruphy (ind I'/iilnlot/i/ ;' //// J/orafio Ifalc ; ISttl ; p. i'.l7. 
 
 ^ ' It [the n>ap] brinj^'s out in a most strikinj; way the singular linguistic diversity 
 which obtains along the west lino of this part of America — a fact for which it is 
 indeed ditlicult to olfer a reasonable cxjjlanation, knowing as we do how essentially 
 maritime the coast tribes are in their iuUiits, and how skilled and fearless they are in 
 the management of their excellent canoes. The anomaly ai)pears still greater whtn 
 we contrast the several clearly defmed colonies of the coast with tho wide sweep of 
 the languages of the interior of the I'rovince, where from the generally rugged and 
 often densely wooded character of the country, and the turbulent nature of tlio 
 rivers, interconununication nuist have been by com]iarison extremely diHicult.'~-7V. 
 (irori/e .lA Dmrson : Pn'facc to ' ('oni/xirtitirr ]'or(ihiilarirs of t lie Indian Trihcg nf 
 British Columbia ; n-ith a Map illustrating JJistribution ;' by jjrs. Tolmic and Dansoii, 
 1884, p. 7. 
 
 I tl 
 ex is 
 trib 
 
 tollf 
 Otllt 
 
 font 
 stro] 
 it II 
 niari 
 witji 
 neces 
 ever 
 propc 
 'i'l 
 Kdm 
 li:.s ^ 
 Ainc 
 serie; 
 pul»l 
 (uori 
 nuiii 
 ajiaii 
 
 COIDJ) 
 
 vvliic 
 of S(( 
 
 Cfjual 
 
 and e( 
 
 J' 
 
 h\ th( 
 
 'ess di 
 
 one ' 
 
 drcd 
 
 pandiii 
 
 hi cliai 
 
 The la 
 
 •''gghif 
 
 ^"'>kim( 
 
 Its fori 
 
 'u the 
 
ON inn Nonrii western tribes of Canada. 
 
 3 
 
 mg 
 
 ■:^ 
 
 le Rocky 'i^ 
 
 , (in llic 1 
 
 I (.rri'Mtur ^ 
 
 tlie same jiM 
 
 ]icrsonnl M^| 
 
 nil vndtr 'fM 
 
 ;; p. lit'- ^ 
 
 diversity :'^B 
 
 liic'h it '\^ 'mH 
 
 sscntially ^L 
 
 u'V an; in ^| 
 
 vtov when ^j 
 
 sweop of ^U 
 
 i^rs^ed anA '^^H 
 
 re of tlic j^ 
 
 ult.'— i^'"' «| 
 
 7>j/«'» <!^' ^1 
 
 (i I>a/i"4'(i'!t -^ 
 
 where two or more yoniig cliildnm of difrcrciit sexes, luft by tlio dentli of 
 tlicir parents to grow up .secluded fi-om uU other society, were thus com- 
 nillrd to frame a laiiguiige of their own, wliicli would l)ccoine the luuthcr- 
 t.)iiLriie of a now linguistic stock. This roult, it is clear, would only 
 follow in those regions where, from the tnildnes.s of the clinuite and tho 
 spoiitaufons fruitfulncss of the soil, young cliildi'cn would lie able to llnd 
 H'llisistence for themselves through all seasons ol' the year. 
 
 It is evident that, along with their new language, these children and 
 their desceiulants would have to fi-anie a new religion, a ne.v soeiid policy, 
 and, in j^eneral, new customs and arts, except so far as ivnuniscences of 
 the ]»arental exainj)le and teaching's might direct or nntdify the latter. 
 All these conclusions accord precisely with tho results of ethnological 
 iiivestigatiojis in America. 
 
 It sliould, however, be borne in mind that, wdi(>tlicr the theory which 
 I tlias proposed is accepted or not, the fact will still remain that tho 
 existence of a linguistic stock involves the absolute certainty that the 
 tribe speaking such a form of language, dilTering entirely from all other 
 tongues, must luive lived for a very long period wholly isolated from all 
 otlier communities ; otherwise this idiom would not have had time to bo 
 foi'incd and to become the speech of a tribe suiliciently nninerou-i and 
 strong to maintain its independence. In this long isolation (however 
 it might arise) the tribe woidd necessarily acquire by continual inter- 
 m.'u-riage a peculiar mental cliaracter, common to the whole tribe, and 
 willi it the modi's of thought and the social institutions which are tho 
 necessary outcome of sucli a cliaracter. Thus tho linguistic stock, what- 
 ever its origin, must naturally and necessarily be, as has been said, tho 
 proper ethnological unit of classilieation. 
 
 The experience of the able philologists of tho American Bureau of 
 Kthnology entirely confirms these views. Special attention, of coni'si', 
 has been given by them to the investigation of the stocks in North 
 America. Mr. J. C Pilling, of tho Bureau, the author of the valuablo 
 series of bibliographies of American linguistic stocks now in course of 
 ])ul(li''ation, informs me that the number of these stocks in North America 
 (north of Mexico), so far as at present leterminod, is lifty-eight — a greater 
 number, perhaps, than can be founn in the whole eastern hemisphere, 
 n))urt from Central Africa. Of this nnnd)er no less than thirty-nine are 
 ionii)rised in the narrow strip of territory west of the Rocky M(juntains, 
 which extends from Alaska to Lower California. Why a great nund)er 
 of stocks might naturally be looked for along this coast, with its mild and 
 equal)le climate, and its shores and valleys al)oun(ling in shell-fish, berries, 
 and edible roots, is fully explained in my essays already referred to. 
 
 From what has been said it follows that in our studies of communities 
 in the earliest stage, we must look, not lor sameness, but for almost end- 
 less diversity, alike in languages and in social orgaiiisations. Insteail of 
 one 'primitive human horde ' we must think of some two or thict^ hun- 
 dred primitive .societies, each beginning in a single liousi hold, and ex- 
 panding gradually to a people distinct from every other, alike in speech, 
 m cliaracter, in mythology, in form of govcrinnent, and in social usages. 
 Ihe language may be monosyllabic, like the Khasi and the Oiliomi ; or 
 at-'^dutinative in various methods, like the i\Iantshu, the Nahiiatl, tho 
 Eskimo, and the Iroquoian ; or inflected, like the Semitic and the Saliaptin. 
 Its forms may be simple, as in the Maya and the ILuda, or complex, as 
 iu the Aryan, tho Basque, tho Algonkin, and the Tinneh. The old thco- 
 
 A 2 
 
i 
 
 IlErORT — 188f). 
 
 reticiil notion, tliat the moro complex nnd itiflcctod idioms have ^Town 
 out of tho simpler n^<^liitiimtivo or monosyllabic forms, must be given up 
 as incnnsisteiit witli tlic results of modern rescju-elies. 
 
 Ill liki' miiniier, we find aiimii;^ priiriitive eoi.iniunities every form of 
 government aiul of sociid institutions -tiionarehy among tbe Mayas and 
 the Xatcliez, aristocriir}' among tiie lidifiiois and tlie KwakiutI, demo- 
 eriiey among the AlgonUins and the Siioslionees, descending a 1 most to pure, 
 tlioiigli perhaps peaceful, anarchy among tlio Tinneli, tho Jvskiino, and 
 various other families. In somi; stocks we iind patriarchal (or 'paternal') 
 institutions, as ajiiong the Salisli and the Algonkin ; in others, matrian-lial 
 (or ' maternal '), as among the Troc^noian and the llaida. J a some tho 
 clan system exists ; in others it is unknown. In some exogamy [ircvails, 
 in others endogamy. In some, -wo-iumi are honoured ami have gi-eat in- 
 lluenci! and pi'ivilegi s ; in (itliuis, they ai'o despised and ill-treated. In 
 Home, wives arc obtained by capture, in otliers by courtship, in others by 
 the agreenu'nt of tbe pai'cnts. All these vai'ious institutions ami usages 
 exist among tribes in the same stage of eultui-e, ami all of them appear to 
 bo oi|ually primitive. They are simply tho forms in which each com- 
 munity, by force of the character of its peoi»l(>, tends to crystallise. 
 
 We frequently, iTowever, find evidence, if not of internal development, 
 at least of derivation. Institutions, creeils, ami customs are in nuiny 
 cases adoi)ted by one stock from another. As there arc now 'loan-words ' 
 in all languages, so tluTo are borrowed beliefs, borrowed laws, and bor- 
 rowed arts and usages. Then, also, there are many mixed communities, 
 in which, through the eirect of conquest or of intermarriages, the ])hysieal 
 traits, languages, and institutions of two or nu)i'e stack's have bi'come 
 variously combined and intermingled. In short, tho study of human 
 societies in the light of the classitication by linguistic stocks is like the 
 f^tudy of material substances in the light of their classification by the 
 chemical elements. In each case wo iind an almost infinite variety of 
 phenomena, some primitive and others secondary and composite, but all 
 referable to a limited number of primary constituents: in chemistry, tho 
 material elements ; in ethnology, the linguistic stocks. Such is the result 
 of the latest investigations, as pnrsuiHl on the Western Continent, where 
 for the first time a great number of distinct communities, in the earliest 
 social stages, have been exposed to s'.cientitic observation, with all their 
 organisation awl workings as clearly discernible as those of bees in a 
 glass hive. 
 
 The resr.a'ches of Dr. Boas, wliilo pursued, as will be apparent, with- 
 out any bias of jireconceived theory, will throw umch valuable light on 
 the subjects now referred to, as well as on others of equal importance. 
 It should be added that some of the facts Avhich he has gathered, par- 
 ticularly in regai'd to the tenure of land among the tribes of British 
 Columbia, have a great practical value. This is a point which deserves 
 special mention, as the Canadian Government is now sharing with tho 
 Association the expense of these inquiries. ]Many of the most costly wars 
 which the Colonial Governments have had to wage with the aboriginal 
 tril)es in America, New Zealand, and elsewhere have arisen, as is well 
 known, from misunderstandings growing out of the acquisition of land 
 from the natives. The great benefit which accrued to New Zealand, in 
 the imi)rov(nl relati(ms between the iiativ(>s and tho colonists, from the 
 researches of Sir George Grey into the laws, usages, and traditicjus of tin; 
 ^laori tribes, is n •i"i+^^" -P li^^J ,«,, 'V\-,r 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ■■■s 
 
 ,.t-„i . 
 
 r.f „<r : 
 
 in 1^1'lfltjll 
 
ON TflR NOnrit-WESTERN TIIIDES OF CANADA. 
 
 Ciihniibiti is in sonu; irspccls remarkably Hiriiilar (o (liat wliicli ])re*vai]od 
 in Ni'W Zcaliiiid. if tin; iii(|iiiric.s wliich huvo Ix'cn inslitutcd l>y tho 
 A.->s(iciation wliall liavo tin; cU'rc't of avt-rtini^ a very pos.siblo ctmllict of 
 rai'cs, tln'ir ulilily will bo very j^rrat- oius niijiht almost say iiifalciilablo. 
 it may bf well, llu'refurc, toilraw part iciilar attention to .sonioiiotewoi lliy 
 facts set Ibrtli in Dr. Ilnas's rejiort. \N'o learn that the land oeenpied by 
 eiriaiii tril)es is licld, not by the tribe, nor by individuals, but by tho clan, 
 or '/'■''■■•', ^\'hi<'li is eoiiseijnently the only authority able to dis|>nse of it; 
 and, further, that when thi' land is sold the oi'i^inal owni-rs are still con- 
 sidered by tho native law to retain 'the rij^'ht of fishinjj^, huutiuL', and 
 ^'atheriniT berries in their old home,' It is easy to see how, when theso 
 native laws and usaj^es ai'o not understood, eollisions nught at any linio 
 arise, in which each party would Tialurally claim to bo in the ri;,'ht. It 
 should, further, bo borno in mind that as there are eij.'ht distinct sloe!. 3 in 
 the Province there may possibly bo as ni'iny distinct systems of land 
 tenure. At all events, it is I'ertain that tho tenure anion;.;" the tribes in 
 which tho clan system exists must dill'ei' iu one important respect from 
 that (jf tho tribes in which it is unknown. 
 
 It is evident tiiat, as Dr. J5oas sui^'^ests, this branch of imiuiry is ono 
 which deserves to bo carefully prosecuted, both for its scientitio iuteres 
 and for the great practical benelit which may result from it. 
 
 I 
 
 willi- 
 Siht on 
 itaiice. 
 d, par- 
 British 
 .'serves 
 
 th tho 
 
 y wars 
 |)riginal 
 lis well 
 
 )i land 
 land, in 
 
 mi the 
 of tlu! 
 
 First General Tiepnrt on thr Iinliana of British Cuhiinhia. 
 ]ji/ Dr. Fn.wz Boas. 
 
 I N T 1! O I) U C 1 i: Y No T E. 
 
 The followiuf^ report on tho Indians of British Columbia embodiea 
 the general rosuU.s of a reconnaissance made by the writer in tho wunimer 
 of 1)~^88, under tho auspices of the Committco of the Briti.sh Association 
 ap].iiinted for the purpose^ of collecting infnrmation respectinu; tho North- 
 Westcrn Tribes of the Dominion of Canada, supplemented by observations 
 made by tho author on v. ])revious trip in the winter of i8H0-87. A 
 ju'cliiuinary report was jmblished in the Fourth Report of the Committee. 
 The present report contains the ])rineipal results of the; author's investi- 
 gations on the Tlingit, llaida, Tsimshian, and Kutonaija (Kootanie). 
 ilis limited time and tho i)reparations for a n(;w journey to IJritish 
 C«)lunil)ia, undertaken under the auspices of the Conimittee, did not 
 pei'init him to study exhaustively tho extensive osteological material 
 collected on the previous journeys. For the same reason the linguist io 
 material colhx,ted among tho Nootka and KwakiutI is kept back. J5e.'<ides 
 this it seemed desirable to await the j)ublieation of tho grammar of tho 
 latter language by the Kov. A. J. Hall in the 'Transactions of tho Royal 
 Society of Canada' before publishing tho linguistic lujtos on the same 
 stock, which are necessarily fragmentaiy when compared to a grammar 
 diawn up by a student who has lived many years among tho Indians 
 speaking that language. The chapters on social organisation, customs, 
 art, and knowledge are also necessarily incomplete. The difficulty (<f 
 observing or even acquiring information on such points during a flying 
 visit of a fortnight — the maximum time spent among any single tribe — 
 IS so overwhelming that no thorough I'oport is possible, and it is almost 
 nu|)ossihle to guai'd against serious errors. On account of this 
 dilliculty the author has paid great attention to the collection of reporV.9 
 
6 
 
 RRPOnT — lHh!>. 
 
 on historical events niid of truditioiiH. Ij» these tlio pecnh'ar customs 
 and cliaraeter of a jieople iilwiiys appear very ch'urly, and tlie fiiets 
 mentioned in these; tales form a valuable startifit^- point for the observa- 
 tion of eustoiiiH whieli would else remain unnotieed. Ainon^'- tribes who 
 have partly yielded to the iiifluenee of the contact wilh whites they 
 nITord a valnblo clue to their former customs. 
 
 The chiipler on * Arts and Knowledge ' has not been ti-eated fnlly, as 
 the general character of Nortii-West American art is well known, and, in 
 order to give a complete account of tlio conventionalism of tlu; works of 
 art of these ti-ibes, an exhaustive study is necessary, which the wiiter has 
 been so far unable to undertake. 
 
 The author's rescarelns do not incluno iho Tinneh tribes, somo of 
 which are comparatively well known. The; Salish latiguau'CM are merely 
 enumerated, as investigations on this interesting stock aix) beiiig carried 
 on, and the nnitcrial in its present shape would recpiiro an early revision. 
 
 The present report is su[ipleniented by the following pai)ers by the 
 author : — 
 
 'Zur KthnologiovoTi Hritisch-Colunduen.' Petermann's Mittheihingen, 
 
 1887. Nn 5, with map. 
 
 ' I\rittheilungen iiber die Bil!|fda Tndianer.* Oritriiial ^rittheilungen 
 aUH deni Museum fiir \'("ilkerkunde, JJeilin, pp. 177 li^J, with two jilates. 
 
 ' Iho Spr.icho der JJdejula.' Verh. anlhroj). (jes. Berlin, l<S(Sti, p[). 
 202-200. 
 
 'Census and Reservations of tho Kwakiutl.' Ihill. Am. Cleogr. Soc. 
 Sept. 1887. 
 
 * On Certain Songs and Dances of the Kwakiutl.' Journ. Am. Folk- 
 Loro, 1888, pp. 41»-GJ.. 
 
 'Chinook Songs.' Journ. Am, Folk-Loro, 1888, pp. 220-220. 
 
 ♦Die Tsimschian.' Ztschr. fur Kthnologie, IJerlin, 1888, pp. 2:51-217. 
 
 ' The Houses of tho Kwakiutl Indians.' Proc. U.S. National Museum, 
 
 1888, pp. 197-213. 
 
 ' Notes on the Snanaimuq.' Am. Anthropolo ist, Washington, 1880, 
 ])p. ,321328. 
 
 ' Tho Indians of British Columbia.' Trans. Iloy. Soc. of Canada, 
 1888, Sec. II. pp. •t7-57. 
 
 ' Die Mythologie der nordwestamcrikanischen Kilstcuf-tammc.' Globus, 
 P.iaunschweig, 1887-88. 
 
 The following alphabet has been used in tho report : — ■ 
 
 The vowels havo their continental sounds, namely: a, ns in fiithcr ; 
 e, like a in mate ; ?', as in vKtchhie; o, as in nnfe ; u, as in rule. 
 
 In addition the fcdlowing are used: it, u, as in German; u=aic in 
 law; £=<? injldicrr (Lepsius's e). 
 
 Among the consonants tlu; following additional letters havo been 
 used : (f, a very guttural <j, similar to ;/r ; Jc, a very guttural A-, similiir 
 to At; (], the German ch in hack; n, the German ch in ich ; u, hc- 
 tvveen q and H; c=sh in shore; c, as tit in Ihin \ H, an explosive /; 
 dl, a palatal /, pronounced with the back of tho tongue (dorso-apical). 
 
 CHAKACTKU OF THE COUNTRY. 
 
 Tho north-west coast of America, from Juan do Fuca Strait to Cross 
 Sound in Alaska, is characterised by its fiords, sounds, and islands, which 
 make it very favourable for navigation in canoes and other small craft. 
 
ON THE NOUTII-WKSTEIIN TRIBES OF CANAIA. 
 
 Amnrp; tlio most importnnt of tlipso fiords is I'orllaiul Tnlct, in tlio 
 cxlii'iiii! iiottli of tin; Icrritoiy. Near its month N;iss Jlivcr cmptios 
 itsrlf, wliich is niivigalth) for canocH lor al)out KO miles. J{otwceu tlio 
 5.'>lli niid rdtli (U'^^rt'ts of lafitmlo tlu> coast is compiirativcly ojtfii. Hero 
 tlic SkfC'iia Itivcr has its mouth. Farther soulh we iiiul an oxtremcly 
 iiiti'ii'iito network of iionls and channuls, somo of which jicnctratt! far 
 into tho interior. Anionf^ tinso wo may mention («arih\er and Douglas 
 Cliiiiim'ls, Dean Inlet, and lU'utinck Arm, and the straits and kouikIh 
 separating V'ancouvei' Island from the mainland. This region has a very 
 teniperato climate, tho heat of anminer and tho cold of winter being 
 iiioilerated by tin; induence of tin- sea winds. This influence, liowever, 
 docs not extend far inland, anil a few miles from tho S'ja-coast low tem- 
 peratures ))revail in winter. While intercourse all along tho coast is 
 greatly facilitated by its character, it is almost iinpossibhj to pencMi-ato 
 ir.ic tlio interior, the high peaks of the coast ranges rising abruptly 
 from tho sea. There are only a low passes by means of \vhi<h intircoiirso 
 is possible. Tho most important of those are on Skeena liiver, juiil on 
 Sahiion and Hella (.'oola ilivers of Dean Jnlet and IJentinck Ai ■. 
 
 As tlio precipitation all along the coast is very great, its low.i part.s 
 nro covered with denso forests, which furnish wood for building houses 
 and canoes. Among these, tlu^ pine, hemioclv, and the red 'uid yellow 
 cedar are tho most prtMuinent ; while the hard wood of tlic . laple is used 
 for iin[)lement8 of various kinds, ])rineipally for paddlos. Tho woods 
 abound with numero... i uds of berries, which are eageily sons/bt lor by 
 the Indians, 'i'hcy also make use of the kelp and seaweed with which 
 tlie sea abouno . 
 
 In the woods the deer, tho elk, tlie cariboo, the black and tlio grizzly 
 bears, tho wolf, and numerous other animals, are found. Tho moun- 
 tain goat lives on the high mountain ranges. Tho beaver, tlio otter, and 
 tlio fur-seal furnish valuable skins. Tho Indians keep a great number 
 of dogs in their villages, which look almost exactly like tho coyote. In 
 the northern villages they are much like the lOskimo dog. 
 
 Of prime importance to the natives is the abutulance of fish and other 
 animals living in tho sea. Seals, sta-lions, and whales are found in 
 coiisiilerable numbei's, but tlie Indian depends almost entirely upon tho 
 various sjiecies of salmon and the olachen {Tlntleirhtliijs pacljlcus, (Jir.), 
 which are caught in enormous quantities in tho rivers. Various species 
 of cud and halibut are caught throughout the year; herrings visit tho 
 coast early in spring; in short, there is such an abunihmce of animal lil'o 
 in the sea that the Indians live almost solely upon it. Besides fish, thoy 
 gather several kinds of shell-fish, sea-eggs, and cuttlo-fish. 
 
 The interior of the Province is throughout mountainous, with the ex- 
 ception of a portion of the territory occupied by tho Tinneh. The country 
 cast of the coast ranges is comparatively diy, hot in summer and cold in 
 winter. The southern parts of this region are desolate, tho rivers cutting 
 deep gorges through the valleys, which are filled with ilrif't. Agriculture 
 can bo carried on only by means of irrigation, bu*^^ tho country is well 
 adapted to stock-raising, Salmon ascend the rivers, and tho lakes are 
 well stocked Avith fish, which forms the staple food of the tribe? west of the 
 Selkirk Range. Between this range and the Rocky Mountains the wide 
 valley of the Columbia and Kootenay Rivers extends from the Inter- 
 national Boundary to near the great bend of the Columbia. The Indians 
 of this valley have access to the great plains over a number of passes. 
 
 ^■m> 
 
8 
 
 REPORT — 188!). 
 
 IXIIADITANTS. 
 
 Tho country is inhabited l)y a grriat number of tribes belonging to 
 seven or eight linguistic Htocks. Jertain siniilai'itics of form and 
 phonetic elements betv/een tho Tlingit and Haida langnages have given 
 rise to tho opinion that further rescarcdu's may show (liem to be remote 
 branches of tlio paiuo stock. Tiiis presumption might appear to be 
 strengthened by their divergence from all other stocks inlial)iting tho 
 teiTitory. Nevertludess tho dissimilarity of vocabularies and of gram- 
 matical elements is so great that tho coincidencea referred to cannot yet 
 be consideted suflicicMit jiroof of their common origin, although tiie two 
 languages must he classed together in one group wlu'u coniiiared with the 
 other languages of the North Pacific coast. Counting them for tho 
 present as separate stocks, wo distinguish ^he following families : — 
 
 1. Tlingit. —Iidiabltitig Southern Alaska. 
 
 2. Haida. — Inhabiting (^)ueen Ciiarlolte Islands and part of Prince of 
 Wales Archipelai o. 
 
 8. Tsimsiiian. — Inhabiting Nass and Skeena Rivers and tlie adjacent 
 islands. 
 
 4. Kwakiutl. — Inhabiting tho coast from Gardimr Channel to Capo 
 IMudge, With the solo exceptions of the (Country around Dean Inlet and 
 the west coast of Vancouver Island. 
 
 5. The Nootka. — Inhabiting tho west coast of Vancouver Island.' 
 
 G. The Salish. — Inhabiting the coast ami the eastern jiart of Van- 
 couver Island south of Cape JNIudgo, the southern part of the interior as 
 far as the crest of the iSolkirk Ilange and the northern parts of Washing- 
 ton, Idaho, and Montana. 
 
 7. The Kutonfuia. — Inhabiting (ho valley of tho Upper Colund)ia 
 River, Kootenay Lake and River, and the adjoining parts of the Ututed 
 States. 
 
 The Tlingit., although not belonging properly to Ib-itish Columbia, 
 have been included in this report, as thv.y must be considered in a study 
 of the Haida antl Tsimshian. 
 
 I do not enumerate the tribes comi)Osing the Tlingit and Haida 
 peoples, as the former have been treated by Dr. A. Krauso in his 
 excellent woric, ' Die Tlinkit Indianer,' while 1 am not acquainted with 
 tlie subdivisions of tho latter. Dr. G. M. Dawson in his ' Report on tho 
 (^ueen Charlotte Islands' gives a list of villages. It seems that the 
 llaida divide their })eople into several grou[)S, each group comprising a 
 uumber of villages. The Haida call themselves Qa'eda, i.e. people. 
 They are called by tho Tlingit Dekyino', i.e. people of the sea. The 
 Tsimshian call them Haida, which is evidently derived from (Qa'eda. 
 
 . The follo\\ing list of Tsimshian tribes was obtained by inquiries at 
 the mouth of Skeena River. 
 
 Tho language is spoken in two principal dialects, the Nasqa' and tho 
 Tsimshian proper. 
 
 I. Tribes speaking tho Nas(|a' dialect : 
 
 1. Nasija', on Nass River. 
 
 2, Gyitksa'n, on tho upper Skeena River=people of the Ksia'n. 
 
 ' Now observatiotis made in 1880 seem to indicate that llieiu exists an afliniiy 
 betweeix the fourth and fifth groups. 
 
ON THE MOUTU-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 9 
 
 ging to 
 ■ni and 
 a given 
 remote 
 to he 
 ing tlio 
 r' gram- 
 lUot yet 
 tlio two 
 vitli the 
 lor tliu 
 
 riiice 
 
 of 
 
 adjacent 
 
 to Capo 
 iilet and 
 
 .nd.' 
 of Van- 
 terior a:-^ 
 Vasliing- 
 
 lolunibia 
 United 
 
 nnibia, 
 a study 
 
 Haida 
 in bis 
 
 .^d with 
 on the 
 lat the 
 
 )risiiig a 
 people. 
 
 a. The 
 
 ida. 
 
 liriea at 
 
 and the 
 
 Ivsia'n. 
 1 iifliiuty 
 
 II. Tnbes speaking the Tsimshian proper: 
 
 1. Ts'Emsia'n, on the mouth of Skeena River=on the Ksia'n. 
 
 2. Gyits'nmrii'lon, below the canon of Skeena liiver=peo})le on 
 
 the upper part of the river. 
 
 3. Gyita'ala'ser, at the canon of Skeena Iliver=cftnon people, 
 
 4. Gyitqa'tla, on the islands olf the mouth of Skeena River = 
 
 people of the sea. 
 
 5. Oyitg'a'ata, on tlie shores of Grcnville Channel = people of the 
 
 poles, so called on account of their salmon weirs. 
 
 6. Gyidcsdzo', north-west of Milbank Sound. 
 
 Sonic of these tribes are subdivided into septs, each of which inlr.ibits 
 nil,, vilhiire (see ' Ztschr. lur Ethnologic,' 188M, p. 2:V2). 
 
 Tiu! Tsimshian are called by the Tlingit Ts'otsQh/n ; by the Uciltsuk" 
 Ivwe'tlda; by the Bilqala, Elq'i'miii ; while the Haida designate each 
 tiihc by its proper name. 
 
 The whole })eoplo is divided into four clans: the ravoi, called K'an- 
 ha'da ; the eii'jle, called Laqski'yek ; the wo//, called Laqkyebo' ; and the 
 JfKtr, called G.yispotuwE'da. Details on this subject will bo found in the 
 (.'liaptcr on social organisation. 
 
 l. The Kwakiutl. — So far as I am awai'c, the language is spoken in 
 three dialects, the people speaking them not being wholly unintelligible 
 to each other : the Qaisla', the Heiltsuk', and the Kwakiutl ])roper. 'J'he 
 l^iriisla' is Sjjoken north of Grcnville Channel ; the lleiltsuk" emljraccs the 
 tribes from Grcnville Channel to Rivers Inlet; the Kwakiutl proper is 
 .-poken from Rivers Inlet to the central part of Vancouver Island. I do 
 not enter into an enumeration of the many tribes of this group, one list 
 having been published by Dr. George M. Dawson in the 'Transactions of 
 the Uoyal Society of Canada,' 1>^87, another, acconi])ani'd by a detailed 
 niai) ]>y the writer, in Petermann's ' iMittheilungen,' lb87. 
 
 The most northern tribe of this group, the Qaisla', are called Gyit'ama'fc 
 hy the Tsimshian; the Gyimaiu)itq of Gardner Channel are called 
 (iyitlo'p by the same people. The Hciltsuk" jtroper arc called Wutsta' 
 ])}■ the Tsimshian, idk-la'sumu by the Dihinla. 
 
 5. Nootka. — llegarding their tribal divisions I w(mld refer to Sproat's 
 'Scenes and Studies of Savage Life.' The PK'nthitc call the \ootka 
 ( ViliVitc, but as a rule this name is used jor the tribes of Albeini Channel 
 only. The (j'atlo'ltq call these tribes O'meno, the Sk'qo'mic call them 
 T("i;c;Vatq. (Detailed information on the tribes of this stock will be 
 given ill the report for 181)0.) 
 
 C>. The Salish. — This important stock, which inhabits a large part of 
 ilb'itish Columbia and the adjacent territories of the United States, is 
 [ represented by two groups of tribes on the c(.ast of the pi'ovince : — 
 
 A. The Bihj^ula of Dean lidet and Rentiuck Arm, comprising four 
 ttrihes. 
 
 15. T)ie Coast Salish. — I comprise in this grou]) the numerous dialects 
 
 lof the Salish stock that are spoken on the (oa.its of ilic Gulf of Georgia 
 
 |and of Pnget Sound. The difference betwieu these tribes and those of 
 
 tlu; interior, in regard to their mode of life and language, is so marked 
 
 that we may be allowed to c^ass them in one large group. H. Hale and 
 
 Gallatin first pointed out their aHinities to the Salish proper. A num- 
 3i'i' of tribes of Paget Sound are included under the name of Niskwalli 
 [uiurc proper'y, Nsk-ca'li), but it seems to me that the subdivisions of the 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 'I 
 
^ 
 
 10 
 
 REPOIT — 1889. 
 
 latter aro not perfectly known. Tho Niskwalli would properly form one 
 of the larger divisions of tho Coast Salisli. Tbo latter is spukeu in tho 
 following dialects in British Columbia : — 
 
 1. (jlatlo'ltq, in Discovery Passage, Valdes Island, Bute and Mains- 
 pina Inlets. The (jJatlo'ltq are called Ku'moks by the Le'kwiltok*. 
 
 2. Sl'ciatl, in Jervis Inlet. Called Si'ciitl by the Snanaimuq, Ni'ciatl 
 by the gatlu'ltq. 
 
 o. P E'ntlatc, from Comox to Qualekum. 
 
 4. Sk'qu'mic, on Howe Souud and Burrard Inlet. Called Sk'qoa'mio 
 by the (;atl6'ltf{. 
 
 5. Kau'itcin, from Nonoos Bay to Sanitch Inlet, and on Fraser Rivcv 
 as far as Spuzzura. 
 
 6. Lku'ngKn, on the south-eastern part of Vancouver Island. Called 
 Lku'mEn by tho K'au'itcin. 
 
 (Similar to their language is tho Tla'lEm of the south coast of Ju.nn de 
 Fuca Strait ; tho S'a'mic, which is spoken east of San Juan Island ; the 
 SemiiVmo of Seraiarao Bay, and tho Qtlurai (Lummi). 
 
 C. Ntlakya'pamuQ, from Spuzzum to Ashcroft. 
 
 D. Stla'tliumii, on Douglas and Lilloet Lakes. 
 
 E. SQua'pamuQ, from Kamloops and Shushwap Lakes to Quesnello. 
 
 Called Tlitk'atEwu'mtlat by the Kutona'qa (= without shirts 
 and trousers). 
 
 F. Okina'k'en, on Okanagan and Arrow Lakes. Called TcitQufi'ut by 
 the Ntlakya'pamuQ; Kunk"'utla'atlam (= flatheods) by the Kutona'qa. 
 
 7. The Kutona'qa (Kootenay), inhabiting the valley of the Kootenay 
 and Columbia llivers. The language is spoken in two slightly differing 
 dialects, the ujipor and lower Kootenay. 
 
 I. Upper Kootenay, on the Columbia Lakes and upper Kootenay 
 River. 
 
 (1) Aqkisk'anu'kEnik, = tribes of the (Columbia) lakes, 
 
 (2) Aqk'a'mnik, at Foi't Steele. 
 
 (3) Aqk'anequ'nik (=: river Indians), Tobacco Plains. 
 
 (4) Aqklye'nik, Lake Pend d'Oreille. 
 
 II. Lower Kootenay. 
 
 Aquqtla'tlqd, Aquqenu'kqo ; Kootenay Lake. 
 
 Tho Kutona'qa call tho BlackPeet Sahil'ntla = bad Indiana ; the Crco, 
 Gutskiau'm = liars ; the Sioux, Katsk"agi'tlsak = charcoal legs. 
 
 The census returns of the Indian Wepartmont give the following num- 
 bers for the various peoples. The Tliugit aro not included in this list, as 
 they do not live in British territory. 
 
 Hnida, Kaif^'.ani e>: ' pted (estimated) 
 
 Tsiiiisliian (estiinaic d) 
 
 I'-ililula and lleiltsuk' (estimated) 
 
 Noutka 
 
 Kwakiutl and LOkwiltok' . 
 
 Coast Salish ..... 
 
 Ntlakyapamuq, Stla'tliumii, and SQua'- 
 
 j)aimiQ 
 Okiiu'i'ke ....... 
 
 Kutoua'cja ...... 
 
 1883 
 
 1881 
 
 1885 
 
 1880 
 
 1887 
 
 18-8 
 
 _.„ 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 _„ 
 
 _ 
 
 2,r,vi) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5,(Kiii 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 2,r)0i) 
 
 3,012 
 2,204 
 
 5,791 
 
 3,437 
 1,889 
 0,005 
 5,470 
 
 3,445 
 l.OO'.t 
 0,874 
 4,740 
 
 3,415 
 1 ,'.(09 
 7,080 
 4,049 
 
 3,301 
 1,930 
 (),724 
 4,055 
 
 3,1 CO 
 
 1,S',.S 
 
 o,8:!s 
 
 4,4'.'7 
 
 1,188 
 
 1,188 
 
 1,020 
 
 1,004 
 
 95G 
 
 508 
 
 912 
 
 587 
 
 Those figures show that tho census is a])proximate only. Tho iulan' 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 11 
 
 form ono 
 en in tlio 
 
 d Malas- 
 
 , Nl'ciatl 
 
 k'qoa'mic 
 
 ,ser River 
 
 I. Called 
 
 if Jaon (le 
 land ; the 
 
 Qacsnello, 
 lOut shirts 
 
 tQua'nt l)y 
 utona'qa. 
 ! Kootenay 
 ly difieriug 
 
 Kootenay 
 
 the Crce, 
 
 r'S. 
 
 Wing num- 
 tliis list, as 
 
 .887 
 
 18-.S 
 
 _ 
 
 2,5011 
 
 — 
 
 5,()i»i 
 2,500 
 
 ,'.);5G 
 
 ,055 
 
 3,1 lio 
 
 l,S',t3 
 0,8:!^ 
 
 <)5r. 9 VI 
 
 5(18 
 
 5s; 
 
 The inlaiii 
 
 trihcs appear to be decreasing in numbers, while the coast tribes appear 
 to he almost stationary. The above list gives a total of about 27,1)00. 
 To these niufit be added 1,500 Tiuneli and 8,522 'bands not visited,' 
 wl'.dcver these may bo. 
 
 The Indians of the interior have almost entirely given up their ancient 
 cnstoTUS. They are mostly Roman Catholics, but there are a few Pro- 
 testants. Of course a considerable amount of })aganisni is still lurking 
 under the Christianism of these natives. They are good stock- raisers, and 
 eiiileavour to irrigate their lands; but it seems that the majority are poor. 
 Tlie lower Kutona'qa still adhere, to a great extent, to their ancient cius- 
 tonis. They are princi})ally iishcrmen. All the Salish tribes catch a 
 considerable amount of iish, while the upper Kutona'qa were originally 
 hunters. 
 
 The coast Indians ai'e well oflP up to this day. While the efTorts of 
 missionaries among the Uaida have so fur not been very successful, tho 
 Tsinishian proper have become Christianised. They have given up all 
 tiieir old customs except those referiiug to their social organisation. The 
 gentes are still acknowledged, and the laws referring to the mutual sup- 
 ])ort among members of one gens and to the work to be done by the 
 i'atlier's gens at certain occasions (see p. 41) are still in force. The iinal 
 giving up of customs seems to bo done by the council, not by the indi- 
 viiluals. The Heiltsuk" have been Protestants for many years, while 
 the IJilqula are still uninfluenced Ijy contact with missionaries. The 
 same is true, to a large extent, among tho Kwakiutl, only a few individuals 
 of tho Nimkie tribe atlhering to the Episcopalian Church. T'he Coast 
 Salish belong in part to the Roman Catholic Church ; but notwithstanding 
 their allegations paganism still i)revails to a great extent. In the report 
 of the Department of Indian Affairs almost all of them are enumerated 
 as Roman Catholics, even the pagan tribes of Coniox, Victoria, and Na- 
 nainio, where their old customs are still rigidly adhered to. Among the 
 Nootka the Roman Catholics have gained considerable influence. 
 
 In my preliminary report I have dwelt upon the pi'esent state of these 
 Indians, the causes of their discontent, and the incapacity of white 
 settlers to understand the peculiar culture of the Indian. The establish- 
 ment of industrial schools, which is now taken up energetically, is a 
 great step forward, and will help the Indians to reach inde})endcnce and 
 to retain or regain self-esteem, ono of the foundations of progress. 1 will 
 not repeat the statements made and the views expressed last year. It is 
 to he hoped that by a considerate land policy, by the encouragement of 
 industries rather than of agriculture, and by an attempt to develop existing 
 institutions instead of destroying them the Indians will in course of time 
 become useful men and good citizens. 
 
 Physical Character. 
 
 The physical characteristics of the coast tribes arc very uniform. This 
 13 undoubtedly due to the fre{|uent intermarriages between tho various 
 tribes, which have had also a distinct effect upon the various languages, 
 some of which have borrowed great numbers of words from tho languages 
 spoken by neighbouring tribes. I shall refer to this fact later on. 
 1 lie habitus of the northern tribes of this region is similar to that of 
 I'-ast Asiatic tribes — a fact which was observed by R. Virchow, who 
 c.\amiucd a number of Rilqula who visited Berlin in the winter of 
 
12 
 
 RErouT — 1889. 
 
 1885-8G. Tliis similarity is very marked among the Tlingit, Haida, 
 'J'simsliian, Kwakiutl and Biliinla, to a li'ss extent among the Nootka, wljile 
 the Coast Salisli and the Salish oFtho interior show ii diileront type. ^\s 
 the liilfiula speak a language belonging to the Salish family, it must lie 
 assumed tliat they aeipiired their distinct physical character through 
 intermixlure with the neighbouring tribes. 
 
 jMany tribes of thi.s region are in the habit of deforming the heads of 
 their children. I noticed three ditl'erent metliods of deformaliou. Th« 
 tribes of the northern part of Vancouver island use circular bandages 
 by means of which tlie occiput acquires an extraordinary length. Ex- 
 cessively deformed heads of this kind are found on the northern part of 
 the west coast of Vancouver Island amonu the K'oskl'mo. i'arther south 
 a strong pressure is exerted ujion the occiput, a bandage is laid around 
 the bead immediately behind the coronal suture, and a soft cushion is 
 xised for pressing down the forehead. The Flatlieads proper compress 
 forehead and occiput by means of bo.ards or hard cushions. It seems 
 that the Tlingit, llaida, and Tsimshian never practised the custom of 
 head-tlattening. It is unfortunate that no observations on the Tsimshian 
 of the upper Skeena River exist. Those at the mouth of the river have 
 frequently intermariicd with the Tlingit, liaida, and Ileillsuk". 
 
 Among the Tlingit, Ilaida, Tsimshian and Heiltsuk* the custom pre- 
 vails of perforating the lower lips of the females. In these perforations, 
 wdiich are enlarged with increasing age, labrcts are worn, which are iu 
 some instances as long as 40mm. and as wide as 20mm. The men of all 
 the coast tribes have the septum perforated, the operation being per- 
 formed in early childhood. I'Jarritigs are worn either in a series of jjcr- 
 foliations of the helix or in tlie lobe of the ear. 
 
 Chiefs' daughters, amovig the Tsimshian, have ihc incisors ground 
 down to the gums by chewing a pebble of jad(, the row of teeth thus 
 assuming an arched form. 
 
 Among the Nootka scars may frequently be seen running at regular 
 intervals from the shoulder down the breast to the belly, and in the same 
 way down the legs and arms. Tattooings are found on arras, breast, back, 
 legs, and feet among the Haida ; on arms and feet among the Tsimshian, 
 Kwakiutl, and Hihpila ; on breist and arms among the Nootka; on the 
 jaw among the Coast Salish women. 
 
 !Meml)ers of tribes practising the Ilamats'a ceremonies (see p. 5")) 
 show remarkable scars produced by biting. At certain festivals it is tlu: 
 duty of the Ilamats'a to bite a piece of flesii out of the arms, leg, or 
 breast of a man. 
 
 The women of the Kwakiutl tribes wear very tight anklets, which 
 })revent free circulation between feet and legs. These anklets leave 
 lasting impressions. 
 
 iiefore describing the general features of these tribes I give a table of 
 measurements. Unfortunately I was not in possession of a (jllsfiicre, and 
 therefore no great weight is attributed to the measures, which ought to 
 be made with that instrument. A T-square, to which a movable arm wa.-; 
 attached, was used as a substitute. The seven individuals, all male, wiiv 
 measured in the jail at Victoria, kind permission having been given by 
 !Major CJrant. I did not consider it advisable to make anthropomelrieal 
 measurements in the villages of thu natives, as 1 feared to rouse their 
 distrust, and had nowhere time to become well accjuainted with them. It 
 
 ^^;lxilu 
 
 ! Cliin tr 
 j Ciiiii t( 
 
 Width, 
 
 DistaiK 
 
 M 
 )l 
 
 Chin to 
 
 Tnin:us 
 Nose, h 
 
 -> \\ 
 Mouth, 
 I'-ar, lio 
 lloi'izon 
 Vei'tica! 
 
 ('I cai 
 
 f.''iiprth- 
 
 UvhM 
 
 l''ai'iiil i 
 
ITalda, 
 a, wl)i!.! 
 
 [)V. j\i 
 
 itiust 1h; 
 through 
 
 heads of 
 )ii. The 
 jaiidaux's 
 th. E-\- 
 n part of 
 ler south 
 1 around 
 ushiou is 
 CO Ml pros 
 It seems 
 ;ustoni ol' 
 'simshiaii 
 Lvcr bavo 
 
 ;tom pre- 
 ■t'orations, 
 eh arc in 
 uen of all 
 )eiug per- 
 ,cs of per- 
 
 is 
 
 I 
 
 s ground 
 oeth thus 
 
 it regular 
 
 the sauie 
 
 jast, baek, 
 
 [sinishian, 
 
 ; on the , 
 
 keo p. 5")) 
 Is it is tliL! 
 jis, leg, or 
 
 tts, which 
 lets leave 
 
 la table of 
 
 \slcre, and 
 
 ongiit to 
 
 arm wa;; 
 
 |iale, were 
 
 given by 
 
 lometrical 
 
 Use theii' 
 
 Itbeui. It 
 
 -il 
 
 ON THK NOIirU-WESTKBN TUIBKS OF CANADA. 13 
 
 almost impossible to use profitably a very short time for both antliro- 
 
 il collections, 
 ere measu 
 
 ■al and ethnological 
 The following individual 
 
 nonii'ti'U 
 
 I roc 
 
 Haida 
 
 1. Getgalga'o (Samuel), 25 year.s old; raven gens; 
 
 native of Coal Harbour. 
 
 2. Johnny Dixie, circ. oO years old ; native of Skide- 
 
 gato 
 
 Tsinishian : 11. Johnny, circ. 32 years old ; native of Fort Simp';on. 
 •i. William Sebji'sa, eirr. 28 years old ; raven gens ; 
 
 native of ^Ii'([tlak(i|atla. 
 5. Peter Vann, Kcsuwa'tk, circ. 25 years old ; wolf gens ; 
 native of !Meqtlakqatla. 
 Kwakiutl : G. Nalakyutsa, circ. 50 years old; native of Fort Rupert, 
 Nootka : 7. Wisjin, c/rc. 25 years ; Nitinath. 
 
 Ilaklft 
 
 T 
 
 - b 
 
 from 
 r.s 
 
 
 
 
 
 -'= '^ 
 
 .2 r 2 
 
 CI s 
 
 
 
 
 — ^ 7» •*. 
 
 — ^ -X 'I 
 
 .Xl 
 
 %0'ii 
 
 i-'is ? 
 
 
 
 - rj >- 
 
 c o 
 
 G s 
 
 J 'C 
 
 -r-^ 
 
 ■Ji.B 
 
 
 1-3 
 
 Ti-iinshian 
 
 rf 
 
 
 C3 *^ Y^ ■ C *-' I* 
 
 Kwa- 
 kiutl 
 
 +J T. 
 3 7- 
 
 is 
 
 
 N'ootka 
 
 
 I. Head. 
 
 ^ra^iimum length 
 
 Maximum wiiUh 
 
 llci^'lit of car . 
 
 t'hin to liair 
 
 Cliin to root of nose . 
 
 IJodt of nose to mouth 
 
 Widtliof face between zyj?. arch 
 „ ,, angles of jaw 
 
 „ of Slip. max. lione 
 
 Distance of od<:cs of orbit. s 
 
 „ inner corners of eyes 
 
 „ outer corners of ^-ve 
 
 Chin lo trnfrus . 
 
 Tniu'us to root of nose 
 
 NosL', liL'iii'ht 
 „ width 
 
 -Miiiitli, Icngtli . 
 
 Kar, lieight 
 
 Ilnrizontal circiunference . 
 
 Vertical circuniference from car 
 to car 
 
 T.onrrth.^vidtli index, 
 llt'ij,Mit of ear index , 
 Facial index 
 Nasal index 
 
 mm. 
 i;i2 
 Hi) 
 119 
 
 int; 
 i;{o 
 
 70 
 
 l.-)t 
 lit 
 
 10.^, 
 
 107 
 
 38 
 
 It 5 
 
 14() 
 
 112 
 
 58 
 
 ;58 
 
 .50 
 
 70 
 
 r-81 
 
 358 
 
 nra. 
 
 mm. 
 
 2o:) 
 
 201 
 
 l.VJ 
 
 154 
 
 — 
 
 127 
 
 21:5 
 
 20;5 
 
 118 
 
 12s 
 
 80 
 
 90 
 
 142 
 
 151 
 
 — 
 
 102 
 
 lOS 
 
 121 
 
 1 'JO 
 
 108 
 
 37 
 
 oS 
 
 !>0 
 
 98 
 
 1.50 
 
 I.jO 
 
 112 
 
 124 
 
 — 
 
 57 
 
 41 
 
 38 
 
 n7 
 
 60 
 
 70 
 
 73 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 mra. 
 192 
 1 00 
 127 
 201 
 120 
 SI 
 
 110 
 
 104 
 
 112 
 
 108 
 
 35 
 
 !t5 
 
 152 
 
 119 
 
 02 
 
 33 
 
 5(; 
 
 70 
 578 
 305 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 199 
 
 200 
 
 IT) 9 
 
 175 
 
 120 
 
 130 
 
 188 
 
 200 
 
 122 
 
 121 
 
 74 
 
 81 
 
 151 
 
 138 
 
 114 
 
 — 
 
 112 
 
 105 
 
 113 
 
 121 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 98 
 
 92 
 
 144 
 
 152 
 
 114 
 
 107 
 
 54 
 
 54 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 54 
 
 57 
 
 07 
 
 71 
 
 C03 
 
 — 
 
 341 
 
 — 
 
 mm. 
 
 189 
 
 H)2 
 
 135 
 
 190 
 
 127 
 
 78 
 
 152 
 
 122 
 
 117 
 
 121 
 
 40 
 
 99 
 
 150 
 
 129 
 
 00 
 
 41 
 
 59 
 
 07 
 
 II. Indices. 
 
 
 
 
 
 77-0 
 
 78'3 
 
 70-6 
 
 833 
 
 799 
 
 85-0 
 
 770 
 
 — 
 
 03-2 
 
 00' 1 
 
 033 
 
 03 1 
 
 84-4 
 
 83'1 
 
 84' 1 
 
 80'3 
 
 80-8 
 
 87-7 
 
 055 
 
 — 
 
 00-0 
 
 53-2 
 
 70-4 
 
 01-8 
 
 857 
 71'4 
 830 
 083 
 
 I- 
 
 ff 
 
 V 
 
14 
 
 REPORT — 1880. 
 
 m I 
 
 
 Ilaiila 
 
 T 
 
 .liinshian 
 
 Kwa- 
 kiutl 
 
 t 2 
 
 N'ootkn 
 
 _ k"" 
 
 #4 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 O 3 
 
 it;- ? 
 
 'J -5 >. 
 
 D 0- 2 
 
 
 
 I 2.2 
 
 '-^ j2 aj 
 
 
 .S2 
 
 
 
 >-2 g 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 5 n. 
 11 
 
 
 
 ^:^ 
 
 3 
 
 ►-S 
 
 »* 
 
 1 
 
 y,^ 
 
 IS 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 in. r.oDY. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Total height .... 
 
 l.fiS!) 
 
 I, cm 
 
 1,037 
 
 1,049 
 
 1.589 
 
 1,575 
 
 1.711 
 
 DisI !iiKu-. bet woon (inpor-tips.the 
 
 1,705 
 
 1,092 
 
 1,727 
 
 — 
 
 1,070 
 
 1,004 
 
 1,829 
 
 arms fxtcmlud horizontally 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Iluiyht (jf chill .... 
 
 1,M1 
 
 L.S.'J.S 
 
 1,413 
 
 1,405 
 
 1,.S.56 
 
 1,.^43 
 
 1,470 
 
 „ top of skTiiiirn . 
 
 i.iit;-) 
 
 1,2.S7 
 
 1,300 
 
 1,317 
 
 1.278 
 
 1 ,273 
 
 1,391 
 
 „ sliouhlcr (riulil) 
 
 I,S82 
 
 I.IUI 
 
 1,313 
 
 1,329 
 
 1,321 
 
 1 ,292 
 
 1,103 
 
 (left). 
 
 — 
 
 l,2Sfi 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — - 
 
 — 
 
 „ cll-ow (ri^^ht) . 
 
 1,071 
 
 9t'i8 
 
 1,007 
 
 1,025 
 
 9!I5 
 
 905 
 
 1,00.-, 
 
 wrist .... 
 
 825 
 
 7.^2 
 
 708 
 
 820 
 
 770 
 
 700 
 
 814 
 
 „ t^econd linger . 
 
 r.i2 
 
 570 
 
 571 
 
 014 
 
 597 
 
 571 
 
 01 S 
 
 „ niinilt'S 
 
 1,210 
 
 1,105 
 
 1,143 
 
 1,205 
 
 — 
 
 1,133 
 
 1,230 
 
 „ na\(il 
 
 970 
 
 9i:{ 
 
 933 
 
 940 
 
 870 
 
 897 
 
 985 
 
 „ crista ilii . 
 
 940 
 
 930 
 
 930 
 
 943 
 
 905 
 
 933 
 
 — 
 
 „ synilihysis. 
 
 — 
 
 8;}5 
 
 851 
 
 — 
 
 — . 
 
 832 
 
 — 
 
 „ pt'riniuiini . 
 
 — 
 
 711 
 
 721 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 714 
 
 — 
 
 „ ant. sup. iliac spine . 
 
 — 
 
 873 
 
 870 
 
 892 
 
 857 
 
 851 
 
 — 
 
 „ trochanter 
 
 8(51 
 
 841 
 
 829 
 
 825 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 „ put(>lla 
 
 441 
 
 444 
 
 400 
 
 427 
 
 438 
 
 429 
 
 — 
 
 „ nialli'oliis intcTnus . 
 
 — 
 
 80 
 
 83 
 
 — 
 
 
 89 
 
 — 
 
 „ seventh vertebra 
 
 — 
 
 1,302 
 
 — 
 
 1,400 
 
 1,353 
 
 1,299 
 
 1,475 
 
 „ vertex in sittini^^ 
 
 — 
 
 873 
 
 870 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 873 
 
 914 
 
 Width between iliac spines 
 
 — . 
 
 207 
 
 207 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 „ iliac crests 
 
 — 
 
 292 
 
 298 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 283 
 
 — 
 
 „ trnchiinters 
 
 — 
 
 314 
 
 314 
 
 — 
 
 
 289 
 
 
 
 Circumference of chest . 
 
 010 
 
 930 
 
 900 
 
 940 
 
 950 
 
 925 
 
 945 
 
 „ waist . 
 
 800 
 
 815 
 
 822 
 
 822 
 
 825 
 
 800 
 
 727 
 
 thigh . 
 
 — 
 
 508 
 
 524 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 480 
 
 — 
 
 „ calf of leg . 
 
 — 
 
 311 
 
 355 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 310 
 
 — 
 
 Length of thumb 
 
 G7 
 
 05 
 
 00 
 
 03 
 
 57 
 
 63 
 
 05 
 
 „ sccon<l finger . 
 
 98 
 
 101 
 
 97 
 
 97 
 
 97 
 
 98 
 
 98 
 
 Width of hand at fingers . 
 
 84 
 
 82 
 
 82 
 
 84 
 
 85 
 
 84 
 
 78 
 
 Length of foot .... 
 
 243 
 
 245 
 
 241 
 
 236 
 
 — 
 
 245 
 
 251 
 
 It appears from tlieso tables that tlio size of these Indians vanes con- 
 sidorably; includincj mcasnrcments of nine Bilqula, made by R. Virchow 
 (see ' Verb. Ges. f. Anthr., Ethn. u. Urg.' 188G, p. 215), the average beiglit 
 is 1,655 mm., the extremes being 1,743 mm. and 1,542 mm. I am under 
 the impression tbat, as regards size, the Coast Salish are much smaller 
 than the other tribes. Tlio distance between the tips of the finger, the 
 arms being extended, is in all cases greater than the total beight. The 
 skin is very light, I'esembling that of Europeans. Only No. of the 
 above table has a somewhat reddi.sh hue. This, however, is due to the 
 fact that he is the only one among the inaiyiduals measured who does 
 not wear trousers and shirt, bat still adheres to the ancient custom of 
 wearing a blanhet. In most cases the hair is black, smooth, coarse, and 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 16 
 
 1,8'-".) 1 
 1.470 
 
 1 ,:v.) 1 
 
 1,10^ 
 
 l.OC)') 
 814 
 
 r.is 
 i,2;k) 
 
 1.475 
 <U4 
 
 045 
 727 
 
 08 
 
 78 
 
 251 
 
 Ivies con- 
 IVlrcliow 
 
 Im until v 
 
 to 
 
 smii 
 lifrer, 
 
 |u 
 
 llir 
 
 ilie 
 
 . Tlie 
 
 of tlio 
 
 be to tlie 
 
 ?ho doos 
 
 luslom I'f 
 
 abniulant. In a few cases it has a brownisli tinge. In all tribes tlicro 
 are a few individnals who have sliglitly wavy liair. In the villago of 
 
 Cc 
 
 it(;lnt 
 
 ValU 
 
 ohserveu wavy or c\ 
 
 •ly li 
 
 lirso, aiH 
 
 b;i mcnos, 
 
 comparatively iru([UL'miy. ju is wuilm rumin-Knig iiiiiu tiiu iimiiiiis iiiivo 
 a tradition referring to thi.s fact, which shows that this peeiih'ai'ity lias 
 ohtained for several generations. The eyebrows are thick, and remark- 
 ably wide on the outer side. This jieculiarity may also be observed in 
 the carvings of these tribes. The eyebrows iire carefully trimmed. Tiio 
 hcatd is sparse, but it must be remembered that the hair is generally 
 jHiilcd ont as it appears, particularly on the cheeks, while the moiistacho 
 and tlie chin-tuft are iiUowed to grow. The iris is dark brown. \'ircliow 
 first pointed out the fi'queiit occurrence of the ^*/('(,vi inferna. I found it 
 to occur very generally, particularly among the llaida and Tsinishian. 
 Tiio face is wide, the cheek-bones prominent, the index cliama'!- 
 prtwitpic, averaging (including Virehow'.s measures) 831. The nose is 
 narrow, the root narrow and depressed. The ridge of the nose is fre- 
 qiifutly depressed, particularly among the llaida and T.sinisliian ; whilo 
 among the Nootka, Kwakiutl, and Saliali I observed very generally 
 straight or slightly hooked noses. It seems that the heads of the 
 southern tribes are decidedly more bracliycephalic than those of tho 
 northern tribes ; but it is diilicult to decide how far that is due to arti- 
 ficial defoi'mation. 
 
 From the limited material at my disposal, I do not venture to describe 
 any physical features as characteristic of one tribe or the other. The 
 frt([uent intermarriages between the various tribes make it probable that 
 none of them shows peculiar somatological characteristics which do not 
 occur also among the Tieighbouring tribes. Notwithstanding this fact, it 
 is quite possible to distinguish individuals belonging to various tribes, 
 but this is principally due to the variety of artificial deformations. Tho 
 Kwakiutl have a remarkably deep sinus in the hair at its anterior margin. 
 Their heads are very long and wide, particularly when compai'ed with 
 tho width of the face. 
 
 1 am unable in the present report to give a full description of tho 
 crania and skeletons I collected; the latter belong principally to tribes of 
 the Salish stock. I have only a single Tsimshian cranium, which, how- 
 ever, is of some interest. I'lates I. to VI. are orthogonal tracings of four 
 Tsimshian crania. No. 2 to 4 are from tho ]V[orton Collection in the 
 Museum of tho Academy of Natural Sciences at PIiilade}ihia. Tlio 
 measurements of this series of crania are given in the table on the follow- 
 ing page. 
 
 Nofcft. — No. 1 was a syphilitic individual. Shirks of the disease are 
 pccn particularly around the bregma and on the right [larietal bone. 
 The cranium is asymmetrical, more ])articularly the occiput. The sagittal 
 suture ill its hind part is depressed, while slight indications of a ridge 
 may be seen in the part immediately behind the bregma. The face is 
 narrow as compared to the other specimens. The grooves of the lachiymal 
 duct are comparatively small. The most peculiar feature of the present 
 skuli is its dental and alveolar prognathism of the upper row of teeth, 
 which project considerably over tho lower one. 
 
 Nos. 2, 3, and 4 show very marked sagittal ridges. There is no indi- 
 cation of premature synostosis, and I conclado that this nmst be con- 
 Bidered a characteristic feature ot' these skulls. No. 3 has a flattened 
 occiput, but without any compensatory flattening of the forehead. This 
 
 t i 
 
 ■II 
 
 m. 
 
 m 
 
in 
 
 iiEroRT— 1889. 
 
 hIiows tliiit. tlir lliiltriiiii!,' is not intentional, but niorcly tlic result of tlio 
 liMi'iliicss oi" till! (•[•adli! hoiird on \vlii(!li tlio cliild wuh kept. TIk; occi- 
 pitiil spino anil ]ti'<it iibci'iinco of No. 3 ai'P vi'iy ntron^ly dtvclopod, but 
 tiiey firo vory inur'kLMl in all tlin crania. Tlio vcvtical plate of tlio ethmoid 
 borif! and tlio nasal procesa of tlio maxillary bones are in Nos. 2 and .'J 
 niiicli distorted. 
 
 Tshnshi'an. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 lioiiH, 
 
 Ni>. h;,. 
 
 11. 
 
 111. 
 
 IV. 
 
 
 
 I'hihulrl- 
 |>lii;i, 
 
 IMlil;i(ifl- 
 ]illin, 
 
 Phila.lrlphia, 
 No. '.»^7. 
 
 
 N.i. -Ji;!. 
 
 No. 2M. 
 
 Yoiitli, aljout 
 
 
 Jbde 
 
 FeiiLile 
 
 18 vi'itrs of age 
 
 
 Ck.\ni.\. 
 
 
 
 
 1. lloiizontal Icnetli 
 
 171', 
 
 iss 
 
 \:c, 
 
 177 
 
 2. Maxiiimiii Icnjih , 
 
 17t) 
 
 1!I0 
 
 ]7(> 
 
 178 
 
 :i. „ width . 
 
 i;;.-. 
 
 117 
 
 i:i,-) 
 
 147 
 
 '1. Miiiiiiium width of forclioad 
 
 K'.) 
 
 it! 
 
 87 
 
 95 
 
 f). Tulal hci-lit .... 
 
 i:w 
 
 134 
 
 127 
 
 129 
 
 (). H'i.Lcht ni' v.xr 
 
 no 
 
 112 
 
 112 
 
 112 
 
 7. JiCMi-tli of l)a-is . 
 
 it.> 
 
 lo;) 
 
 100 
 
 95 
 
 8. Wi.hh of basis . 
 
 iti> 
 
 11 ;> 
 
 lOG 
 
 102 
 
 1). Lciif^th of pars basilaris 
 
 2'.) 
 
 32 
 
 31 
 
 • 2.3 
 
 10. l\Iax. width of For. Ma^ii. . 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 28 
 
 30 
 
 11. :\Iax. length of Fur. :\Ia,Lrn. . 
 
 ■);{ 
 
 3S 
 
 3.J 
 
 3() 
 
 12. Iforizonlal (,'ii-cniiiforenco . 
 
 not) 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 520 
 
 18. S.iudttal circumfi'vcnco 
 
 H(i:$ 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 3(;g 
 
 11. YiTtical circumference. 
 
 301 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 380 
 
 1."). Widtli of face 
 
 117 
 
 lot; 
 
 10.-, 
 
 90 
 
 1(). Width borwccn zygm, arches 
 
 12(; 
 
 149 
 
 139 
 
 124 
 
 17. lIciLcht of \ip]ier face . 
 
 C!) ' 
 
 81 
 
 69 
 
 05 
 
 IS. lleiuht of nose . 
 
 49 
 
 57 
 
 52 
 
 49 
 
 lit. i\Iax. width of nose 
 
 20 
 
 24 
 
 2;-) 
 
 22 
 
 20. Widtli of ort)it . 
 
 38 
 
 41 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 21. lleiKlit of orbit . 
 
 32 
 
 30 
 
 3.-) 
 
 30 
 
 22. liOnurth of ])alato . 
 
 no 
 
 59 
 
 54 
 
 (45) 
 
 2!). Width of jialato at .second 
 
 35 
 
 38 
 
 38 
 
 35 
 
 molar 
 
 
 
 
 
 21. Width of palate at posterior 
 
 40 
 
 — 
 
 47 
 
 42 
 
 end 
 
 
 
 
 
 2"). Lens'li of face 
 
 no 
 
 102 
 
 98 
 
 95 
 
 2(5. Angle of proiile . 
 
 83= 
 IxmcES. 
 
 88° 
 
 8(1° 
 
 
 Lonc:th — width .... 
 
 7(;-7 
 
 78 '2 
 
 707 
 
 83-0 , 
 
 Length -height .... 
 
 73-!) 
 
 71-3 
 
 721 
 
 72 9 
 
 ir 
 
 I do not intend, in the present report, to treat of the deformed crania of 
 the southern tribes. Snflicc it to say that three methods of deformatioti 
 are practised in British Columbia: (i) the conical otic, which results in the 
 lon,!.^ heads of the Kwakintl, and which is also used by the (^'atl6lt({; (ii) the 
 flattening by means of cushions and bandages, resulting in asymmetrical 
 hyperbrachycephalic heads ; and (iii) flattening by means of hoards. It 
 may bo of interest to show the effect of these tnethods upon the length and 
 width of the crania. The second group comprises only crania flattened 
 by means of cushions. I add a short column of crania with littlo or no 
 deformations. 
 
 ' Height of face, 116. 
 
 
 I. 
 
 Ho 
 
 2. 
 
 Ma 
 
 3. 
 
 lilt 
 
 4. 
 
 :^ia 
 
 5. 
 
 Mi 
 
 0. 
 
 Tot 
 
 7. 
 
 Hci 
 
ON Tin; NORTII-WKSTKRN TRIBES Of CANADA. 
 
 17 
 
 1. Coinox 
 
 2. Snnltjh 
 
 1 3. Son^'iMli 
 
 
 Lenj;lh 
 
 Wi.ltli 
 
 Leiii;tli 
 
 Widtli 
 158 
 
 LfiiL,'th 
 , 192 
 
 Wiilth 
 
 
 171 
 
 150 
 
 158 
 
 HI 
 
 
 181 
 
 iin 
 
 ICO 
 
 117 
 
 18(5 
 
 111 
 
 
 173 
 
 i;is 
 
 171 
 
 15:{ 
 
 is:{ 
 
 112 
 
 
 IC'i 
 
 i:il 
 
 IC-J 
 
 1 :,H 
 
 17t5 
 
 i;j!» 
 
 
 17:» 
 
 115 
 
 111 
 
 l.-)2 
 
 17.S 
 
 111 
 
 
 177 
 
 i:;.-, 
 
 If.l 
 
 15(5 
 
 l'.»() 
 
 147 
 
 
 178 
 
 ii;? 
 
 15(; 
 
 \->r, 
 
 189 
 
 113 
 
 
 lrt(i 
 
 117 
 
 117 
 
 i;5s 
 
 180 
 
 140 
 
 
 171 
 
 i;is 
 
 I5t; 
 
 i;i7 
 
 180 
 
 140 
 
 
 171 
 
 1 ;',;) 
 
 M!) 
 
 ir.l 
 
 187 
 
 14(5 
 
 
 175 
 
 112 
 
 Kil 
 
 itiU 
 
 195 
 
 157 
 114 
 
 Avorape . 
 
 . 175 1 
 
 142 
 
 159 
 
 153 
 
 185 
 
 Iii'lice.s 
 
 81 
 
 •1 
 
 9i;2 
 
 77 8 
 
 The following are measurements of a few Songisb crania in the pos- 
 session of Dr. Milne, of Victoria, British Columbia. 
 
 8o7ig{sh Crania. 
 
 
 [. 
 
 II. 
 
 III. 
 
 1. Horizontal length .... 
 
 183 
 
 . 
 
 IKI 
 
 
 2. Maximum length 
 
 
 
 1S3-5 
 
 153 
 
 ]Sl 
 
 
 3. Intcrtuboral loiii;-(h . 
 
 
 
 1S2-5 
 
 14r, 
 
 ISO 
 
 
 \. ;\lMxinium widlli 
 
 
 
 13:»-8 
 
 15I(J 
 
 l.'.l 
 
 
 5. Miiiiinuin widtii of fon-licad 
 
 
 
 US 
 
 its 
 
 97 
 
 
 1"). Total liciglit 
 
 
 
 143-2 
 
 123 2 
 
 13S-,-, 
 
 
 7. Heisrht ot bro^j^ma 
 
 
 
 141 
 
 122-3 
 
 137 
 
 
 8. llciiriit of car . 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 inc, 
 
 117 
 
 
 9. IIoi}?lit from ear to vertex 
 
 
 
 111 
 
 114' 
 
 1-3 
 
 
 10. LeiiLTtli of ba.-iis 
 
 
 
 103 
 
 89 
 
 I'll 
 
 
 liW. Width of basi.s 
 
 
 
 111-2 
 
 10(5 
 
 118 
 
 
 11. Length of pars basilnris . 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 23-5 
 
 29 
 
 
 12. Max. width of foramen magnum 
 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 37-5 
 
 
 13. Max. length of foramen magnum 
 
 
 34-5 
 
 29 
 
 31 
 
 
 14. Horizontal circumference 
 
 
 523 
 
 48.-, 
 
 5:)5 
 
 
 15. Saijittal circnmference 
 
 
 
 375 
 
 321 2 
 
 3S2 
 
 
 Ki. Vertical circumference 
 
 
 
 320 
 
 32H 
 
 335 
 
 
 17. Wiihh of face . 
 
 
 
 105 
 
 91 5 
 
 103 
 
 
 18, Width between zygom. arch . 
 
 
 
 14(5 
 
 130 
 
 llS-5 
 
 
 lit. Heiijht of face . 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 101-5 
 
 — 
 
 
 20. Ileiglit of upper part of face . 
 
 
 
 72'5 
 
 fit 
 
 7t'. 
 
 
 21. licMuht of nose 
 
 
 
 50 
 
 47 
 
 51 
 
 
 22. :\Iax. widtli of nose . 
 
 
 
 22-7 
 
 22 
 
 2(;-5 
 
 
 23. Max. width of orbit . 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 3S-5 
 
 41 
 
 
 24. Horizontal width of orbit 
 
 
 
 41-5 
 
 38 
 
 41 
 
 
 2.'). Maximum hci'Jit of orbit 
 
 
 
 3(r5 
 
 35 
 
 3 1 -."i 
 
 
 2'). Vertical lieiglit of orbit . 
 
 
 
 37 
 
 35 
 
 :!ti 
 
 
 27. Lenirth of palate 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 45 
 
 51-5 
 
 
 2^. Width of palate at second mol 
 
 ir 
 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 41 
 
 
 2'.t. Widtli of [lalate at posterior end 
 
 
 4(5 
 
 39 
 
 47 
 
 
 30. Length of face. 
 
 
 102 
 
 88 
 
 100 
 
 
 ' Vertex 25 mm. behind bregma. 
 
 * 124 Sut. nas. front, to bregma, 222 Lambda. 248 interparietal sut. 
 
 B 
 
18 
 
 flKPORT— 18«a. 
 
 Finally, T pivo a Horics of moasuromonts of seven crania from Lyttoti, 
 probably of tlio NtlakyapanuKj, collected a number of years aj^o by 
 Or. G. ^[. Dawson, who kindly bad tho nieasnremcritM made at my reiiuest. 
 
 Skulls from Ljjtlon B. 0. in tho Mii!<n>nv nf the Geological and Natural 
 
 Iliiilnfij Snriu'i/ iif (JaiKtiIa. 
 
 
 
 X... 
 
 X.I. 
 
 X.I. 
 
 X.I. 
 
 X«. 
 
 X(.. 
 
 X... 
 
 
 
 JtilH 
 
 yt;i) 
 
 .S70 
 
 ;i71 
 173 
 
 37-' 
 
 373 
 
 374 
 
 1. 
 
 ^I:i.\imiiiii IcriL'th 
 
 171 
 
 185 
 
 167 
 
 1S2 
 
 175 
 
 173 
 
 2. 
 
 llmi/.untii! li-nu'lh 
 
 17:5 
 
 
 
 ir»7 
 
 172 
 
 181 
 
 175 
 
 1(19 
 
 ;{. 
 
 Miixiiimin widlli 
 
 i:!!) 
 
 MO 
 
 138 
 
 i:ilt 
 
 131 
 
 141 
 
 132 
 
 4. 
 
 i! ^ni'iium witlth of f i n-i^ho.ad 
 
 !tl 
 
 W 
 
 1>1 
 
 81) 
 
 IM 
 
 9(1 
 
 93 
 
 n. 
 
 Ttitjil JKiii^lit 
 
 127 
 
 
 132 
 
 131 
 
 1 :!.-. 
 
 131 
 
 I.Tl 
 
 (1. 
 
 Ili'i^rlit of ear 
 
 111 
 
 
 5)2 
 
 110 
 
 121 
 
 123 
 
 120 
 
 7. 
 
 bi'imtli (if hasis . 
 
 ill) 
 
 
 97 
 
 '.til 
 
 99 
 
 103 
 
 102 
 
 8. 
 
 Ilnri/.ontal circiinifi'ronco . 
 
 •I'.tr 
 
 nu; 
 
 485 
 
 4!I7 
 
 r,i Ki 
 
 51(1 
 
 191 
 
 !t. 
 
 Sau'ittal (■in'iiiiifi;rciico 
 
 3W> 
 
 mr) 
 
 31G 
 
 3-18 
 
 3S(; 
 
 319 
 
 3K1 
 
 10. 
 
 Vertical ('irniunfcreiico 
 
 HI 4 
 
 321 
 
 305 
 
 307 
 
 307 
 
 324 
 
 311 
 
 11. 
 
 Widlli of I'aoo . 
 
 107 
 
 
 
 112 
 
 11.-. 
 
 111 
 
 122 
 
 — 
 
 12. 
 
 W'idih between z}'^'. arch . 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 127 
 
 135 
 
 — 
 
 1 
 
 i:i. 
 
 Hei^'lil (if face . 
 
 fi2 
 
 — 
 
 (58 
 
 72 
 
 (54 
 
 r.9 
 
 r.i 
 
 11. 
 
 IIc^iLilit (if nn^e . 
 
 51 
 
 
 
 52 
 
 55 
 
 49 
 
 40 
 
 47 
 
 \r,. 
 
 Width of nose 
 
 21 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 2r, 
 
 23 
 
 2(5 
 
 22 
 
 1(5. 
 
 An;.,do uf prolilo . 
 
 8S^ 
 
 — 
 
 79= 
 
 80° 
 80'1 
 
 88° 
 
 85° 
 
 82° 
 
 Lcni.jtli — widtli — index 
 
 8()-4 
 
 7rr7 
 
 82'6 
 
 72-4 
 
 82 3 
 
 78'1. 
 
 SkXSKS and ]\[i;NTAL ClIAUACTEUfl. 
 
 It is only with a considerable de<^reo of difTidenco tbat I venture to 
 express an opinion on the sensest, mental capacity, and character of tlio 
 natives of British Colmubia. Observations made in tlie coar.se of a few 
 days hardly entitle an ob.scrvcr to jndfjo of the mental faculties or of Hie 
 virtues and vices of a peo|)le. The only tj'ibes with whom I came into 
 closer contact are the Tlatliisik'oala of Hope Islaiul and the (^'atloltij 
 of Comox, among both of whom I lived for a few weeks in 188G. 
 
 The Indians of the whole coast are able-bodied and muscular, the 
 upper limbs being very generally better developed than tho lower ones, 
 as the constant use of the parldle strengthens arm.s and chest. Tlioy 
 have a keen sight, but in old age become frequently blear-eyed, presum- 
 ably an efTect of the smoke which alwa\s tills the houses. I have net 
 made any experiments regarding their acuteness of sight, hearing, ami 
 smell. Their mental capacity is undoubtedly a high one. The state of 
 their culture is ample proof of this. I have expressed ray opinion regard- 
 ing the possibility of educating them at another place. 
 
 The best material for judging their character is contained in their 
 stories, in which appears what is considered good and what bad, what 
 ooramendable and wliat objectionable, what beautiful and what otherwise. 
 Regarding the last point, whiteness of skin and slenderncss of limbs is 
 considered one of the principal beauties of men and women. Another 
 beauty of the latter is long, black hair. In some tales red hair is de- 
 Hcribod as a peculiar beauty of women. Red paint on the face, tight- 
 lit.tiug bracH'lets and anklets of copper, nose- and car-ornaments of 
 variognted lialiotis slielh, and liair strewn with eagle-downs add to the 
 
ON THE NOltril-WESTKKN TUIIlKS OF C'ANAItA. 
 
 ID 
 
 nafunil clinriiis. Tli(> fact (liat, in liniioin- of tlio aiTivjil of fi iciid-^ tlio 
 lioiiso is swept and strewn with siiiul, ami that the piojile hat no at snt'li 
 ocrasions, shows that cleanliness is appreeiated. The current expression 
 is that the lioiise is .■lo cleaned that no had smell ifniairis to nU'end thcf 
 (jacst. For the satno reason the Indian fakes repeated baths heTore 
 praviiig, 'that he may be of agreeable siiit'll to the Deity.' 
 
 'J'ho Indian is fji'ave and selt-oniposi'd in all iiis actions. This is 
 shown bv (he fact that playins^ is not oidy considered uiidi;^idlied, bat 
 a(.'taally as bad. In the 'I'sinishian lanjfua;^'e the term for 'to p!ay ' 
 means to talk to no pui'[)i)se; and doing anything 'to no parpt)se ' is con- 
 leniptible to the Indian. 
 
 lie is rash in his aniirr, bnt does not easily lose coid I'cl ov-r his 
 actions. Ho sits down or li(;s down sulleidy for days without parraking 
 (il food, and when ha rises his tii-st thoiiLrb' is, "ot liow to taki; reveng(>, 
 hut to show that ho is snj)erior to his advcrsai-y. A great pride and 
 vanity, combined witli the most susceptible jealousy, cliaracteriso all 
 actions of the Indian. Ho watches that he may receive his pi-oper share 
 of honour at festivals; he cannot endure to bo ridiculed for even tho 
 .>-lig!iitst mistake ; he carefully guai'ds all his actions, and looks l\)v due 
 honour to bo })aid to him by fi-iends, strangcr.s, and subordinates. This 
 peculiarity apj)ears most clearly in gi-eat festivals, wliich are themselves 
 an outcome of the vanity cf tla; natives, and of their love of di-^playing 
 their |)owcr and wealth, 'i'o bo strong, and abb; to sustain the pangs of 
 liimger, is evidently considered worthy of praise by tlie Indian ; but foro- 
 nidst of all is wealth. 
 
 It is considered tho duty of every man to have |)ity Hp m the po: r 
 and liun<rrv. Women are honiuTred foi' their chastitv and for beini' true 
 to their husbamls; children, for taking care of their jiarents ; men, for 
 hkill and daring in hunting, and fo" bravery in wai-. 
 
 Closely connected with their vanity is their inclination to tlattcr (l.e 
 iitrimiier or friend, but piirticularly anyone who is expected to he of 
 service to the Indian. Vanity and si-rvility arc the most ^mannabh* 
 tr.iits of his character. Wit and humonr are little aftprociatod, although 
 they are not wanting. Tho character of tlu> Indian, on the wholt>, is 
 sombre, and ho is not given to gentle emotions. I'Jveii his festivals have 
 this chanlcter, as ho retains his dignity throughout. 
 
 Food — Hunting and Fisuinq — CLnrrriN'c;— iMrLEMEXT.-. 
 
 It is not tbo object of this report to give a full desin-iption of (he 
 various kinds of food and of the nu^thod-; of hunting and iishimr. It 
 seems, however, desirable to mention tho most iniportaiit points in 
 comiection -with this suliject. 
 
 Tho principal part of the food of the natives is deriveil fr(un th(> sea. 
 It seems that whales aro pursned only exceptionally, (hounh the West 
 Vancouver tribes are great whalers. Sea-lions and seals aie I arpo med, 
 tliC barbed hai'poon-point being either atta(!hed to a blaibler or tied to 
 the stem of tho boat. The harpoon lines are made of cedar-bark and 
 sinews. The irioat of these sea-animals is eaten, whih; their intestines aro 
 used for the manufacture of bowstrings and bags. The bristles of the sea- 
 lion Tii'o nsod by tho T,-iimshian and the neighljouring tr'ibes lor a(h>riiliig 
 (lancing ornaments. Codfish and halibut ai'O canj.dit by means of h loks. 
 riiesc are attached to tish-lincs made of codar-twigs, or, what is moi-o 
 
 J{ 2 
 
 H 
 
 ■ t 
 
 ; t 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
=901 
 
 20 
 
 TIKPORT— 1889. 
 
 ik 
 
 froqiiciilly ns(Ml, of kolp. Tho hook, tlio form of wliicli is wvW ktunvti, 
 is provided with a sinker, wiiiU) tlio upper {>art is kept nlhuit hy ii bhidder 
 or l)y ii ]ii('ce nt' wood. '\'\w hookn nro set, find nftri' :\ uiiilo tiikcii up. 
 Cutth'-ti.sh is extensively used for bait. 'J'he lish ait' either rousted near 
 or over tlio lire, ')r boiled in baskets or woncU-n kettles by means of red- 
 liot stones. Tliose int(!rnled for use in winter (ire split in strips mid diieij 
 ill the sun, or on fniines that are placed over the lire. I did not oliservo 
 such frames among the triln-s suuth of the .Snanaimiii|. The most im- 
 portant lish, however, is tlio salmon, whicdi is eaut^ht in weirs when 
 aseenditiLr 'he rivers, in lish-traps, or by means of tieis dratrj,'ed brtween 
 two boats. Liter in llies(>ason salmon arc harpooned. i''or lishiiit^ in 
 deep water a very lon<jf doublo-|)ointed harpoon is used, llerrinj^ and 
 olaeluMi iire eaiiL''ht by means of a h>Mi,'' i-ake. The latter are trievl in 
 canoes lille(l with water, wliieh is heate<l by means of re 1-hot atones. 
 Tho oil is kept in bottles made of dried ftiid eleaiunl kelp. In winter 
 dried halibut dipped in oil is one of the principal dishes of the tribes 
 livin<^ on the outer (;oast. Fish, when eaii^ht, are carried in opcm-work 
 wooden baskets. Clams and mussels are collected in a similar kind of 
 basket. They are eatini roostod, or drieil for winter use. Ciittle-lish are 
 ca'itjht by means of loncf sticks; sea-e<,'<r.s, in netw whieli are fistened to 
 a round frame. Fish-ro(>, iiai'tieularly that of herrings, i.s collected in 
 great (piantities, dried, and eaten with oil. 
 
 Sefi-p^rass is cut in pie(!es and (hied so as to form S(|ijare cakes, which 
 are also eaten with oil, as ai-e all kinds of dried berries and roots. Tlu! 
 j,'j , ] Kwakiiitl and their neifjhbours keep their jirovisions in lai'i^e 
 
 boxes. These are bent out of thin planks of cedar. At those 
 ])laces where the edges of the box are to be, a fi'iangnlai' strip 
 is cut out of tho plank, which is thus reduced in thickness. 
 Then it is bent so that tho sides of the triangle tonch each 
 other. 
 
 After three edge.s have been made, tho sides of the fourth are sowed 
 together. The bottom is either sewed or nailed to the box. Tho lid 
 either overlaps the sides of the box (litting en it as tlu; 
 cover on a pill-box) or moves on a kind of hinges. In 
 the latter case it has always the following form. 
 
 The Coast Salish keep their stock of provisions on 
 a loft, with which every house i:^ provided. 
 In winter deer are hunted. Formerly bows and arrows were used 
 for this purpose, but they have now been replaced by guns. The bow 
 was made of yew-wood. The arrows had stone, bone, and iron points. 
 The bow was held horizontrllv, the shaft of the arrow restinjr between 
 the first and second linger of the left hand, that grasps the rounded 
 central part of tho bow, wfi o the arrow is held between the thumb and 
 the side of the first finger. )ecr are also captured by being driven into 
 large nets made of eedar-b k, deer sinews, or nettles. Jjlk are hunt'cl 
 in the same way. For smai r animals traps are used. Birds are shot 
 with arrows provided with i Jiick wooden plug instead of a point. 
 
 Deer-skins are worked ito leather and used for various purposes, 
 principally for ropes, and iormerlv for clothing. Tho natives of this 
 legion go barelrgged. The principal part of their clothing is the blanket. 
 This is made of tanned skins, or more frequently woven of mountain- 
 fiheep wool, dog's hair, or of a mixture of both. The thread is spun on 
 the bare leg, and by means of a stone spindle. The blanket is woven on a 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 ? T'w ^ «'^.r ' 
 
ON XnR NORTII-Wr.STKHN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 21 
 
 soliil fiaiuc, Anullior kind of Ijlaiikct 18 woven of ^uft ci'(l;ir-h;uk, tlio 
 \\ar|i lu-iiii; titd a-ross tin; wuft. ilify ai'e tfinuiicd with fur. At tlio 
 pri'.Hciit tiiiio woullcii blankets uro cxtiMisively usi'd. .N[tMi wear a Hliirfc 
 uinlcr till' l.itl'T, wliil,' wmiM'ti wv.w ;• pet ticoat in sidilition. IJcfort) tlio 
 iiiiniiiuftion of woollen hlnnkcts, women used to wear an apron niatlo of 
 ic(liir.l)ark and a belt mado of tljo samo material. Tbo head is covered 
 with a watei'-tij^lit hat made of roots. In i-ainy weatlii-r and in tlio eanoo 
 a water-titrht eiipo or a poncho, l)otli made; of cethir-bark, is nsed. 
 Tlio women dress thoir hair in two plaits, while Iho iiu'ii weai it com- 
 piiiiitively short. The latter keep it back from the face by means of a 
 snap of I'lir or cloth. E.ir and noso ornaments aro extensively used. 
 They are made of bone and haliotis-shell. 
 
 JJesides t'lo baskets niejitioned al)ovo, a variety of others aro used, 
 some made of Uii"d seaweed, for keepini,' sewim^-utensils ; others made of 
 cedar-bark, for storing away blankets. Still ollu;r3 aro nsed for carryinj^ 
 the travelling outfit. They have two straps attached to them, one 
 lasHiiig over the brow, the other over the breast, of tho carrier. Water- 
 liL,'lil baskets made of roots are nsed for cookinj^ purposes and for holding 
 waur. ^Mats mado of cedai'-bark, of reed, antl of rushes are used to a 
 ^iciit extent, for covering the walls of the house, for bedding, for packing, 
 fdi' travelling in canoi's, &c. 
 
 In olden times work in wood was extensively done by means of stone 
 implements. Of these, oidy stone hammers aro still used. They aro 
 either carved stones. Hat on one side, and having a notch in the middle, 
 attached to a handle by mean' of a leather strap, or they iire similar in 
 shape to ii pestle. Trees were felled with stone axes, and sj)lit by means 
 of wooden or horn wedges. The latter aro still extensively used. In 
 order to prevent the wooden wedge from splitting, a cedar-bark rope is 
 Ih'udy tied around its top. Boards are split out of trees by means of 
 these wedges. They were planed with adzes, a considei-able number of 
 which were made of jade that was evidently found in the basin of Fraser 
 and Lewis Rivers. Carv'ings wcto mado with stone knives. Stone moi'tars 
 and pestles were used for mashing ben-ies and baik, the latter for being 
 mixed with tobacco. Paint-pots of stone, with two or move excavations, 
 were extensively used. Pipes were made of slato or wood. 
 
 Canoes are principally made of cedar-wood. After the tree has been 
 felkd, about one-third of its thickness is removed by means of wedges, 
 tlie outer side worked acc^ording to the proposed dimensions of the boat, 
 and then the tree is hollowed by means of axes, fire, and ndzes. ^yhen 
 the sides of the canoe have almost I'eached the desiretl thickness, it is 
 iilled with water, which is heated by means of red-hot stones. Thus the 
 v.ood becomes pliable, and is gradually shaped, in large canoes tho 
 gunwale is made higher by fastening a board to it. The northern tribes 
 use the so-called ' Tsimshian canoe,' which lu^is a high prow and a high 
 stern. The southern tribes use the ' Chinook canoe,' which has a smaller 
 prow, and the stern of which is straight up and down. Some other 
 types of boats are used for the purposes of war and fishing. The boat is 
 propelled and steered by means of paddles. In hunting there is a steers- 
 niau in the stern of the canoe, wliile the harponeer stands in the stem. 
 It seems that sails have been used only since the advent of the whites. 
 They are sometimes made of mats of cedar-bark. Alost of the large boats 
 have names of their own. For fishing on rivers very narrow canoes are 
 aj^cd, which differ somewhat in shape among the various tribes. 
 
95 
 
 itEroRT~1889. 
 
 The Salish of tlie interior and the Lower Kootenay also live to a great 
 fxtont upon fisli. Tlit-y use dug-out canoes, in which tlioy navigate tlio 
 liikcH and rafiid rivers. Fish arc canght by means of hookB, but principally 
 iu bagi ets. Deer, elk, mountain goat, big-horn sheep, and bears are hunted 
 extensively. At the present time these tribes raise c )nsiderable numbers 
 of hors( s, which aie used in hunting and travelling. The ui>per Kootenay 
 are principally hunters. They used to cross the mountains and hunt 
 buffalo on the plains. The Salish dress in the blanket, in the same way 
 as the coast tril^es do; ndiile the clothing of the Kootenny reseudjles that 
 ■worn by the Indians of the plains. They wear moci-asins, legLzings, 
 brooches, and a buckskin jacket, triuaraed with metal and leather fringes. 
 !Men and women wear braids wound with brass spirals and trimmed with 
 bead.s. 
 
 The ai't of pottery is unknown in Bi'itisli Columbia, and in the eastern 
 jiarts of the province little carving in wt)od is done. Large baskets serve 
 for cooking purposes. Stone hanimers and jiestles and mortars arc still 
 used throughout the Province. 
 
 1 cannot give a satisfactory account of the arts and industries of the 
 tribes of the interior, as these have been sup[)]antod by the use of ]']uro- 
 pean manufactures, and old implements arc scarce and diflicult to obtain. 
 
 Houses. 
 
 The coast tribes live in large wooden houses. The plan of the house of 
 the northern tribes differs somewhat from that of the Coast Salish, although 
 the mode of construction is the same. The framework of the house con- 
 sists of heavy posts, which support long beams. The walls and the roof 
 are constructed of heavy planks. Those forming the walls rest upon strong 
 rojjcs of eedar-baik connecting two poles, one of which stands inside the 
 wall, while the other is outside. The boards overlap each other in order 
 to prevent the rain from penetrating the house. The boards forming the 
 j'oof are arrangeil like Chinese tiles. The rain flows off on the lower 
 boards, as thi-ough a gutter. 
 
 The house of the northern tribes is square. It faces the sea. A 
 platform of about two feet high and four feet wide runs all around it 
 in,'-ide. it has a gable roof, which is supported by one or two beams 
 resting on tvro pairs of heavy posts which stajid in tlio centre of the front 
 and of the rear of the house, xhe door is between the pair of posts 
 'jtanding near the front of the house. Three or four steps lead up to the 
 iUxn', which is on the platform. Very large houses have two or three plat- 
 forms, and thus attain, to some extent, the shape of an amphitheatre. 
 Ti'.e houses a.re generally occupied by four families, each living in one 
 corner, Stnall sheds are built on the platforms, all along the walls of the 
 liou(-es. They serve for bedrooms. Each family has its own fireplace, 
 near which tho-enormous familj' settee, capable of holding the whole 
 family, stands. Some of the houses of the Heiltsuk" andlJilqula are built 
 on ])osts, the floor being about tight feet above the ground. In these 
 houses the fireplaces ai'e made of earth and of stones. The T&in.shian, 
 flaida, and Tlingit make a hole in the eenti-e of the roof for a smoke- 
 f.'.<cape, while the Kwakiutl t -erely })ush aside one or two boai'ds of the roof. 
 
 The hou!-cs of the Coast Salish and Nootka are very long, being 
 occupied by a great man}- families, each of whom owns one section. The 
 nidfs are liighest in tin; rear {)art of the house, and slope downward 
 
ON THE NORTII-WESTEUN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 23 
 
 a groat 
 ate tlio 
 [icipally 
 Imiited 
 I limbers 
 ootenay 
 1(1 limit 
 mo way 
 lies tbat 
 
 .{i-frilif^S, 
 
 tVimj^oH. 
 C'X with 
 
 ' eastern 
 jts serve 
 are still 
 
 ;'s of the 
 ^f Euro- 
 a obtain. 
 
 lionseof 
 although 
 juse cou- 
 th e I'oof 
 pn strong 
 side the 
 ill order 
 uing the 
 w lower 
 
 sea. A 
 
 •ound it 
 
 o beams 
 
 the front 
 
 of posts 
 
 up to the 
 
 rcc plat- 
 
 liLlieatre. 
 
 g in one 
 
 Is of the 
 
 fireplace, 
 
 le whole 
 
 are built 
 In these 
 lin.shian, 
 a smoke- 
 
 the roof. 
 
 11 g, being 
 
 m. The 
 
 jwnward 
 
 lowurds the front. There is also a platform running along the walls of 
 vlie houses ; but while in the houses of the Kwakiutl it is made of earth, 
 lure it is carelul!}' bii'^.t of wood. All along the rear wall of the ho"se, 
 which is somewhat higher than the opposite, runs a loft, which is about 
 jive feet wide. It is used as a storeroom. There are no sheds serving 
 i'ni' bedrooms, bnt the beds are arranged on the platforms.' 
 
 The houses here described are tbund in stationary villages. lu 
 travelling small sheds made of bark, of wood, or of branches are used. 
 
 'J'lie Salish of the interior used to live in subterranean houses, access 
 til which was obtained from above. These were used in winter, and afforded 
 a good shelter from the severe cold. In summer tents were used. 
 
 Tlie Kootenay live in large lodges, the framework of which consists of 
 converging poles. They used to be covered with buffalo hides, but now 
 canvas is mostly used. 
 
 Social Organisation. 
 
 J. G. Frazer, in bis compreliensivo review of totemism, defines the 
 totem as 'a class of material objects which a savage regards with sup/crsti- 
 tious respect, believing that there exists between himself and every mem- 
 lur of the class an intimate and altogether speeiai relation. As dis- 
 tinguished from a fetish, a totem is never an isolated individual, but 
 !il\vays a class of objects.' Accepting this definition, I will try to outlino 
 the peculiar kind of totemism as observed in British Columlna. Among 
 tlie Ivootenay and Salish of the interior 1 did not find the slightest trace 
 of the existence of totems. 
 
 The Tliiigit, Ilaida, Tsimshian, and ileiltsuk' have animal totems. 
 The first of these have two phratries— -the raven and eagle (or wolf) ; 
 the Tsimshian have four totems — raven, eagle, wolf, and bear; the 
 lleiltsuk* three — raven, eagle, and killer {Di'ljiJunus orca). Animal 
 totems in the proper sense of this term ai'e confined to thesis four peoples.. 
 They are .lot found among the Kwakiutl, although they belong to the 
 same linguistic stock to which the lleiltsuk' belong. The clans of the 
 four peoples mentioned above beai- the names of their respective totems. 
 These phratries or clans are exogaraous. It must be clearly understood 
 that the natives do not consider themselves descendants of the totem. 
 The Tlingit, for instance, who believe in a transmigration of souls, state 
 clearly and plainly that a man ill bo born again as a man, a wolf as a 
 wolf, a raven as a raven, notwithstanding the fact that the animal and a 
 Tiiember of its clan are considered relations. Thus the wolf gens will pray 
 to the wolves, ' We are your relations; pray don't hurt us!' Hut not- 
 wiihstanding this fact they will hunt wolves without hesitation. So 
 far as I am aware, this is true of all tribes, although the opposite view 
 has lVe(pu'iitly been express(>d. All my (nideavours to obtain information 
 reLrardiug the supposed origin of this relation between nian and animal 
 have invariably led to the telling of a myth, in which it is stated how a cer- 
 tain ancestor of the clan in question obtained his totem. The character 
 of these legends is uniform among all the peoples of this I'egion ; even 
 riirthcr smith, among the Kwakiutl ar i the northern tribes of the Coast 
 Salish, who have no animal totem in the ivstrieted sense of this term. As 
 these legends reveal the fundamental views the natives hold in regard to 
 
 ' See 'The Houses of the Kwakiutl ImliaijS. Biitibh Columbia,' iVor. U.S. National 
 
 M'l^runi, (SSS, ].p. 1117-21;!. 
 
 
 If 
 
 
 ( 
 
24 
 
 REPORT — 18S9. 
 
 'A 
 
 thjir luteins, I shall give ab.stracts of some of them. The following are 
 i'l'um the Tsinishian. 
 
 'T/ie Beiir Gens. — An Indian went mountain-goat hunting. When ho 
 had reachod a remote mountain range ho met a black bear, who took 
 liim to his home, taught him how to catch salmon and how to build boats. 
 Two years the man stiijed with the bear ; then he returned to his village. 
 All people were aiVaid of him, for he looked just like a bear. One man, 
 however, caught him and took him home. He could not speak, and 
 could not eat anything but raw food. Then they rubbed him with magic 
 herbs, and ho was retranst'ormed into the shape of a man. Thencef'oi'tli, 
 wlien he was in want, he went into the woods, and his friend the bear 
 heljjed him. In winter, when the rivers were frozen, he caught plenty of 
 salmon. He built a house, anil painted the bear on the front of it. His 
 sister made a dancing-blanket, the design of which represented a bear. 
 Therefore the descendants of his sister use the bear for their crest. 
 
 Tlie Whnle Gens. — TsKrEmsa'aks went out fishing. After he had been 
 out three days without having caught a single fish, he cast anchor at the 
 bise of a steep hill. His anchor fell u])on the house of the whale, who drew 
 the boat to the bottom of the sea. Two years ho remained with, the whale, 
 who taught him his dance, and gave him the ornaments of his house. 
 When TsErF.msa'aks returned ho was grown all over with seaweed. The 
 time which he had staid at the bottom of the sea had seemed to him two 
 days, but he had been there two years. Ho built a house, and painted 
 the whale upon its front. He also used the mask and the blanket of 
 the whale when dancing. Since that time the descendants of his sisters 
 use this design. 
 
 There is another tale belonging to the Raven Gens of the Tsirashian : 
 Yaqagwono'osk was the descendant of a man who had been taken to the 
 bottom of the ocean like TsErEmsa'aks. He was a great cliief, and once 
 invited all chiefs of the whole earth to a great feast, which was to be cele- 
 brated at Nas^ River. All the monsters of the whole coast came, using 
 whales {Dt'JpJinius orca) for their boats. They were so numerous that the 
 river was full of them. They landed and entered Yaqagwono'osk's house. 
 Wiienever one of them opened the door water flowed into the house. 
 Each wore his peculiar clothing. The first to enter was Kuwii'k 
 (this and the following names are those of dangerous points and 
 of rapids). He was followed by Tlkwats'a'q, KntEpwe'n, Ktlkuo'l, 
 Spaed'ana'kt, Kspaha'watlk. These last were very dangerous, and 
 used to kill everyone passing their houses. The most dangerous monsters 
 were seated in the rear of the house, the others around the platform 
 neai'er the door. The next to enter was Lak'anpEtse'qtl. He wore a 
 lu^ad-ring, which was made of twigs that passers-by used to give him in 
 order to secure his good-will. 'J'lien came Wuhu'balg'atlso'ks and 
 "NVudE'ano'n ( = great hands). Yaf|agwono'osk gave everyone what he 
 liked best: fat, tobacco, red paint, and eagle-down. All present promised 
 to abstain heneelbi'tli from killing people, and after their return removed 
 from ti'.e track of the canoes })lying between the villages. Yaqagwono'osk 
 imitated the dresses of all his guests, and since that time he used them. 
 His descendants, therefore, have all the sea-monsters on their heraldic 
 colamns. 
 
 These legends, of which I have given a few examples, do not belonjr 
 to the whole gens, but to a subdivision of the same. Only the descendants 
 ill the female line of the ancestor who had an adventure of the kind 
 
 1 
 
 Th 
 
TT 
 
 ccle- 
 
 ON THE NOnill-WESTEUN TKIUE.S OF f'ANADA. 
 
 20 
 
 described — that Is, his nepliews nnd iiiocea, aud their descendants in tho 
 fen.ale line— use tlie einhleins he obtained in consequence of his adventure. 
 Thisiieeounts for the diversity oferubli'nisand the variety of their f^n'ouping 
 (in the carving's, jiaintings, anil tattooings of the Indians. In these eases 
 the whole group would therefore more properly be styled phiatry than 
 gens. The raven and wolf (eagle) groujts of the Tlingifc and Haida are 
 pre-eminently ])liratries. Each gens, which forms a subdivision of tho 
 plu'ati'ies, derives its origin from one of these mytlii(;al ancestors who 
 liad an encounter with one of the animals of the phiatry. 
 
 The following is a partial list of the totems of each of the two ])hratries 
 of tho Tliiigit : — 
 
 I. Raven: Raven, frog, goose, sea-lion, owl, salmon, beaver, codfish 
 ( wcc|), skate. 
 
 11. Wolf (eagle): Wolf, bear, eagle, VeJiJiinus crra, shark, auk, gull, 
 sparrow-hawk (gano'k), thunder-bird. 
 
 Among this and all other tribes of the coast tlie crest of a group in- 
 cludes those animals which serve as the food of the animal from which the 
 group takes its name. 
 
 As an examjjle I en^-merate the gentes of the Stikin tribe of the 
 Tlingit, the only one with members of whom I came into closer contact. 
 I give also the chief emblems of each gens : — 
 
 I. Wolf: Nanaa'ri cr siknaq'a'de, imr (corresponds to the Kagonta'n 
 of other Tlingit tribes). 
 Qdk'e'de, Delj^ihinus urea. 
 
 ir. Raven : K'asq'ague'de, raven. 
 Kyiks'a'de, //•■/;/. 
 K'atc'a'de, raven. 
 
 Tir hit tan (■=biirk Jionse gens), heaver. 
 Detlk'oe'de (^■=pc(>ple of the point), raven. 
 K'agan hit tan (=sun Imuse (jens), raven. 
 Qetlk'oan, beaver. 
 
 Among these the gens Nanaa'ri has sis houses, the people of each 
 forming a sub- gens : — 
 
 1. Hara'c hit tan, jwrch Imufie gens. 
 
 2. Tos hit tan, slmrk house gens. 
 
 3. K"'etgo hit tan, 
 
 4. Quts hit tan, hear house gens. 
 
 The names of the remaining two houses I did not learn. 
 
 The proper names of members of the various gentes are derived from 
 ilu'ir respective totems, each gens having its peculiar names. The con- 
 nection between name and totem is aometimes not vei-y clear, but it 
 always exists. Here are a few examples taken from gentes of tho 
 tStikin tribe : — 
 
 N( 
 
 anaari names . 
 
 INfale 
 
 Tl'uck'K', ugly (danger face), referring to tlie bear. 
 Ga([e', crying man (referring to the howling wolf). 
 Sektutlfjetl, scared of his voice (to wit, the wolf's). 
 Ankaqu'ts, bear in snow. 
 
 
 : i 
 
 ^'1 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 
 i'X' ' 
 
 '4 t 
 
r 
 
 20 REPOiiT— 1889. 
 
 Fcniale : Qiifcc f^ya's, standing bear. 
 
 ]lC' li:iig «ljat, thundiJi'-woman. 
 Khii djat, wlialc-wonuui. 
 
 Qolc'e'dH names : 
 
 Cak'fi'ts, head-stick (reference doubtful). 
 
 COuq narfi', slave's dead, body (reference doubtful). 
 
 Dcllh'Oi'de names : 
 
 YCtl ri:de', little raven. 
 
 Tle'neqk, one alone (the raven on the beach). 
 
 niqtc tlc'ii, great frog. 
 
 Yetl k'u djat, raven's ^\ife. 
 
 The social organisation of the Haida is very much like that of the 
 Tliiigit. Tliey have also two phratries, raven and eagle. Their totems 
 ai-e also similar to those of the Tlingit, but they are differently arranged. 
 The most imjiortant difference is that the raven is pj c^iblemof the eagle 
 gens. 
 
 I. Eagle phratry (Gyitena') : Eagle, rav^ i, frog, beaver, shark, 
 
 moon, duck, codfish (I'a'ma), waski (fabulous 
 \vhale witli five dorsal fins), whale, owl. 
 II. Raven phratry (K"'oa'la) : Wolf, bear, Del jdi inns area, skate, 
 
 mountain-goat, sea-lion, ts'^'maos (a sea-mon- 
 ster;, moon, sun, rainbow, thunder-bird. 
 
 From some indications I conclude that the division of emblems be- 
 tween the two phratries is not the same among the Kaigaiii and the 
 tribes of (^)ueen Charlotte Ishmds, but the subject requires further study. 
 
 The ])lu'atries of the Haida are divided into gentes in the same way 
 as those of the Tlingit. They also take tlieir names, in the majority of 
 cases, fi'om their houses. The people of Skidegate village (Tlkagitl), for 
 instance, are divided into the following gentes : — 
 
 L Eagle phratry : Na yu'ans qa'etqa, large house people. 
 Na s'a'yas qa'etqa, old house people. 
 Dj'anqnlg'it 'ena'i, 
 (iyitinglts 'ats, 
 
 II. Raven phi'atry : Naeku'n k'craufi'i, those born in Nacku'u. 
 
 Djaaqui'sk'uatradagai (extinct). 
 
 Tl([aiu la'nas, 
 
 K'astak'e'raua'i, those born in Skidegate Street, 
 
 The following gentes are said to exist in one of the Kaigaui villages. 
 I did not learu the gentes of the eagle phratry. 
 
 I. Ts'atl la'nas, eagle. 
 11. Yak' lri'nas = middlo town. Raven. 
 
 Yatl i.'.is -.had'a'i ' = raven house peo})le. 
 k 'at nas •.had"a'i=sliark house people, 
 gutgune'st nas :had'a'i=owl house people. 
 
 ' :k of the Kaigani dialect stands for rj of the other dialects. It is an k precedcil 
 by a slight iutouation. 
 
 1. 
 
v-4'a;-r«*l^^ 
 
 ON THE NOllTJI-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 27 
 
 IStreet. 
 illaires. 
 
 M 
 
 qo'nto Tias :1ia{Vri'i = lx'av lionse pcnple. 
 ua k''ril uas :lia(r!l'i=ein|)ty house ])i'()|i!o. 
 ta'io nas :l)ad'a'i = cop|)ci' liou.se jK'o[)le. 
 knii lias :lia(i'a'i = wlialo house peoplo. 
 g'Knjihe't lias :ha(ra'i = l:ni(l-ott('r lionso people. 
 k"'('t lias :ha(i'a'i=soa-]iou house jn'ople. 
 :hot nas :ha(ra'i = box house people. 
 k'ok' uas :ha(i'a'i = sno\v-o\vl house jieoplc. 
 
 Frnni the first of tlics(! lists it will he seen that two of these pcntos arc 
 railed from the locality which they I'ormerly inhabited. Weniiaiuinow and 
 Kraiise noted a few Tlingit gentes which were also named from the places 
 at which their houses stood, aud one name of this kind is found on the 
 preceding list on p. 25. The majority of jieiites are called from the 
 names and emblems of their houses. If a new house is built by the chief 
 of the gens it reeeises the name of the old one, the place of which it 
 takes. These facts show that the houses must be considered communal 
 Louses of the gentes. The members of the gens are connected by ties 
 (if consanguinit}', not by an iiuagiiuiry relationship through the totem. 
 Till' latter exists only inside tlie phratry. It must bo borne in mind that 
 tlio emblems of the gens are oiili/ emblems commemorative of certain 
 events, that they do not indicate any relationship betweim man and 
 eiiihlem, Tliis becomes particularly clear in the ca.se of the llaida 
 ]iliratries, where the raven is the emblem of the eagle phratry and is not 
 used by the raven phratry. Gente.s of great numeiieal strength are sub- 
 divided. The houses of each gens always stand grouped together. 
 
 The single gentes do not possess the whole series of emblems pertain- 
 ing to the phratry. Among the Skidegate gentes enumerated above, the 
 one called Nfi s'a'ya.s has the following emblem-i: raven, shark, eagle, 
 fiMg. Their chief lias, in addition to the.se, the fabulous five-finned whale 
 !''">/.■• and the fish Vu'dui (codfish ?). IJel'ore giving a festival the child of 
 the eagle gens must use no other emblem but the eagle. 
 
 Any Uaida who has the raven among his eiubleius, when marrying 
 a Tlingit, is considered a member of the raven phratry, and vlcii vend, the 
 ciiihlems always deciding to wliieh phratry an iudiviilual is to be 
 rei.'kdiied. 
 
 'i'lie social organisation of tlio Tsimsliian is somewhat dilferent from 
 
 the 
 
 the 
 
 The 
 
 Lrecedcil 
 
 that of the preceding group of peo})Ies. They have four geni( 
 lavi'U, called K'anha'da ; the eagle, La([skl'yek ( = on the eagle) 
 Wolf, Laqkyebo' ( = 011 the wolf) ; and the bear, GylspotuwE'da. 
 fullowing is a partial list of their emblems. 
 
 1. K'anlia'da : Raven, codfish, s^tarfish. 
 L\ Laqski'yek : Jvigle, halibut, beaver, whale, 
 i{. Tiaqkyebo' : Wolf, crane, grizzly bear, 
 
 4. (lyispdtnwK'da : Delphiuns ora, sun, moon, stars, rainbow, 
 grouse, tsKm'aks (a sea-monster). 
 
 The Tslmshian are divided into three classes : common ]ieople, middle- 
 clas.s peo|)Ie, and chiefs. Common jieople are those who have not l)eeu 
 initiated into a secret society (v. p. o'l) ; by the initiation they become 
 iiiiildle-elass people ; but they can never become chiefs, who foi'iu a 
 •listinct class, Each gens has its own proper names, wliieh are different 
 for chiefs and middle-class people. It seeais that, as a rule, the names 
 
 ■\ \ 
 
 ' \ 
 
28 
 
 REPORT — 1889. 
 
 are common to all ti-ibes, with the excfption of a few chiefs' names, 
 which will he noted later on. Tiiese names are diU'erent, aeconlin^ to 
 the jjfeiis to which the father beloii^'S, and have always a reference to the 
 father'rt crest. Here are a few instances : — 
 
 K'anJia'da names. 
 ]. A K'anha'da woman marries a Laqskl'yek man. 
 Middle-class names : — 
 
 !Male : NeesyfdiVops=grandfather carrying stones. 
 Female: La(|tl|)0'n=ou a whale. 
 
 Chiefs' names : — 
 
 ^lalc : Neeswoksenri'tlk=grandfathcr of the not-breathing one. 
 Female : Ndse'edsira'loks:=grandmother of? 
 
 Nd^e'ets le'itlks=watching's grandmother. 
 Lld'aralo(ida,'u= (eagle) sitting on the ice. 
 
 2. A Kanha'da woman marries a GyispotuwE'da man. 
 
 Kame of female : Ni:bo'ht=raaking noise to each other (killers). 
 Names of male : Wud'adri'u = large icebergs (floating at Kuwa k). 
 Wiha' — great wind. 
 
 Laqslui/fk names, 
 
 1. A Laqski'yek woman marries a K'anha'da man. 
 
 Male : Wonlo'otk (raven) = having no nest. 
 
 2. A Laqski'yek woman marries a Laqkyebo' man. 
 
 Female : DEmdema'ksk= wishing to be white. 
 
 3. A Laqski'yek woman marries a Gyi'spotuwE'da man. 
 
 Names of females : Wll)o'=great noise (of killers). 
 WinO'eq=great tin (of killer). 
 Names of males : Qpi'yelek = half-hairy sea-monster (abbreviated 
 
 from Qpl litl hiig'ulo'oq). 
 lIats'Eksne'eq:=dreadful tin (of killer). 
 
 Laqlnjehu names. 
 
 1. A Lfiqkyebo woman marries a Laqski'yek man. 
 Chief's daughter's name : Saraitqag*a'i=cagle having one colour of 
 wings. 
 
 OtjispotuwE'da names. 
 1. A GyispotuwE'da woman marries a K'anha'da man. 
 
 Female : Ba'ynk (raven) = flying in front of the lionse early in the 
 morning ; abbreviated from Seo'pgyiba'yuk. The eldest daughter is 
 always given this name. 
 
 In each village the houses of members of each gens are grouped 
 together. The phratries of the Haida correspond to the Tsimshiiu; 
 
 Tl 
 
ON TilK NOItTI[-WE>TEKN TUIUKS OF CANADA. 
 
 29 
 
 cev 
 
 iated 
 
 lulouv of 
 
 pontes in snoli a way tlint raven and eagle on one side, wolf and hear on 
 the other, are amali^anmteil. 
 
 TIh! IlC'iitsiik" of ^lilliank Sound are also in the maternal stnije, and 
 are divided into clans having animal totems. There are three of them : — 
 
 1. K"oint("noq (=:raven people), raven, starfish, sun, <rii;r-amri'tso 
 (liox in whieh tlie sun was l<ei)t l)eforu the raven lihei-ated it). Their 
 house is painted all black. 
 
 2. Wik'oak'Htenoq (=eaglo people). Thunder-bird (K-ani'sltsna), an 
 enormous (hinciiii^-liat. 
 
 3. Ha'lq'aiiltOnoq ( = killer people). Dclphiiitt.^ orci, K'onio'k'oa. 
 A huge mouth is painted on the hous(;-front, the posts are kiHt'rs, two 
 iish named ^[Klilani'gun arc painted at, both sides of the door. Sea- 
 lions (which are eonsidtred the dog of K'dmo'k'oa) are the crossbeams. 
 
 The mo-^t. southern tribe which belongs to thi.s group are the 
 AwiI<v'e'no([ of Riveis Inlet. Further Bouth, and among tlie 15ii(|ula, 
 jiatriai'ehate prevails. The social organisation of tlicse tribes dill'crs 
 iuiidamcntally from that of the noi'thern group. We do not find a single 
 clan that has, propei'ly sp(>aking, ati animal for its totem ; iieithei- do the 
 clans take their names from their crest, nor are there phratries. It seems 
 as tliough the members of each gens were really kindred. The ' tirst ' of 
 each gens is .said to have been sent by the deity, or to have risen from 
 the dc[)th of tho ocean or the earth to a certain place which became his 
 homo. 
 
 I sliall give abstracts of a few of these legends, which will explain the 
 characitcr of the elans of the Kwukiutl. 
 
 Hi'-'UlnUL-ila and Loth'Dtuk'a. — He'likilikila descended from heaven in 
 the shape of a bird carrying a neck-ring of red cedar-bark.' 1 fo built a 
 house and made a large fire. Then a woman eulknl Lotlernaka rose 
 from unijer the earth. He spoke to her: 'You shall stay witli me and 
 hp my sister.' Thenceforth they lived in opposite corners of the iiouse. 
 The Kwats'e'nok" had heard of He'likilikila's neck-ritig, and nuide a 
 f'atile attempt to steai it. When one of them entered tlie house wIku'o 
 Ilc'likiiikila was sleeping, he was stricken with madness. He'likilikila, 
 liowever, cured him, gave him the rinar, and the Kwats'e'nok" returned 
 home. Since that day they dance the T.setsa'ek'a, in whieh rings of red 
 cedar-bark are used. 
 
 Lil' Id qa— -Two eagles and their young descended frout heaven and 
 aliudited at Qu'mqate (Cape Scott). They took off their eagle-skins and 
 liccame men. The father's name was Na'la([otau; that of the mother 
 AidvA'layuk'oa; and the young was called Le'kuja. One day the latter 
 pnrsued a seal, whieh, when far away from the coast, was transformed 
 into a cuttle-tish, and drowned Le'laqa. After a while he awoke to new 
 life, and flew to heaven in the shape of an eagle. Then he returned to 
 hiS parents, who had mourned for him, for they believed him to be dead. 
 They saw an eagle descending fi-om heaven. In his talons he carric'd a 
 little bos, in whieh he had majiy whistles imitating the voice of the 
 tfiy^lo. He wore the double mask Naqnakyak'umtl and a neck-ring of 
 rod cedar baik. Ho became the ancestor of the i^ens NlUi'ntsa. 
 
 >S£'»//(!fJ.— - Sil'ntlaO, the sun, desceiuled in the shape of a bird from 
 heaven, assumed the shape of a man, and built a hons(> iti Yik'"a'men. 
 Then he wandeied to Ko'moks, visited the Tlau'it.sis, the Nfimkin, and 
 
 ' It couvcys the seci'ct.s of tlio winter dance (sec p. "ili). 
 
30 
 
 nnroRT — 1881). 
 
 Na'k'oartok', anil finally reachod Tliksl'uae ( = the plain "^t tlio inoiith of 
 tlio river, whoro cluvcr-root is foiitid), in tlio coniitry of tlio Ivwakiiiti 
 ■\vliero he sottlod at iv''ai()(]. Ho took a wifo amoiiL,' c'a(!li tribe ulioin lio 
 visited, iiiid his family lias tlio naino Sisiiitlt'. Ho rosolvcd to stay in 
 Tliksl'nao, and took a Kwakiutl woman for his wife. Tliey had a .son, 
 ■whom tluy called Ts(|tsqa'lis. On each side of tlio door of their honso 
 tliey jiiiinrcd a lar^'e snn. Tlu' posts arc Tiien, eaeli carrving a sun. 
 They are e;dl(>d Ijela'cit'otpes, and were SK'ntlae's slaves. The crossbars 
 restiiiL^ npon the posts also I'cprrsent nien, while the beams are soa-lions. 
 Tlie steps Iradini^ to the hotise-door are three men called I'lc'iionis. 
 During the wititer dances the Sisintle use the mask of the sun, 
 Tle'selak'uintl ; in the dance Ya'wiqa, that of the dog Kn'loqsa C=:tlie 
 sun shining ri-d through the clonds), who descended with SK'ntlae fi-om 
 heaven. Their her-aidio column is called SiMtle'qem. It represents a 
 series of coj)per plates, on the; top of which a man called Laqt'ot i)t;s 
 (singular of liela'(it'()tpes=h(; wIkj gives pres(Mits to strangers onlv) is 
 standin<T. Abo\e all is the mask of the sun emittinrr lavs. 
 
 Of special importance is the connection of tlio ancestors of these 
 pontes with KTi/nikilak' (meaning doubtful), the son of the dtitv. 
 ]Io is the ancestor of a gens of the Xak'o'mkilisiln, wlio, npon tl";i; 
 strength of this legend, claim a superiority to all others. This jfoiiit 
 seems of sufficient im])oi'tance to bo given in greater detail. I was tnld 
 that in the far west there lived a chief called Ma'nitsnm (the possessor 
 of arrows), who had a daughter called Ailltsnnia'lotlilok' (with many 
 earrings of haliotis shells). K'a'nikilak* went into his boat K'ok'o'malis, 
 and after long wandering he reached IJa'nii sum's house. He mari-ied 
 the hitter's daughter, and to^ik her home to Koaiic (near Cape Scott). 
 They had a son, who received the name of Ha'neus. He lived to be a 
 great chief. 
 
 K'anikilak* wandered all over t]ic world. In his ■wanderiny's he 
 encountered tlio ancestors of all gentes of the various Kwakiutl tribes, 
 made friends with them, and tilled the rivers of their countries with 
 salmon. I give an example of this ki- 1 of ti-adition. K'anikilak" met 
 Nomas, tlie ancestor of the TIanitsis. no was the first to make fish-lines 
 of kelp to catch halibut; therefore the TIanitsis were the lirst tiibc to 
 nsc these. K'aiiikilak- made friends with Xonias, and filled tlio rivers (<f' 
 his conntry with salmon. He met O'meatI, wdio was sitting on ait 
 island. When the latter saw K-anikilak- approaching, he pointed his 
 lirst linger towards him, which perforated K-anikilak-'s head. Then the 
 latter jierfbrated Oineatl's head in the same way. Now they knew that, 
 they were ecjually strong, and parted. 
 
 In some cases it is very difficult to decide whether a group of men 
 deriving tlieir origin from one of these ancestors is really a gens oratrilie, 
 particularly in those cases in which the tribal name agrees witli that oT 
 the ancestor of one of the gentes; for instance, Ma'tnalelekvala (col- 
 lective of ]\Ialelek-ala), or We'wek'ae (collective of We'k'ae). A con- 
 siderable number of tribal names and the majority of names of gentes arc 
 simplv the collective form of the name of the ancestor. Others are taken 
 from the regions inhabited by tlie tribe. 
 
 It appears that a tribe of the Kwfdviutl must be dellned as a scries ef 
 gentes, whose ancestors first made their appearance in a certain well- 
 defined region. Thus the ancestcn-s of the Nak'o'mkilisila gentes appeare.l 
 on or near Cape Scott; those of the Tlatlasik'oala on or near Hop.' Islani!, 
 
"■""""•""«■ 
 
 •w*". 
 
 ivers 'li- 
 on an 
 liecl lii^ 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTKIIN TllinilS OF CANADA. 
 
 ,{ 
 
 of tlio Kwfikiun in Hardy Boy. No otlicr coiinnction l)ot,W(>on tlio sovoral 
 jrentos Houtns to exist. We shall sej later oti that tlie Coast Salish liavo 
 the same ort^ani.satioii, willi the exeeptioti that the fjeiites are tiamcMl on a 
 (lillereiit priiici|)le. The latter, however, haveonly ver}' sli<^ht indications 
 of eresis, while the crests play an exceedingly important pai't in the lifo 
 of the Kwakiiitl. 
 
 In ot'tler to make cl 
 
 ear the orrjanisation of those tribes, I will e 
 
 mcrate the divisions and [Rentes of one f,'ronp of tribes. 
 
 The followiiii^ four ti'ibes whii-h iidiabib the north-eastern part of 
 Vancouver Island form one f^'roup 1 enumerate the tribes, snbdivisions, 
 and gentes of this gronp according to their rank. 
 
 1. Kwa'kiutl, called by the Bili[ula and Coast Salish, Ivwako'otl ; Fort 
 
 JIupert. 
 
 Subdivisions : 1. Kue'ti:la, so called by tho tribes north of Van- 
 couver Island. 
 Gentes: 1, ^laa'mtakyila. 2, Kwnkwa'kum. '.I, 
 Ciye'(|Si:m. 4, lja';daq>I"nt'aio. o, .Sl'sintlac. 
 
 2. K''o'moyuo ( = rich ))eople). War )iame : 
 
 Kue'((a ( = murderers). 
 Gentes: 1, Ivwokwa'kum. t2, Ila'anatlino. S, 
 Yaai'ilak'Eme (=crab). 4, llaailakyawe or 
 Lri'gse. 5, Gyl'gyilk'am. 
 
 3. '\Valaskwakiutl = tlie great Kwakiiitl. 
 
 Gentes : 1, Ts'Ents'Enllk'aio. 2, Gye'qsEm. \i, 
 Wa'ulipoe. 4, K''omkyutis (=tho rich ride). 
 
 2. !Mamalelek-a'Ia. East of Alert Bay. 
 
 Gentes: 1, Ti:'mti:mtlEts. 2, We'Omask-am. 0, Wa'ins. 
 4, ^la'malelek'am. 
 
 3. NE'inkic, K'a'matsin Lake and Nimkish River. 
 
 Gentes: 1, Tsetselloa'lak'amae. 2, Tlfil idTi'min. 3, Gyi'gyit- 
 k'am, 4, Si'sintlae. o, Ne'nelky'eno(i. 
 
 4. Tlauitsis, Ci'acroft and Turner Islands. 
 
 Gentes: 1, Si'sintlae. 2, NuuEmasEk'tilis. 3, Tletlk'et. 4, 
 Gyl'gyilk'am. 
 
 It remains to describe briefly their crests. Every gens has certain 
 tales in which the reason for tlieir using these crests is explained. I 
 shall confine myself in this place to a list of crests of the tribes of 
 Furt Kupert. 
 
 1. Maa'miakyila : Carvings: Thunder-bird, crane, grizzly bear, raven, 
 sun. Mask : ^la'takyila, sun. 
 
 2. Kwokwa'kum : Ancestor, Tla'k'oaki'la. Posts: Grizzly bear on top 
 of crane, thunder-bird, crane, sun. 
 
 o. Gye'qsEm: Crane on top of a man's head. 
 
 4. La'alaqsKnt'aio : Delphimis orca with man's body. 
 
 5. SE'ntlae : Sun. 
 
 6. Haailikyawe : Large head-ring with raven head attached to it. 
 IToraldic columns : Tsono'k'oa, grizzly bear, thunder-bird ; Si'siutl, 
 crane, raven. 
 
 7. Ivwokwa'kum. Ancestor, No'lis. Dancing utensil : Bear vv'ith 
 heaver tail. Post: Sea-lion. Heraldic column : Pole, man on top of it. 
 
 ^^. Ha'anatlino. Mask: Man, on top of whom moon and eagle. Posts: 
 Bear, thut\der-bird. 
 
 
 ^t 
 
•M 
 
 nr.poRT — 1889. 
 
 0. Tsi:niik''nio. Post : TsF,mik''air) (a ppiK'ies of enpflo). JJ(>ani.s : Sca- 
 linn. Post: Trt'i/nllk-'aio. JleraldicJ coluiiui : A Httlo man with a tliick 
 belly. 
 
 10. riycVqsKm. HrTaldic column : Loncf poli', tlio bas(> of wliicli rosts 
 on a man. on lop of wliich stands a crano, its beak tnrnod downward, 
 and a donblc-licadcil stiakc fSisiiitl). 
 
 This vrry fiMLjiiuMilary H-^t sliows thnt oacli Lrcns nsca oortain carvinn-a 
 for ctM'tiiin pMi'[)os('S. Tlio details of tho oarvin^'s of tlioir houses aro 
 pi'cscrlbcd by the Ic^^Midary deseripfion of the Iioas(( of the ancestor, and 
 so an; tlicir ina;ks jind their heraldic; eoluinns. I wouM call attention to 
 tho important fa(;t th;it the dinciiif,' implemonts and the dances themselves 
 beloni^ to tbo crest of the tribe, or, mo-e properly spoakini^, to tho customs 
 and carvinn^s to whicdi the c^ens is enlithid. 
 
 The distinction of what constitutes a i^'ons and what a tribo is still 
 more ditlicult amonc^ tho Coast Salish. Their lei,'ends aro very raueli like 
 those of the Kwakiutl. They tell of fabulous ancestors who descended 
 from heaven and built liousos. From these a certain group of latnilies, 
 who always inhabit one villajjfe, derive thoir orii,nn. They call tliem- 
 solvos from tbo i)laco at \vl;ieli tlujir villaji^e stands, or which they cl.iim 
 as their oi-it^inal home. Whenever they leave their home, they take 
 tho namo of their old vitla<,'0 to tho now j)laco, althot)!;'i the name is 
 generally a geographical one. taken from certain p(!culiarities of tho 
 locality. For instance, tho name TsiimVnes meaiis ' where the landin<' 
 is close by the house,' an epithet that was well adai)ted to their former 
 village at tbo mouth of Cowitchin River, but not to their now homo at 
 Chimcnes. ^lany sueb instances might bo enumerated. Some of these 
 gerdes have certain prerogatives and certain carvings, but these ai'o of 
 very little importance when compared to those of the Kwakiutl, anions 
 whom they exert a ruling inilueTice over their whole life. The Snanai- 
 muq, for instance, have the following gentt s ; Te'wi;t(jEn, Ye'cK(ii:i), 
 K-oltsi'owotl, Qsa'loqul, Anne'nes. Among these ojdy the (irst and tho 
 second are allowed to use ma.sks, which have the shape of beavers, dncks 
 or salmon. Each gens has its own [iroper names. 
 
 I have so far stated only in a very general way that tho northern 
 tribes have a maternal, the southern a paternal organisation. It remains 
 to give some more details on tliis important subject. One of the main 
 facts is, that the phratries, viz. gontes of the Tlingit, Haida, Tsimshian, 
 and Ileiltsnk', aro cxogamous, not only among each tribe, but throughout 
 tho whole region. A member of tho eagle gens of tbo lleilt.suk*, for in- 
 stance, cannot marry a member of tho oaLrle phratry of the Tlingit. 
 Those gentes are considered identical which have the same crest. I do 
 not know whether any such law ])revails in the case of marriages between 
 the Kwakiutl and Heiltsuk", which, however, seem to bo of very 7'aro 
 occurrence. Neither was I able to arrive at a fully satisfactory conclu- 
 sion regarding the question whether marriages inside a gens of the 
 Kwakiutl are absolutely prohibited, but I believe that such is the case. 
 This dilliculty arises from the fact that the Kwakiutl cnn-iiders 
 himself as belonging half to his mother's, half to his father's g(>ns, whilo 
 he uses the crest of his wife. I do not know of a single instance of a 
 Kwakiutl marrying a member of his own gens. The Salish gentes, for 
 instance those of tho Sk-([o'mic, aro not exogampus, but 1 am not quite 
 positive whether this is true in all cases. 
 
 1 do not intend in the present ch ipter to discuss the customs lefcr- 
 
ON Till; MlUni-WKSTKUN TIlIltKS ()!• lANVDA. 
 
 •x\ 
 
 Irthorn 
 mil ins 
 niiiin 
 sliian, 
 
 hrfhout. 
 
 for in- 
 
 lingit. 
 
 I do 
 
 i\v(n>n 
 
 ravo 
 
 cln- 
 
 loii 
 
 I-SK 
 
 lev; 
 
 for 
 
 
 riiif? to hiitli. iii;i"ri'ii;(!, ami dcatli, sill nf which hiivc n't'croiifi' (n Iht? 
 Hocial organisation ol" tlio>t' trilx's, iind wliicli liclp to gain a hcltrr nmh-i'- 
 stantlin;^ of this organisation. U will bo sutlioicnt to inentinn a I'm furts 
 glennt'd from these customs which have spcciiil rcrorciujo to the (|no>ti(iiis 
 iindci tliscussinn. 
 
 Tho members of a gens are obliged to assist each other on every 
 occasion, bnt partiinilarly when heavy payments are to be made to otlu r 
 trentes. Instances of this kind will be found later on in the descri[)lion 
 of the proceedings at the occasion of the building of new houses and at 
 burials. It is a very remarkable fact that tho gens of t}u> male line has 
 fo do certain services at such opportunities which are not paid l»y the 
 individual but by tlie gens. Thus a gens is not jiernut led to touch the 
 l)()dy of one of its members; tho burial is to lie arranged by the gens to 
 w liich the deceased's father belongs. This solidarity of the gens is pi-inci- 
 pally found .among the northern tribes, wdneh are in the inatcrnal sta^'c. 
 Among tho same tribes mothers' sisters are considered and called 
 mothers, fathei's' brothers, fathers, wliilc there exist separate terms for 
 motlicrs' brothers and fathers' sisters. 
 
 It is a notewcu'thy fact that the Heiltsuk' and the Kwakiutl, who speak 
 dialects of the same language, differ fuiubamontally in regard to their 
 social organisation. I am inclined to believe tliat the natriarchate 
 uf (he Ileiltsuk" is duo to tho influence of the Tsimsliian, with whom 
 ihey have frequently intermarried, and upon whom the Heiltsuk' have 
 had a considerable inflntuico. But tho marriage ceremoni(>s of the 
 Kwakiutl seem to show that originally matriarchate j»revailcd also 
 am(jng thetn. The husband always assumes, a short time aftei* 
 niarriasre, bis fathei'-in-law's name and crest, and thus becomes a 
 nicnd)er of his wife s clan. From him this crest descends upon his 
 children; tho daughters retain it, but his sons, on marrying, lose it, 
 adopting that of their wives. Thus the descent of the crest is practicallv 
 in the female line, every unmarried man having his mother's crest; but 
 still we cannot call this state matriarchate proj)er, as tho father 
 is the head of the family, as ho gives up his own crest for that of his 
 wife. This law is carried so far that a chief who has no daunrhters 
 marries one of his sons to another chiefs son, the latter thus ac([uiring 
 his crest. By this means the extinction of gentes i.s prevented. It seems, 
 however, that the father's gens is not entirely given up, for the natives 
 frecpiently use carvings of both gentes promiscuou;dy, but certain jiarts 
 of the father's gens, to which T shall refer pre.-ently, are excluded from 
 this use. Tho following instance, which came uiider my personal obser- 
 vation, will show tlie customs of the Kwrddutl regardimi: this point. 
 Iv'omena'kula, chief of the gens Gyi'gyilkam, of the tribe Tlatliisikoala, 
 lias the heraldic column of that gens, and the double-headed snake for 
 liis crest. In dances he uses the latter, but chiefly the attribntcs of tin; 
 raven gens. His mother belonged to the g ./,-, NunKmasiikalis, of tho 
 Tlau'itsis ; hence he wears tho raask of that gens. He had an only 
 (laughter, who, with her husband, lived with him. Sh(> died, and her 
 husband is the present owner of the heraldic column of the f^an^. Tho 
 son of this daughter, at present a boy seven years of age, is the future 
 chief of the gens. 
 
 Among the Salish there is no trace of matriarchal institutions. Tlie 
 child belongs to the father's gens, the eldest son inheriting his rank and 
 Hume. 
 
 C 
 
 
 : i 
 
:u 
 
 UEPoiiT -1889. 
 
 Closely connected with tho gentcs of the Kw;ikintl arc Mieir socrct 
 HooicticH, each of which hns cerfain characteristic; diincirif,' imj)i(>nient.s. 
 They are ohtaiiicd l)y TimrriMj^'o in the same way in which tlu; crest 
 i.-i ()l)tMitu;d. 'IMmre is, liowcvcr, oikj reHtri(.'tii)ii to the acfiniririL^ of 
 tho rii^ht to Itcconio a niciidicr of tli(^ Hccret society. The person wlio 
 is to acriuire it nnist be (hchired woithv hv the trih»3 nsseniMed in 
 council. Not nnfil this is done is the ttiiin allowed to marry I he i^flrl 
 from whos(> father the riirht oi'heiii^ initiated is to he aci|iiii'eil. 'I'his is 
 even tine rcfrardinf,' the 'medicine men.' The eiiil>leins of theso secret 
 80(Meties t\v{\ rinirs of red ce(laT'.)iai'l<, of varions desi'^ris. The (lonntclion 
 of the <;t'iites and these institntions leav 1)(! seen Ironi tho le;rend 'lleli- 
 kilikila and Lotlomaka,' which was told oti j). '2'.*.' 
 
 Altlion|,'h a few of the ti'il)es inhahitini,' tho country ndjoininLj that of 
 th(! Kw;\kiiitl have se(;ri!t societies of the same character aiming them 
 they are in no way connected with the gens. This fact, as wed as tho 
 ditl'erenee in tlu) character of the lej:»'eiulH of tho fjjentea, proves that tho 
 80(;i.il ort^anisation of those groups of trihos is of entirely dilT'ert'iit 
 origin. Tho sonthei'i\ groups derive their oi'igin from a fabulous an- 
 cestor who is either liimself the totem or to whoso adventures tho 
 totem refei's. The first is tho case in the geus Srsinthio, which dei'ives lis 
 O'igin from the sun,Ts'i;'iits'i;nHk''aio of the WalaskwakintI, which derives 
 its origin from tlio eagle, and others. In tlu; nnijoiity of cases the crest 
 refers to adventures of the ancestor, In the ncwtliern i^roups we observe 
 a ])ure animal totem, but the animal is not considered the ancestor of 
 the gens bearing its name. The crest always refers to udveutures of one 
 of the ancestors. 
 
 Government and Law. 
 
 Tho people of this country are divided into three clashes : common 
 people, middle class, and chiefs. While the last form a group by them- 
 selves, the members of the class forming the highest nobility, cliildren of 
 middle-class ]ieo])le are born common ))eople, and remain so nutil tlu'y 
 become membei-s of a secret society, or give a great feast and take a name. 
 All along tho coast the giving away of presents is considered a means 
 of attainiTig social distinction. The chief has numerous prerogatives, 
 although his inlhience npon the mend)ers of the tribe is comparatively 
 small. I am best acquainted with his claims among the Tsimshian, but 
 it seems probable that these institntions t...'e much alike among tho 
 various peoples. H-j has to carry out tbii decisions of the eonncil ; more 
 particularly, he has to declare peace and Avar, liis opinion must be asked 
 by the tribe in ail importaid events. He Jrt'i ies when the winter village 
 is to bo left, when the fishing begins, &c. The first fish, the first berries, 
 &c. are given to him. It is his duty to begin all dances. He must be 
 invited to all festivities, and when the first whistles are blown in winter, 
 indicating tho bcgininng of the dancing season, he receives a certain 
 tribute. People of low rank must not step up directly to a chief, whoso 
 seat is in the rear of the house, but must approach him going along tho 
 walls of the house. 
 
 The highest in rank among all Tsimshian chiefs is the one of tho 
 GyispaqUVots tribe. His name is invariably LEgi'eq. He is eonsidereil 
 
 ' See tho author's paper on 'The vise of uiask.s on the North-West Coast of 
 America,' in J iifi'matioxnlm Avclih- fiir L't/ntoffra/iJiir, 18SS. 
 
< ll 
 
 ON Tiri". NOltTII-WKSTKltN TRIIIES 01' CANAHA. 
 
 :j') 
 
 •X 
 s. 
 si 
 of 
 ho 
 ill 
 ill 
 in 
 vv\. 
 ion 
 0\i. 
 
 t (.f 
 \i'm 
 
 tl\o 
 
 tlic 
 rent 
 
 !in- 
 Iho 
 
 -s ilH 
 vivfs 
 (•vest 
 
 iSL'VVO 
 
 or of 
 )f ono 
 
 nimon 
 thcm- 
 vcn of 
 
 name. 
 
 [it i vert, 
 Ixtivcly 
 n, 1)ut 
 (T the 
 ; more 
 asked 
 ■villa ge 
 Lerric!', 
 Inst be 
 Ivinter, 
 :evtaii> 
 whoso 
 tlvc 
 
 of tko 
 sidercii 
 
 st <if 
 
 file noMfsl, licriuisc a iimiihcr ni" secret societies are otily periniitfil td his 
 family and tril)(>. Tliis is acconnfe(l for by tlio fact tliat tlicHo seetct 
 societies were a('i|nire(l by niarriaL'e fmiii tbo (lyit'arna't. Traditiitn s.iys - 
 •and it is midoiilitctliy coirrct, — lli;if a u'diiiaii df tlic ( iyis|iai|la ots triho 
 eloped with a (iyit'ania't cliicf, to w ii'ise (^n-iis tlirsn <laiicivs belonged. After 
 licr return tin; woman wa-t t^iven tlie !iaia(( (r''amdema'([ll (=(>iily in 
 elopiiiy; ascending miMiiitaiii). 'I'luj name liKu'l'cii is a (iyit'ainat n:urie. 
 It is a }irivile^'(< of the (!yispa(|Ia(its to trade with the (lyitlcsa n ; and they 
 kept up this ])rivih'ixe successl'aily even auainst, the I rudsoii Ha v C'nmpan v 
 until tlie latter purchased it From them in 1>^S('). 'I'lio (iyit.'i;ni!a cihiefs 
 are relatives of those of the (lyisjiaqla'ots. They share their pri .ile^'es, 
 and beiir th. same names, the one Iji:i^l'e(| exce|»ted. 
 
 The (Jyiltia'tia ai't; consi(h'iod liiL,'her in rank than any other of tho 
 Irilies of the T'sinisliian proper. They have tho same si'ci'ot smieties 
 which tho fryispaqla'ots and Ciit'i'.nda' have. They aotpiired them throuijli 
 iiit(>r.m;ii'riiii^e iVom the (lyillo'p and Ileiltsuk". Only (luite I'l'cently tho 
 llaida acquired them from the (iyitiifi tia. 
 
 The Gyits'umrii'Ion are not of Tsimshiau orly^in. Six generations (tliat 
 is, about 1 ">0 years) a<(o a number of 'J'oiiLj'as (Tlini;'it), men and women, 
 ( iniLrrat(Ml fi'om Alaska in coiiseipience ol' continued wai's, and settle I on 
 the brook of Gyits'nnuii Ion. Tliey married a number of Tsimshian women 
 and men, amonf^ whom tla^ names l{ata(|;i'([ and Astoe'nc are naentioned, 
 Kor a considcral)le time tl , y continued to speak Tlingit, but linidly were 
 as.^imilated by tho Tsimshian. Their desccMidants arc still called ClunluVot 
 (runaways). 
 
 It is becomincf to a chief to hi-" proud and to leave his m(>mory to lils 
 descendants. Therefore the LEgi'c([, who ruled loO years ago (the sixth 
 hack), had his figure painted on a vertical pi-ecipice on Nass River. A 
 series of coppers is standing under his figure. Sinci; that tim ■ the place 
 is called "Wulgyili'gstcjald'amptk (where self on written). 
 
 Seven generations ago Neswiba'sk (grandfather great wind), a (diief 
 at !Mc(itlak qa'tla, had his tigure carved on a rock on an island near 
 .NFciitlak'qa'tla. He lay down, had his outline marked, and the carving 
 completed in a single night. 
 
 The Gyitga'ata of Grenville Channel ai'O .subjects of tho chief of tho 
 (lyitwulgya'ts. They hiivo to pay a tribute of fisli, oil, berries, and skins 
 every year. Tho Gyitla'op are subjects of the chief of the Gyitqa'tla. 
 
 When a chief dies the chieftaincy devolves upon bis younger Itrother, 
 then upon liis nephew, and, if there is none, upon his niece. Only, if a 
 cliiof's family dies out the head man of his crest can become chief. This 
 is tho only case in which a middle-class man can advance to the rank of 
 a chief. The cliieFs property, as well as that of others, is iiiiierited first 
 by the nephews; if there are none, then by tho deceased's mother or aunt. 
 A woman's property is inherited by her children. 
 
 There are very few common people, for whoever can afford it lets his 
 child enter a secret society immediately after birth, by proxy. The child 
 thus becomes a middle-class man. The more feasts arc given by him the 
 liigher becomes his rank, but no member of tho middle class can ever 
 become a member of the chief class. The chief's daughter on reaching 
 maturity must grind down her teeth by chewing a pebble of jade (see ]>. 
 12). So far as I know, this is the only deformation of the body which is 
 confined to one class only. 
 
 When r family is liable to die out the father is allowed to adopt ono 
 
 6' 2 
 
 M 
 
 , I 
 
i3kH 
 
 :i6 
 
 REPORT — 1889. 
 
 of his dangVitors, who thon receives a name belonging' to liis crost. On 
 this occasion a great festival is given. A man cannot adopt moi'c than 
 one cliild at a time. 
 
 The council N- composed of middle-class men. Nobody who lias not 
 taken a nrcnie, or who is not a member of a secret society, is allowed to 
 take part in it. The mother's brother represents liis nephews. A woman 
 is ordy admitted if she is the head of a family. 
 
 The council decides all important rpiestions concerning the ti'ihe, and 
 is the court which judges criminals. Those who are found i^'uilty of sor- 
 cery are tied up and placed at the edge of low water, and are left there 
 to be drowned. Aecoiding to legends, sui-h people were frequently left 
 alone in the winter village to starve to death, if a man dors not observe 
 the prescribed rules during dances he is tied and brought before the 
 council. If nobody speaks in his favour he is killed, else he is punished 
 by being made a slave, or by heavy payments. All crimes can be atoned 
 for by sufficient payments. If such are not made it is the duty of the 
 nearest relatives to take revenge. 
 
 The coast tribes have always been great traders, and they hnd a cer- 
 tain cnrrency. Dentalia, skins, and slaves were standards of value. For 
 less valuable property marmot-skins sewed together served as cnrrency. 
 The Tsimshian used to exchange olachen oil and carvings of mountain- 
 goat hoi'u for canoes. The Chitlk'at sold their beautiful blaid^ets ; the 
 lleiltsuk', canoes ; while the southern tribes furnished pvincipnlly slaves. 
 
 The latter were in every respect the property of their masters, who 
 were allowed to kill them, to sell them, or to give theiu their liberty. 
 Children of slaves were also slaves. 
 
 Strangers are always received kindly and with much ceremony. 
 Among the tribes who still adhere to their old customs they are offered 
 the host's daughter while they remain. 
 
 So far as I am aware, the institutions of the Ilaida, Tlingit, and PTeilt- 
 suk are much the same as those described here. I did not learn any 
 details, as I did not visit these tribes in their homes. 
 
 The following observations hold good for the Kwakiutl and Coast 
 Salish, as well as for the northern group of tribes. Polygamy is not 
 of rare occurrence, although generally each man has only one wife. The 
 first wife is of higher rnnk than those married at a later date. Women 
 must not take part in the councils and feasts, except when they are heads 
 of families (or, among the Kwakiutl, chiefs daughters) ; but the hu.sband 
 takes homo from the feast a dish of all the various kinds of food that 
 were served. The dish must be returned the same night. 
 
 The principal work of the women is gathering berries and clams, 
 drying fish, and preparing the meals. They weave mats, blankets, and 
 hat?. The men, on the other hand, hunt and fish, they fetch fuel — if 
 large logs are wanted — and build houses and canoes. They also make the 
 carvings and paintings. 
 
 The property of the whole gens is vested in the chief, who consider 
 the salmon rivers, berry pntches, and coast strips, in wliich the gens has 
 the sole right, as his property. Houses belong to the man who erected 
 the framework. They are always inhabited by members of one gens. 
 Canoes, fishing-gear, &c. are personal property. Women own boxes, 
 dishes, and other household goods. 
 
 Thp KwOl-inth — As among these tribes paternal institutions take the 
 phicc of nu\lernal institutiotis, mnny laws are found that are not known 
 
 distil 
 
 rn • I 
 -IKiul 
 
 niou[ 
 
 pick 
 
 f'\)r 
 
 do HI 
 
 found 
 
 tiou 
 
 tliat 
 
 rcgiol 
 
 the (1 
 <ind A 
 tile si 
 cliiirnl 
 aiieesf 
 'lieref 
 
ON THE NORTII-WKSTEllN TRIBliS OF f'ANADA. 
 
 37 
 
 t-o t'lio northern group of tribes. If sncli is possible, <ho rank of oacli 
 man is here still more exactly Hxeil than among their neighbours. The 
 rank is determined by the gens to whieh a man belongs, by the feasts he 
 lias gi^en, anil by the secret societies to whieh he beU)ngs. In the list 
 of geiites on page IM I have enumerated the Kwakiutl gentes aceordirg 
 to their social vStanding. In great festivals celebrated for the purpose of 
 acquiring iMnk by giving away property, the noblest guests sit in the 
 rear part of the house, nearest the fire, and the lower in rank the farther 
 back they sit, When only ouo row is formed those lowest in rank sit 
 nearest the door. 
 
 The affairs of the whole tribe are discussed in council, in whi'.'li only 
 men participate. Uefore the opening of the discussion four songs are 
 sung and four courses are served. Then the public affairs are discussed 
 in long and elaborate speeches, delivered principally by the chiefs. In 
 time of peace there is no chief who has acknowledged authority over the 
 whole tribe, but each gens has its own chief. A certain superiority of 
 social standing is acknowledged in those who have given a great donation 
 feast. In times of war a war chief is elected. 
 
 The chief represents his gens, and carries out the decision of the 
 council. Except on delivering speeches, he does not speak to people of 
 low rank, but converses with them through messengers. 
 
 If a single person is offended, the gentes of both his father and mother 
 are obliged to come to his help. Thus the long war between the Coast 
 Salish and Lekwiltok originated. Formerly these wars were of so 
 frequent occurrence that the villages all along the coast wei'o protected 
 by stockades. 
 
 The institutions of the Coast .Salish and of the Kwakiutl are pretty 
 much the same, except that the for.ner have a pure patriarchate, and the 
 child inherits his father's rank and property. 
 
 Among the Skqo'mic, for instance, the chieftaincy devolves upon the 
 chief's son. If there is only a danghter his grandson is the successor. 
 If there are no children a new chief is elected from among his gens. If 
 the successor is a young boy a representative is elected who acts as chief 
 until the boy is grown up and has assumed a name. If a man dies his 
 wife inherits all the property and keeps it until her children are grown 
 up. After the deatli of the husbiiud rIm.; isWcs a potlatch to his memory. 
 
 Among all tlie tribes heretofore described each gens owns a certain 
 district and certain fishing priviletr^- >. Amonj; the Tlingit, Ifnida, and 
 Jsimshian each gens in each village has its own fishing-ground; its 
 mountains and valleys, on which it liiis t'lic solo right of hunting and 
 picking berries ; its rivers in which to tish salmon, and its house-site.s. 
 For this reason the houses of one gens are always groupi'd together. I 
 do not know of an}^ tradition which accounts for this fact, or of any other 
 foundation of their claim. The Kwakiutl, who b.avo the same distribu- 
 tion of land amoi .le various gentes, account for this fact by saying 
 that the ancestor of each gens descended from heaven to the ])articular 
 region now owned by his descendants. Later on K'anikilak', the son of 
 the dt'ity (see p. 3i)), in his wanderings encountered *^hose ancestors, 
 and gave them the country they inhabited as their ppopeiiy, filling at 
 the same time their rivers with salmon. The Coast Salish derive their 
 claims to certain ti-acts of land in the same way from the fact that the 
 ancestor of each gens came down to a certain place, or that he settled 
 'here after the great flood. The right of a gens to the place where it 
 
ms/mmim 
 
 38 
 
 UEl'OUT— 1889. 
 
 f)i'igiiiiited caniioL bo destroyed. It niiiy acquire by war or by otiier 
 events territory originally beloiigiu*^ to foreign tribes, and leave its homo 
 to be taken up l)y others ; the riyht of iishing, hunting, and gathering 
 h{;rries in their old liomo is rigidly inaintained. A careful study shows 
 that nowhere the tribe as a body politic owns a district, but that each 
 gcna Vias its proper hunting and fishing grounds, upon which neither 
 raembers of other tribes nor of other gentes must intrude except by 
 special permission. It would be an interesting and important object of 
 study to in(iuirc into the territorial rights of each gens, for such a study 
 would undoubtedly throw much light upon the ancient Iristory of these 
 ])eoples. These rigid laws in regard to the holding of land by the gentes 
 are very important in the past history of the Indians of British Colund)ia, 
 and are of prime importance in theu' present relations to the white 
 settlers. 
 
 One of the most complicated and interesting institutions of these 
 tribes is the so-called jy(»//a/c/( — the custom of paying debts and ot 
 acquiring distinction by means of giving a great feast and making 
 presents to all guests. It is somewhat didicult to understand the 
 meaning of the potlatch. I should compare its most simple form to our 
 custom of invitation or making presents and the obligations arising 
 from the otTering, not from the acceptance, of such invitations and 
 presents. Indeed, the system is almost exactly analogous, with the solo 
 exception that the Indiiin is more anxious to outdo the first giver than 
 the civilised European, who, however, has the same tendency, and that 
 what is custom with us is law to the Indian. Thus by continued pot- 
 latches each man becomes necessarily the debtor of the other. According 
 to Indian ideas any moral or material harm done to a man can be made 
 good by an ade([uate potlatch. Thus if a man was ridiculed by another 
 he gives away a number of blankets to his friends, and thus regains his 
 former standing. I reniend)er, for instance, that the grandson of a chief 
 in Hope Island by unskilful management of his little canoe was upset 
 near the beach and had to wade ashore. The grandfather felt ashamed 
 on account of the boy's accident, and gave away blankets to take away 
 the occasion of remarks on this subject In the same way a man who 
 feels injured by another will destroy a certain amount of })roperty ; then 
 his adversary is compelled to do the same, else a stain of dishonour 
 would rest upon him This custom may be compared to a case when a 
 member of civilised society gives away to no good purpose a considerable 
 amount of money ostentatiously in order to show his superiority over a 
 detested neighbour. I adduce these comparisons to show that the custom 
 is not so dillicult to understand, and is founded on psychical causes as 
 active in our civilised society as among the barbarous natives of British 
 Columbia. A remarkable feature of the ])otlatch is the custom of giving 
 feasts going beyond the host's means. The procedure at such occasion:. 
 is also exactly regulated. The foundation of this custom is the solidarity 
 of the individual and the gens, or even the tribe, to which he belongs. 
 If an individual gains social distinction his gens participates in it. If he 
 h)se.'3 m respect the stain rests also on the gens. Theretbre the gens 
 contributrs to the payments to be made at a festival. If the least is 
 given to foreign tribes the whole tribe contributes to these payments. 
 
 lich this is done has been well set foi 
 
 i^y 
 
 i>y 
 
 G. M. Daw.'^on ('Trans. Hoy. Soc. Can.' 1887, page 80). The nuvn wh( 
 intends to give the potlatch first borrows as many blankets as he need' 
 
ON Tin: NOltTn-Wr.l^TERN tribes of fANADA. 
 
 1?*- 
 
 from both his friends and from those whom he is p^oing to invite to tli 
 foast. Everyone lends him as many as ho can atToi-d, i.e. according' to 
 )iis rank. At the feast these are jxiven away, each man receiving the 
 uioi-e the liigher his rank is. All those who have received anything at 
 tlie potlatch liave to repay the donble amount at a later day, and this is 
 used to T'epay those who lent blankets. At each such feast the man who 
 gives it ac(}nii'es a new and more lionourable name. 
 
 Among the SnanaimiKj I observed the following customs : The chief 's 
 son adojits, so-iie time after his fathei-'s denth, the latter'sname. For this 
 pp.r[)ose he invites all the neighbouring tribes to a potlatch. The Sna- 
 nainiuq have a permanent scaffold erected in front of their lionses, on 
 whieh the chief stands during tl\e potlatcli, assisted by two slaves, who 
 distribute the presents he gives away among his guests, who stand and sit 
 in the street. As it is necessary to give a gi-eat festival at the assumption 
 of the clnef's name, the new chief continues sometimes for years and years 
 to accumulate wealth for the purpose of celebrating this event. At tho 
 festival his fatlun-'s name is given him by four chiefs of foreign tribes. 
 
 I will give here some details on the wars of this tribe. The warriors 
 wore ^h<.;V ighly ti-ained. They were not iillowed to eat while on the war- 
 path, i^ore setting out on such an expedition they painted their faces 
 re! ^\'hen near the village they intended to attack, the party divided ; 
 one i;aii hid in ine woods behind the village, while tho others watched 
 in their canoes. When the latter gave a sign both parties attacked tho 
 village. When successful, tho men were killed, the women and children 
 carried off as slaves. The heads of the slain were cut off, taken home, and 
 planted on poles in front of the liouses. 
 
 It may be of interest to hear the history of one of these wars that 
 ra<red for many years about the middle of this century as told by a chief 
 of the Snanaimiiq. Koa'ijlitc, a chief of the Sl'ciatl, had a daughter, who 
 was the wife of a chief of tho Snanaimucp Once upon a time the former 
 tribe was attacked by the Le'kwiltok", and inany men had been killed. 
 Then Koti'iditc sent to the chief of the vSnanaimu(| and called upon him 
 for help. They .-iet out jointly and met the Le'kv.-iltok" at Qu'sam 
 (Salmon itivcr) In ihe ensuing struggle tho Si'eiatl and Snanaimuq 
 were victoriou*,. hat ,.iany of their warriors were killed. They brought 
 home many 1 -aii • of 'heir enemies. The fi'ien{Ls of the Snannimuq, how- 
 ever, were sail wiu'i ihcy heard of the death of so many of their friends, 
 and they rtr-nlved t taV? revenge. They all, the Pena'leqats, T';i'ti:kE, 
 Yeqo'laos, Qelii'ltq, C^'Lk'lcme'n, Snono'os, Snanaimuq, and Si'ciiitl, 
 gathered and maihi war upon the Tiekwiltok*. Another battle was fought 
 at (,^)u'.sam, in whicli the Le'kwiltok" were utterly defeated, and in which 
 many slaves were captured. Now the lie'kwiltok* called upon their 
 northern neiglibours for help. They were greatly I'educed in numbers ; 
 of the TIaa'luis only three were lelt. Then these tribes went south to 
 take revenge, and ni n. number of battles fought with the southern tribes, 
 who had mefi I'vhile been joined by the tribes of Puget Sound. While the 
 war was thi' , :i.'ing with alternating success, part of the tribes on V^an- 
 couver Island i],:.! removed to the upper part of Cowitchin River, others 
 to Nanaimo JJiAor, still others to tho mainland. Posts were continually 
 niainlained to keep the tribes informed of movements of the Ije'kwiltok" 
 and their allies. Once they had unexpectedly made an expedition south- 
 ^^ard before tho trilx'S were able to gather. They had gone past Fraser 
 'ivei- to Pu^fot Sound and had niassacred the trib(.\s of that ron;ion. 
 
 'n 
 
 I [ 
 
40 
 
 UKi'uui — 1889. 
 
 iiti 
 
 Meiuiwliile those iisseiubleLl on Cowitcbin River liad sent word to tlio tribos 
 of Fiiiser River uud snaiinonod tlieni to come to the island. Tliey toUl tliem 
 to pass throus^li Cowitcliin Gap and to look on the shallow b<ja'ih on the 
 norLh siile of that channel for a signal, They obeyed, Meanwhi.e all the 
 tribes on the island had assembled and determined to await the return of 
 the Le'lvwiltok' in Maple Bay. To indicate this they erected a pole, 
 sprinkled with the Idood of a blue jay, at the beach in Cowitchin Gap, and 
 made it point towards Maple Bay. Thus tliey all assembled. Early one 
 morning they heard the LO'kwiltok" coming. Tliey sang songs of victoiy. 
 Unexpectedly they were attacked. Almost all of them were slaughtered, 
 their canoes sunk, and women and cliildren enslaved. A few reached the 
 shore, but were starved near Comox. This was the last great battle of the 
 war. The narrator's father made peace with the northern tribes. lie 
 was the first to settle again on Gabriola Lsland, He emancipated his 
 slaves AVhen peace was made the chiefs made their peojiles inter- 
 marry. 
 
 I have no observations to of; . v on the government or laws of the 
 Ivutona'qa, except that usually th( r ^s succeeded by his son. If tin; 
 
 latter is not considered worthy the lu :iief is elected from among his 
 family. 
 
 Customs regarding Birth, Makriagk, and Dkath. 
 
 Krause gives the following repoi-ts of the customs of the Tlingit observed 
 at the birth of a child. He says that, according to Kemiaminow, the women 
 are assisted by midwivcs. After the child is born the young mother has 
 to remain for ten days in a small hut, which is erected for this purpose, 
 and in which the child was born. The new-born infant is washed with 
 cold fresh water and kept in a cradle filled with moss. It is not given 
 the breast until all the contents of its stomach (which are considered 
 the cause of disease) are lemoved by vomititig, which is promoted by 
 pressing the stomach. A month after birth the mother is sa" > to leave 
 her hut for the first time ; then she washes her child and puts on new 
 clothing. For five days after birth the mother does not partake of any 
 food, but drinks a little lukewarm water. 
 
 Among the Tsimshian I observed the following customs : A woman 
 who is with child is not allowed to eat tails of salmon, as alse the confine- 
 ment would be hard. She must rise early in the morning and leave the 
 house before any of the other inhal)itants leave it. Befoi-e the child is 
 born the father must stay outside his house, and must wear ragged cloth- 
 ing. After the child is born he must abstain from eating any fat food, 
 particularly [)orciipine, seal, and 'vhale. The mother is confined in a 
 sniall house or in a separate rotmi. 
 
 Numerous cei-emonies must be observed when girls reach maturity. 
 When about thirteen or fourteen years old they begin to practise fasting, 
 eating in the afternoon only, as a very severe fasting is prescribed at ihv 
 time when they reach maturity. It is believed that if they had any food 
 in their stomachs at this time they would have bad luck in all future. 
 They must remain aloiu^ and unseen in their room or in a ])orch for ten 
 days, and abstain from food and drink. For four days they are not even 
 allowed a drop of water. For a fortnight the girl is not permitted to chew 
 her own food. If she desires to have two or three boys when married, 
 two or three men chew her food for her ; in the other case, two or ihirv 
 
ON TIIK NOliTlI-Wr.STKHN Tiiiui;.-; oi- c.vnadv. 
 
 41 
 
 M 
 
 urit^'. 
 still},', 
 at the 
 food 
 uture. 
 
 r ten 
 b even 
 
 cbew 
 irried , 
 
 thvr(> 
 
 women. At tlie end of tliis fusling they are covered with inids and hehl 
 over u lire. It is behoved that by this ceremony her chilch'on are lu.ido to 
 be heaUhy; if it were oniitiud they vvouhl die, even it' they f:;row up to 1)0 
 a few }ears old. The girl is not allowed to look at fresh salmon and 
 olachen for a whole year, and lias to abstain from eating it. Her bend is 
 alwiiys covered with a small mat, and she must not look at men. She 
 must not lie down, but always sit, propped up between boxes and mats. 
 Her mother's clan give a great fceast and nuiny presents to her father's 
 elan. At this h.'ast her ears are perforated, and she is given ear-orna- 
 jiicjiits. When a chief's daughter reaches nuiturity she is given a jade 
 jiebble, which she must bite nntil her teeth ai'e completely worn down in 
 the middle. When the festival was held slaves were often given away or 
 killed. 
 
 I will mention in this place that women wdien drinking for the first 
 time after marriage must turn their cup four times in the same direction 
 in which the sun is moving, and drink very little only. The perforation 
 of the ears is repeated at later occasions, and every time a new hole is 
 made a new festival is celebrate!. 
 
 After a death has occurred, ti. ■ relatives of the deceased have their 
 hair cut short and their faces blackened. They cover their heads with 
 ragged and soiled mats, and go four times around the body singing 
 mourning songs. They must speak bnt little, confining themselves to 
 answering questions, as it is believed that they would else become 
 chatterboxes. Until the body is buried they must fast, eating only a very 
 little at night. Women of the gentes to which the deceased did not 
 belong act as wallers, and are paid for their work, the whole gens of the 
 deceased contributing to the payment. In wailing the women must 
 keep their eyes closed. The gens to which the deceased person's father 
 belongs must bury him. The body lies in state for a number of days. 
 It is washed immediately after death, placed ujiright and painted with 
 the crest of the gens of the dead person. His dancing ornaments and 
 weapons are placed by hi.-> side. Then the body is put into a box which 
 is tied up with lines made of elk-skins. These are furnished by the gens 
 of the deceased, and kept as a payment by the other gens. The bodies, 
 except those of shamans, are burnt. The box is placed on the funeral 
 pile, the lines of elk-skin are taken off and ke[)t In' tlu* father's gens. A 
 luile is cut into the bottom of the box and the pile is lighted. Before all 
 is burnt the heart is taken out of the body and buried. It is believed 
 that if it were burnt, all i-elations of the deceased wouhl die. The fatlier's 
 pens, besides receiving the lines, is paid with niirmot-skius and blankets. 
 The neai-est relations mourn for a whole year. Some time alter the 
 l)Mrial a memorial post is erected and a memorial festival celebrated. If 
 many members of one family die in (juick succession, the survivors lay 
 their fourth lingers on the edge of the box in which thecorpse is deposited 
 and cut off the first joint ' to cut off the deaths ' (gyidig''ots). The 
 bodies of shamans ai'e buried in caves or in the woods. These customs 
 are common to the Tlingit, Haida, and Tsimshian. 
 
 ' Bil(/iila. — Among the Bilqnla I noted the following customs: They 
 have professional midwives to assist the wiMnan, who is delivered in a 
 small house built for this purpose. The child is washed in warm water. 
 The mother must remain for ten days in her room. Father and mother 
 iire not allowed to go near the river for a year, else the salmon would 
 lake offence. 
 
 , ! 
 
 i I 
 
 W i 
 
42 
 
 REPOIIT — 1889. 
 
 m 
 
 Ciiils wliL'ii rciU'liiiig maturity must stuy in their bedroom, where they 
 }iivo a iireplaoe of their own. They are not allowcKl to descend to the 
 lloor, and do not sit by tlie lire of the family. After a whilt; tliey may 
 leave tiieir room, but only tlirouujh a hole eut in the iloor (the houses 
 standing on niles), thiouj^h whicli they must also enter. They are 
 allowed to pick berries, but for a whole year they must not come near 
 the river or the sea. llicy must not driidc more than is absolutely 
 necessary. Tlii'y must not eat salmon of tlie season, else tliey wouhl 
 losL! their senses, or tlieir mouths would be transformed into long beaks. 
 'I'liey must not eat snow, which is much liked by the Indians, nor must 
 tliev chew gum. 
 
 Kwakiutl. — There ai'o the same restrictions regarding the place in 
 which women are contined and reijardiii''' the food of jjirls reachiu'' 
 maturity. Tlie mari-iage customs are of })ecvdiar interest on account of 
 tin; transition from maternal to paternal institutions that may be observed 
 here. If a young man wishes to marry a girl, he must send messengers 
 to the girl's father and ask his ])ermission If the father accepts the 
 suitor, he may demand fifty or more blankets, according to his rank, to 
 be paid at once. He demands double that number to be paid after three 
 months. After this second payment has been made, the young man is 
 allowed to live with his wife in his father-in-law's house. When he goes 
 to live there the young man gives a feast to the whole tribe, without 
 giving away any blankets, and receives from his father-in-law fifty blankets 
 or more. At the same time his father-in-law states when ho intends to 
 refund the rest. During the feast, in which the young wife takes part, 
 she tells her father that her husband wishes to have his carvings and 
 dances. Her father is obliged to give them to him, and promises to do so 
 at a future occasion. After three months more the young man pays his 
 fathei'-in-law 100 blankets to gain permission to take his wife to his 
 own home. The blankets which lie has given to his father-in-law are 
 repaid by the latter with interest. At the ajj^winted time the woman's 
 father gives a great feast to the whole tril)e. He steps forward carrying 
 his copper, the emblem of richness and power, and hands it to his son-in- 
 law, thus giving him his name, carvings, and dances. The young man 
 has to give blankets to every guest attending the feast ; the nobler the 
 guest is, tlie more blankets he receives. 
 
 The dowry of the bride consists of bracelets made of beavei'-toea and 
 copper; so-called 'button-blankets,' coppei'-])lutes, and the gyl'serstAl. 
 The last is a heavy board shaped like one of the lids of Indian bo.xes. 
 Its front is set with sea-ottor teeth. It is said to represent the human 
 lower jaw, and I was told that it indicates the right of the husband to 
 command his wife to speak or to be silent as he may desire. 
 
 The bride receives her boxes and other household goods fronr her 
 parents. After the marriage she makes presents of dishes, spoons, trays, 
 and similar objects to the whole tribe in behalf of her husband, in order to 
 Bhow his liberality. If the woman should intend to separate from her 
 husband, and to return to her parents, her father must repay twofold all 
 he has received froni his son-in-law. If there should be a child, he has 
 to repay him threefold. This third part becomes the property of the 
 child. Freciuently this is only a sham divorce, entered iuto to give an 
 opportunity to the fiither-in-law to show his liberality and wealth. As 
 soon a^ he has paid the husband, the latter repurchases his wife. I was 
 
 a 
 
 told 
 
 go (_, 
 
 Fitr. 
 
ON Tin: NOUTII-WESIKUN TlUIiKS OF CANADA. 
 
 K^ 
 
 the 
 
 iicr 
 
 It rays, 
 
 ller to 
 
 1 her 
 
 Id iill 
 
 ^e lias 
 
 the 
 
 ro an 
 
 told thiit tl:e r/i/t'serst(U is not used hy tbo LO'kwiltok". It is ccrtuinly nut 
 Iviiowii to the Coast Sidish. 
 
 Aihoiil: the Tlutliisik'oida and Awiky'O'nok- the {.'.ens of theyoimnr man 
 go out to ni(M t his l)ride. 'i'hey ('onne(!t fonr boats by hjnj^ boards and per- 
 form a dance on this jjliitforni. The dance is called Litinii hy 
 tlie Thitlasik'oahi. Anionj^' the Awiky'O'nok another dance is per- 
 formed, in which a woman lias the chief part. She carries a 
 carved piece ot" wood abont a foot and a half lont^, of tlic shape 
 sliown by the fi^nre, and set with haliotis sliells. Jiesidcs her, 
 four masked dancers take part in the tlance. Tliey are (•allid 
 Winofine'iak", Yaiain'i'lak'ame, Ai(|[iinu"iiakila, and Yaiawino'akila. 
 Unfortunately I was tmable to understand the meaning of their 
 dance. 
 
 The dead are put into boxes and buried either in a separate bni-ial 
 ground or deposited in the higher branches of trees. The ti'iljcs living at 
 the northern end of Vancouver Island have separate burial grounds for 
 chiefs and for common or middle-class people. The box containing tlio 
 body is ])laced in a small honse similar to those of the 1'lingit and IJaida. 
 The house is covered with blankets, and strips of l)lanket are fa-^tened to 
 ]if)les erected near the grave or to lines drawn from one tree to the other. 
 Memorial columns, showing the crest of the tribe, are erected near the 
 graves. Large spoons are placed alongside the houses, and are tilled with 
 food when the body is buried. At the same time food is burnt on the 
 hfuch. If the body is hung up in a tree, the lower branches are carefully 
 removed to make it inaccessible. Sometimes chiefs are buried in canoes. 
 The Koskinio frequently bury their dead in a cave. The gz-avcyardg 
 are generally situated on small islands or grounds near the village, and 
 are one of the most remarkable sights on the coast, on account of tho 
 great display of colours and carvings. 
 
 The regulations referring to the mourning period arc very severe. 
 In case of the death of husband or wife, the survivor has to observe the 
 I'ollowiTjg rules: For four da\s after the death the survivor must sit 
 inuti(»nie8s, the knees drawn up toward the ciun. On the third day all 
 the inhabitants of the village, including children, must take a bath. On 
 tho fourth day some water is heated in a wooden kettle, and the widow 
 or widower drips it upon his head. Wlien he becomes tired of sitting 
 motionless, and must move, he thinks of his enemy, stretches his legs 
 slowly four times, and draws them up again. Then his enemy must die. 
 During the following sixteen days he must remain on the same spot, but 
 he may stretch out his legs. Ife is not allowed, however, to move his 
 
 iiiuuis. Nobody must speak to him, and whosoever disobeys this command 
 will be j)unished by the death of one of his relatives. Every fourth day 
 ht' takes a bath. He is fed twie(> a day by an old w<nnan at the time of 
 low wati'r, with salmon caught in the prece<ling year, and given to him 
 in the dishes and spoons of the deceased. While sitting so his mind is 
 wanuerin<T to and tVo. lie sees his house and his I'rii'uds as though far, 
 f 0' away. Jf in his visions he sees a man near by, the latter is sure to 
 die at no distant day ; if he sees him very far awaj', he will continue to 
 live long. After tho sixteen d.ays have passed, he may lie down, but not 
 stretch out. He takes a bath every eighth day. At the end of the first 
 month he takes off his clothing, and dresses the stump of a tree with it. 
 Alter another month has passed he may sit in a corner of the house, but 
 iur four months he must not minfjle with others. He must not use tlie 
 
 »■ i 
 
9H 
 
 44 
 
 iiKi'oia' — 1889. 
 
 house ilooi", but a soparsite dour is cut for lii.s uso. Ueforo he leaves the 
 house i'ur the first time lie must three iiines approach tiie door anil retniui, 
 then he may leave the housi'. After ten months his li.iir is cut shoi-t, 
 and iiftcr a year the mouruiuf^ is at an end. At present the Indians 
 abstain, diirini^ tlie mourning, fioin the use of Eiu'opean implements. 
 
 Food is burned for the dead on the beach, sometimes in fjreat quanti- 
 ties, which is intended to servci for their food. Tlie mourners wail eveiy 
 morning' on the beach, facing the grave. The women scratch their faces 
 with their nails, and cut tliem with knives and shells. 
 
 At'ler the chief's diath a great feast is celebrated, in which the sou 
 adopts his father's name. At first nioni'iiing songs are sung, in which 
 stones are used instead of sticks for beating time. Then the whistle 
 Ts'e'koityala is heard, which ends their mourning and restores happiness 
 to their minds. After a while the chief's son enters, carrying; his coi)per 
 plate, and, assuming his father's name, becomes the new cliief. 
 
 Aft 
 
 tin. 
 
 intr 
 
 the 
 
 the 
 
 Coast ScilisJi. 
 
 I am best acquainted with the customs of the Snanaimuq, which are 
 probal»ly almost identical with those of the other tribes of this grouji, the 
 (j'atlo'lt(| esci>pted, whose customs are more alike to those of the Kwakiiitl 
 than to those of the other Coast Salish. 
 
 It is the custom of the Snanaimuq that, if a woman is to be 
 delivered, all the women are invited to come, and to rub cedar-bark, 
 "which is used for washing and bedding the babe. Two women, the 
 wives of chiefs, wash the new-born babe. All those who do any work on 
 behalf of the mother or child are paid with j)ieccs of a mountain-goat 
 blanket. The mother must not eat anything but dried salmon, and is 
 not allowed to go down to the river. The children are not named until 
 they are several years old. Then all the gentes of the tribe are invited, 
 and <at the ensuing festival the child receives the name of his grandfather 
 or that of another old member of the gens. Names once given are not 
 chansxed, except when that of a chief is assumed by his son. 
 
 The man who wants to marry a girl goes into the house of her 
 parents, and sits down, without speaking a word, close by the door. 
 There he sits four days, without eating any food. For three dayo the 
 girl's parents abuse hini in every way, but on the fourth day they feign 
 to be moved by his perseverance, and the girl's mother gives him a mat 
 to sit on. hi the evening of the fourth day the girl's parents call on the 
 chief of the gens, and re(|uest his wife to invite the young man to sit 
 down near the fire. Then he knows that the parents will give their 
 consent to the marriage. A meal is cooked ; some food is served to the 
 young man, and some is sent to his parents in order to advise them of 
 the consent of the girl's family. The latter, on receiving the food, accejit 
 it, and turn at once to cooking a meal. They fill the empty dishes in 
 which the food was sent, and return them to the girl's parents. Then 
 both families give jointl}^ a great feast. The young man's parents load 
 their boat with mountain-goat blankets and other valuable presents, ami 
 leave the landing-place of their house and land at that of the bride's 
 house. They are accompanied by the membei's of their gens. Mean- 
 while the bride's gens has assembled in her house. The chiefs of the 
 groom's gens deliver the presents to the bride's parents, making a loai,' 
 and elaborate speech. In return, the bride's parents present these chietV 
 
ON TiiH noi;tiiwi:sti;i!N thiiiks ok can.vha. 
 
 4.5 
 
 ich ave 
 lip, tho 
 viikiutl 
 
 ,yo the 
 
 a niiit 
 on tlu! 
 to sit 
 o tlioir 
 to tlio 
 leni cif 
 accept 
 lies in 
 Thon 
 its loud 
 ts, ami 
 bride's 
 Meaii- 
 i of the 
 a Ion;' 
 
 
 with ii fow blankets, wliicli are liatided to them by the chiefH of their 
 gens. Then tlio ffroom'.s pons in invited to partuko in a irt'eat feast. 
 After those coreraonic-i arc eiuled, the youn*,' niiin !iiid his ^en.s i-ctiini to 
 the boat, and stay for a fow hours on the water, ^lean while the biido is 
 intriKsted to the care of the hii^hest chief of her j:;('ns, who takes Iier by 
 tlie hand, carryin<^ a rattle elaborately carved, of ni'oiiiitain-^oat horn, in 
 the other. JJesides this, he carries a mat for the bride to sit on. Then 
 t!ie highest chief of the other gens takes her from the hanils of the 
 former, and leads her into the boat. The pro.seiits given by the ])arents 
 of the young man are restored, later on, in the .same proportion by the 
 bride's parents. 
 
 While these formal ceremonies arc always observed wdicn both parties 
 are of high rank, in other cases, it' both parents are of the same rank, the 
 marricago is sometimes celebrated only by a feast and by a payment of 
 tlie value of al)out fcjrly blankets to the bride's parents by those of the 
 groom. These are also restored later on. 
 
 If the families are of dillerent social r+nnding, the wliole gens of those 
 jiai'ents who are of liighor rank may go to the young couple and recover 
 the husband or wife, as tlie case may be. This is considered a divorce. 
 Or tlie chiefs of tlie oHeiided gens summon a council, and the case ia 
 settled by a payment of blankets. 
 
 Tlie following funeral customs are practised by the Snanaimuq. Tbo 
 face of the deceased is painted with red and black paint. 'J'ho corpse is 
 jmt in a box, which is placed on four ]iosts about live feet above the 
 ground. In rare instances only the boxes are fastened in the to[)S of 
 trees, which are made inaccessible by cutting oil' the lower branches. 
 ]\Iembers of a gens are placed near each other, near relatives sometimes 
 in a small liousc, in wdiich the boxes are enclosed. A chief's body is put 
 in a carved box, and the front posts supporting his coflin arc carved, 
 llis mask is placed between these posts. The graves of gi'eat warriors 
 are marked by a statne representing a warrior with a war-club. There is 
 nothing to distinguish a shaman's gi'avo from that of an oi'dinary man. 
 The mourners must move very slowly. They arc not allowed to conio 
 near the water and eat the heads of salmon. They must cook and eat 
 alone, and not nse the fire and the dishes which other people use. Every 
 morning they go down to the beach and wail for the dead. After the 
 death of a young child, the parents cut off their hair, but there is no 
 other ceremony. 
 
 After the death of husband or wife, the survivor must paint his legs 
 and his blanket red. For three or four days he must not eat anything. 
 Then three men or women give him some food, and henceforth he is 
 allowed to eat. Twice every day he must take a bath, in whi(Oi he or 
 t-he is assisted by two men or womtni. At the end of the mourning 
 period the red blanket is given to an old man, who deposits it in the 
 woods. 
 
 At the death of the chief the whole ti'ibe mourns. Four days after 
 the death occurred the whole tribe assembles, and all take a bath, which 
 conclndes the mourning. 
 
 Kutouaqa. — I have not obtained any information regarding customs 
 referring to birth. 
 
 When a girl reaches maturity she must inform her mother and 
 grandmother, who lead her to a lonely place, or the woods, and provitk; 
 her with food for about twenty days. W'lieii tiiis food is at an end, she 
 
 1 f 
 
 ■' w 
 
46 
 
 in;p(>HT-18Sf>. 
 
 rotnrriR at, niijfht to tlu; villai^o I'nv laore. It' anybjily sIid.iI.I liiippun to 
 find liin- wlioi'CNiboiits, slio has to roscji-t to niiotlicr sccliidt'd placu', 
 (iiMHM'Jilly slif lias to sliif't her hidintr-phioo four liiiicH. She must abstain 
 tVoiii ccftain kinds of f'nod in order (d pi'cscrvo liui" teeth. She must not 
 cat soup nia(h' of shaving's I'i-dui deer or elk skin, as else her skin \V()\ilil 
 become an nnclean complexion. Sht; must not eat bones with marrow, 
 lieart, or kidney. An unmarried woman must eat neither breast nor 
 tenderloin of any animal. 11' she should eat tenderhjiii of both sides 
 of the animal, it is believed she would f^'ivo birth to twins. Neither 
 must she eat meat lyin<^ around tlio (ihlKralur J'irditn'ii. of the [)elvic bone, 
 t'lso an enemy's arrow would hit her husbami in that part. 
 
 When a youni,^ man wishes to marry a tfirl, lio has to make a cci-tain 
 paym(>nt to his parents-in-law. It seems there is no further cercTuony 
 connected with tho marriage. Al'un' marriage tlio woman's ])arents givo 
 some presents to tho young couple. The Hrst child is often sacrlticed to 
 the sun, to secure health and hapi)ineHH to tho whole family. An old 
 'brave' is requesteil to give a boy his name, to make him a good wariior. 
 Children nmat not eat blood and marrow, else they will become weak. 
 
 The dead arc buried in an outstretched position. The lioad was 
 probably always directed eastwards, 'i'lu'y kill tho deceased's horse and 
 hang Ills property to a tree under which his grave is. The body is given 
 its best clothing. Tho nu)urners cut olf their hair, which is buried with 
 the body. When a wari'ior dies, they paint his face red, and bui-y him 
 between trees whiidi are peeled ajul then painted red. 
 
 Before tho body is buried, they prophesy future events from tli(> 
 position of his hands. These are ])laced over tho bi-east of the body, the 
 left nearer the chin than Iho right. Then tho body is covered with a 
 skin, which after a few minutes is removed. If tho hands have not 
 changed their position, it indicates that no more deaths will occur in tlio 
 same season. If they are ])artly closed, the number of closed lingers 
 indicates the number of deaths. If the point of the thuml) very nearly 
 touches the point of tho tirst finger, it indicates tliat these deaths will 
 take i)laco very soon. If both liands are tirndy closed, they open tho 
 fingers one by one, and if they (ind beads (torn from the clothing ?) in 
 the hands, they believe that they will have good fortune. Iftheytind 
 dried moat in the hand, it indicates t1iat they will have plenty of food. 
 If both hands are closed so lirmly that they can .not bo opened, it indicates 
 that the tribe will be strong and healthy and free from disease. These 
 experiments are repeated several times. 
 
 W^hile a few men buiy tho body, the mourners remain in tho lodge 
 motionless. When those who have buried tho body return, they take a 
 thornbnsh, di}) it into a kettle of water, and sprinkle tho doors of all lodges. 
 Then the bush is broken to pieces, tlu'own into a kettle of water, Avhicli 
 is drunk 1)3'^ the mourners. This ends the mourning ceremonies. 
 
 After the death of a woman, her children must wear until tho follow- 
 ing .spring rings cut out of skin around the wrists, lower and upper 
 arms, and ai'ound the legs. It is believed that else their bones would 
 become weak. 
 
 REMtllONS. 
 
 Tlwgit, — Wiiilo tho shamanistic practices and customs are very much 
 alike among tlie various peoples of the North Pacific coast, their idcus 
 about future life and the groat deities deserve a separate description. The 
 
ON IlIE NOKTIl-AVKsTr.UN flilllllS uF CANAnA. 
 
 m tho 
 ly, tin- 
 with a 
 vo not 
 in tlio 
 
 uarly 
 9 will 
 1 tlio 
 ?) in 
 ■V tlnd 
 'food, 
 iicates 
 These 
 
 lodtro 
 iko a 
 
 vhicli 
 
 Tlingit believe tliat tlio houI, after death, lives in a counti-y .similar to 
 our.s. Tliosc! who have died a violent death ^o to heaven, to a country 
 (■nknl hy Tahit; thoso who die by niekness (al.^o Wdnu-ii dyin[( in ehild- 
 hed) rfo to a conntry l)eyond the bonlera oi' tin; earth, bnt on the sanio 
 level. It is Hiiid that the dead fn)in both (•(iiinti-ies join diifini; tho 
 diiytinie. 1 hclii've tl; .t this idea, whieh is al~o Indd hy the Jlaiiln, 
 must be aserihed to Eskimo iidhienee. The ideas of tho Tlinyit vet;ard- 
 iiiLf fntnre life aro best desei'il)ed in the following tales, wdiich ai'c; told as 
 adventures of shamans who liv(>d about lol) or 'JMH yi-ars a^^o : 
 
 A shaman had been sick for many years. When he felt that lio eoidd 
 not reeover, and death was ai)])roaeliin<r, he nsked his mother to take j^ood 
 eai-e of his dotf. He died. The eorpse was wrapped in furs, and on the 
 fourth day he was buried in the {graveyard of the sliamiins, near the 
 beach. I'lvery day his mother went to the little honse in winch his body 
 was deposited, bcwaiiinLT his deatli, and burinns^ food for him. One dny 
 tho doLj, wdio had accompanied her, betran to bark, and would not ho 
 {piieted. Suddenly sho heard somethiiij^ movin<^' in the y'rave, and a 
 sound as tliouijfh somehody was awakint; from a Inufj sleep. She tied, 
 terrified, and t(dd the people what she had lieai'd. They went to tho 
 grave, opened it, and found that tho dead had returned to life. They 
 carried him home, and gave him some food. Ibit ho felt weak, and it 
 was not until he had sle])t loncf and sonndl}' that he beean to sneak. 
 ' Mother,' ho said, 'why did not you give me to eat when 1 asked yon ? 
 Did not you hear nie ? I said, " I arn hungry," and nudged yon. I 
 wanted to touch yonr right side, bnt I Avas unable to do so. I was 
 compelled by a magic force to .stand at your left side. You did not re|)ly, 
 but merely touched your side, saying, " That is a bad omen." When I 
 saw you eating, I asked you to let me take part in your meal, bnt you 
 did not answer, and without your permission I was not able to jiartako 
 of any food. You said, " The fire crackles, and you threw some of your 
 meal into it." 
 
 'When I was dead I did not feel any pain. I sat by my body, and 
 saw how you prepared it for burial, and how you painted my face with 
 our crest. I heard yon, O mother, mourning at my grave. I told yoii 
 that I was not dead, but you did not hear me. After four days I felt as 
 tiiough there was no day and no night. 1 saw you carrying away my 
 body, and felt compelled to accompany it, although I wisbod to stay in 
 our house. I asked every one of you to give mo some food, but you 
 threw it into the fire, and then I felt sati^licd. At last 1 thought, " I 
 believe I am dead, for nobody hears me, and the bunit food satisiies me," 
 and I resolved to go into the land of the souls. Soon I arrived at a fci k 
 in the road. A much-trodden road led one way, while the other sctj>.,..] 
 to have been seldom used. I followed the former. 1 longed to die, and 
 went on and on, hoping to reach the country of the deceased. At last I 
 ari'ived at a steep i-ock, the end of the world. At the foot of the rock a 
 river flowed sluggishl}^ On the other side I saw a village, and recog- 
 nised many of its inhabitants. I saw my grandmother and my uncle 
 who have long been dead, and many children whom I hnd once tried to 
 cure. But many of those I saw I did not know. I cried, "Oh, come, 
 have pity upon me ! Take mo over to you ! " But they continued to 
 wander about as though they did not hear me. I was overcome by 
 wt-arinesp, and lay down. The hard rock was my pillow. I slept 
 soundly, and when 1 awoke I did not know how long I had slept. I 
 
 ; I 
 
SB 
 
 48 
 
 r.F.roltT IMHO. 
 
 HI 
 
 utrolcliecl my liinl)s and yawned. Tlu^n the |ic()[)lu in ilio villaj^o cried, 
 " .Sorni'lxidy is coininj^ ! Let us (^o and iuko him iUM-dSs flic risci-I " A 
 boat caino to wlioro I stood, and took me to tiio villapc. Kviryotie 
 prectcd mo kindly. T was going to toll tlictn (»f'tlii.s lif^', hut tliey laised 
 tlieir hands and niolioiu'd me to bo sih'iit, saying, " Don't speak of these 
 matters; they do n"t belong to ns." 'J'iiey ga\ e me sabnon and berries 
 to eal, Itut everylliing hud a harnt taste, aUhougli it looked like good 
 food; theicfoK^ 1 did not touch it. HMiey gave me water, but wlien I 
 ■wiis about to drink it I found (iiiit it looked green and had a bitter taste. 
 They told me tlial the river which I hail crossed was formed of tiie tears 
 shed by the women over tlie dead ; tluii'cfore yon must not cry until your 
 dead friend has crossed the river. 
 
 ' I thought, " I came here to die, but the 8])ii'it,s lead a miserable life. 
 I will rather endure the pains my mother infliets upon mo than stay 
 here." The spirits asked me to stay, but I was not moved by their 
 entreaties, aiul left. As soon as T turned round the river had disappeared, 
 anil 1 found myself on a ])ath that was seldom trodden by man. J went 
 on and on, and saw many hands growrig out of the ground, and moving 
 towards me, as though tliey '.vero asking sonujthing: Far away I saw a 
 great fire, and close behiml it 'i sword swinging around. When 1 
 followed the narrow path I saw niaviy eyes, whieb were all fixed upon 
 mo. Jbit I did not mind them, for I wanted to die, and I went ou and 
 on. Tiie fii-e was still at a distance. At last I readied it, ami then I 
 thought, "What shall I do ? 'My mother does not hear me. I hate the 
 life of the spirits. I will die a violent death, and go to Tahi't." I put 
 my head into the fire, right where the sword was swinging round. Then 
 all of a sudden 1 felt cold. 1 heard my dog barking and my mother 
 crying. I. stretched my linib.s, peeped through the walls of my little 
 grave, and saw yon, O nuither, runiung away. I called my dog; he 
 came to see mo, and then you arriveel and found me alive. Many would 
 like to return from the country of the spirits, but they dread the hands, 
 the eyes, and the lire ; therefore the path is almost obliterated.' 
 
 A similar story tells of a man's visit to the upper country, which is 
 ruled hy Tahi't : 
 
 A man named Ky'itra'e, who lived about seven generations ago, killed 
 himself. When he dieil he saw a ladder descending from heaven, atid 
 he ascended it. At the head of the ladder he met an old watchman, who 
 was all black, and had curly hair (? ?), He asked, ' What do you want 
 here ? ' When Ky'itl'a'c told him that ho had killed himself, the watch- 
 man allowed him to pass. Soon he discovered a largo house, and saw a 
 kettle standing in front of it. In the house he saw Tahi't, who beckoned 
 him to come in. He called two of his peo])Ie (who are called KycwakTi'o) 
 and ordered them to show Ky'itl'a'c the whole country. They led him to 
 the Milky Way, and to a lake in which two white geese Vveve .^iViimming. 
 They gave him a small stone and asked him to try and hit the geese 
 with it. He complied with their request, and as soon as he had hit the 
 geese they began to sing. This made him laugh, for their singing felt 
 as though somebody tickled him. Then his companions asked him, 'Do 
 you wish to see Tahl't's daughters ? ' When he expressed his desir(> 
 they opened the cloud door, and he saw two bashful voung girls beyond 
 the clouds. When he looked down upon the earth he saw the tops of 
 the trees looking like so many pins. Hut he wished to return to tlie 
 earth, lie pulled his hlanket over his head and flung himself down. 
 
 i 
 
f>N TiiK n()1;tii-\vi;>:'kiin ritinEs or panapa. 
 
 V.) 
 
 A 
 
 [11, aiitl 
 |ii, wli'> 
 waiii 
 watcli- 
 saw a 
 I'koncil 
 iik'a'u) 
 Ihim to 
 iming- 
 rreese 
 liittbc 
 ,g f.lt 
 
 I desire 
 beyoiul 
 [ops i>l' 
 In tiic 
 iiUiwii 
 
 I 
 
 :•; 
 
 Ho arrived ut tho cartli iiiilmrt, atul found liiniscH' at the foot oT somo 
 trci's. Soon li(! discovered a small lious", l!i" door of wliu'li wii-< covered 
 with mats, ilo peeped into it, and lieiird a child crvin^f that had j;isr, 
 l)r irn. Ik) him.sclf was the child, and wiien ho camo to bo j^rowii 
 
 up in, told tho jieoplo of Taint. 'I'luiy hud heard idxnit him ln't'ore, hut 
 only then thi'y learnt cverythint^ about the upper world. Ky'itr:V(! told 
 that tiiose whos(! heads had been cut otF had their eyes between their 
 shoulders in tho upper world. 
 
 Another mnn, iiinied (ryinaskila'c, did not Ixdieve in Tn^'i't. TTe^jiid 
 to the people, ' Kill me I If I really ^-o to Tahl't, I shall throw down 
 t'lU'l from heaven.' He was killed, and after a short time I'our pieces of 
 wood fell down from heaven. Then tho peoi)lo knew that Ky'itl'a'c's re- 
 jiort was ti'ue. 
 
 In tho second of these tales, rcfercnco is made to the Tlii'<,nt id(>a of 
 transmit^ration of souls. Former authors state that man is born 
 anew four times, and that the soul is then annihilated. I did not, hear of 
 any sueh •.■estriction, but it may bo that some notion of this kind obtains. 
 The souls of animals also descend to tho next generation, but there is no 
 ti'ansmigration of souls between man and animal, or btitween an'"'nls of 
 ditferent kinds. There is particularly no transmigration of souls between 
 man and his cresj. 
 
 It is said that * our world is sharp as a knife.' Although there is a 
 mythieiil side to the idea, it seems to be said princi[)ally in a moral aspect. 
 The saying continues, ' Wo must take caro that wo do not deviate iVom 
 the straight course, for else we would fall olf and die.' ^ly informant 
 explained this, saying, ' Once a boy did not believe that our world is .sharp. 
 He danced about and behaved foolishly. Then he ran a s[)linter of \vood 
 into his foot and died. Xow he knew that our world is as siiarp as a 
 knife.' 
 
 I have not heard that "Yetl, tho great hero of their mytlis, is worshijiped, 
 but they believe that he will return. It is, however, not stated whal he 
 will do on bis return, whether he will continue his adventures or benefit, 
 mankind. It must bo borne in mind tliat Yetl, in all his exploits, by 
 which lie benefited man, did so against his will and intent. 
 
 The Tliugit pray to tho sun to give them food and fair weather, but 
 it does not seem that he occupies in any way a prominent place among 
 iheir deities. They also pray and oiTor to the mountains and to the 
 thunder, to tho killer {Dclphinus orca) and to the seals. Their religion 
 is a nature worship. W'jien praying they blow up eagle-down as an 
 uifering, and give to every being what thty think it likes best. The 
 mountains are asked for fair wind. When they hear a peal of thunder, 
 they shako themselves and jump high uj), crying, ' Take all my sickness 
 from me ! ' 
 
 The killer is believed to upset canoes and take the crew with him, 
 Ilim and the seal they ask for food. They believe in fabulous scal-iiKMi. 
 When one of these is seen, thoy pour a bucket of fresh water into th<^ 
 sea. 
 
 I have not discovered any belief distinguishing the religion of the 
 ITaida from that of the Tlingit, 
 
 Ttiimshlaii. — While the religion of the Tlingit and Haida seems to be 
 a nature worship, founded on tho general idea of the animation of natural 
 olijects, no object obtaining a prominent place, that of the Tsimshian is 
 a ])ure worship of Heaven (Leqa'). Heaven is tho great deity who has o- 
 
 D 
 
 
 I: 
 
 il 
 

 li ' ' ■ 
 
 50 
 
 RKPORT — 188!). 
 
 |i V 
 
 m 
 
 number of mediators called NKqno'q. Any natural object can be a 
 NKqno'q, but the most important ones are sun and moon, spirits appear- 
 ing in the shape of lightning strokes and animals. Nncjno'q designates 
 anything mysterious. It is the snpernatui'al will of tlie deity, as well as 
 the wliistlo which is used in the dances and is kept a profound secret, and 
 a men; sleiglit-of-hand. In one myth the master of the moon, the posti- 
 liMiee (Ilai'ntHloq ), appears as a powerful deity. I suspect tliat this last 
 iilea is due to Kwrikiiul innuence. Heaven rules the destinies of iriaukind ; 
 Heaven taught man to distinguish between good and bad, and gave the 
 religious hiws and institutions. Heaven is giatitiod by the mere exist- 
 ence of man. He is worshipped by olferings and prayer, the smoke rising 
 from fires being especially agreeable to him. ^Murderers, adulterers, and 
 those who behave foolishly, talking to no ])urpose. and making noise at 
 night, are especially hateful to him. He loves those who take pity upon 
 the poor, v/ho do not try to become rich by selling at high prices what 
 others want. His messengers, particularly sun and moon, must be treated 
 with respect. Men make tliemselves agreeable to the deity l)y cleanliness. 
 Therefore, they must bathe and wash their whole bodies before prayiny-. 
 For the same reason they take a vomitive when they wish to please the 
 deity well. They fast and abstain from touching thoir wives if they 
 desire their prayers to be successful. They offer everything that is con- 
 sidered valuable — cagle-down, red paint, red cedar bark, good elk-skin 
 lines, &c. The offering is burnt. 
 
 The Tsimshian do not always pray to Heaven directly, but far more 
 frequently to his mediators. Thus they pray in a general way to the 
 NEqno'q : ' NF.qnu'q, NEqiio'q ! S/:mayUs, SLmd'yits ! ramrd'dKn ! di/eh 
 He' II qfipdy(l'ni:ksEn He' rhjit ! NEqno'q ! ramrd'dEn ! ' that is, ' NEqno'([, 
 NEqno'q! Chief, chief! Have pity upon us ! Else there will be nobody 
 to make smoke under you ! NEqno'q ! Have pity upon us ! ' Or praying 
 for faii <veather: ^ NEqno'q, NEqno'q ! SEinni/its, SEmd' 1/ its ! ramrd'dKn. I 
 tgyiiie'e wdl tlEVE'nt nESEgija'tEnt. Man sd'iJn/a sl'Eut ada ma d'u ds\lnt ! ' 
 ' NEqno'q, NEqno'q ! Chief, chief ! Have pity upon us ! Look down and 
 see wliat those whom yon made are doing ! Pull up thy foot and sweep off 
 thy face ! ' ('Pull up thy foot '=stop the rain ; ' sweep off thy face ' = 
 take away the clouds.) The following is a prayer for calm weather: 
 ' Lo'sEijya nd ksEnd'tlgF.nt ! SEmd'yit dEmionl gya'ksEt!' 'Hold in thy 
 breath. Chief! that it be calm ! ' Before eating they burn food ; having 
 done so they pray: ^ Wa SEwd/yits dEm ga'hEnguaa qpigd' ga'JiEnni'e. 
 Tawd'l mdndEgna'a, tawd'l mdndEgmi'a tJgErancE. GyV EiiEm ! ' ' Here ! 
 Chief! Here is for you to eat, part of our food. It is all that is left 
 US ! It is ail that is left us! Now feed us!' in the same way the 
 woman in the legend prays : ' Wa wa wa gyl'snEm hadsenals ! ' ' Now, 
 now, now feed us ! fortunate one! ' (name of a hii-d, a NEqno'q) 
 
 The dead go to a place similar to that of the living. Our summer is 
 their winter, our Avinter their summer. They have everything — fish, 
 venison, and skins — in abundance. 
 
 If a s[)eeial object is to be attained, they believe they can compel the 
 deity to grant it by a rigid fasting. For seven days they have to abstain 
 from food and from seeing their wives. During those days they have to 
 lie in bed motionless. Aftci' seven days they may rise, wash themselves, 
 comb the right side of their liead, and paint the right side -f their face, 
 Then they might look at their wives. A less rigid form of fasting ex- 
 tends over four days only. To inak(» tlie - "roniony very successful, thciv 
 
 ill in Ai 
 <o eat ?) 
 ^^■( II up I 
 "■'lojn t 
 
»<«»i«a»«8M88«»^mwM^aijjK^: 
 
 r 
 
 ON THK ^OKr„-WEST.«. ,«,,,, ^,^ ^^^^^^^^_ 
 
 Fig.. -1. 
 
 ■wivGS must join fl, em Tr fi. -o , ^' 
 
 uiiatever twin^j -n-id, ^> * "' ^>"m down li..r.n*^i ,.' " * ^ » t'lere- 
 
 llu oJaclicn ,.s called halK,„.V'/k V/ ' =!^''k"JS- plentifu] " '^ 
 
 prescribed when tlin fi,.J ,■ i^ ^^' '^^'^^ S'^vj-our. CWin, nn 
 
 break a single bo" v ^■*'"^' "''^'^^ «ot cool ifc bv Wn/ '''" 
 Ti r- 1 'dkes lor catch in (>• n,^ c i ^ '""'^t oo kept neat in,? i 
 
 J-^anikilak- (with ouuZJ.' ^7 ^^^'« bi,n offenn-J iV ^'"""■ 
 
 ^^'nrulered all over the wmS •"•^'-^' ^^''^^ ^^^^^^ b '"" '''^ 
 
 •t"d arts. Tiicv nm f ?• ' ^/^"'S' ^^n i>'".s so-M-'tl ilf ? ''^''"' ''^"'' 
 
 "^^ ours, and ^Se^ "" ^^f^ ,f^^- ^^-^^ tl e o^';^^'^' -^^--. 
 
 '-'.V_ reappear ; to see ?hen L."^ '"' "'7 '''^^ve been on oa tl Tb '"r^'"'^ 
 
 ,^ . The Kvvakiutl have fbc' i^' ""'V-'^^^^ '''"^ death ^ ^'^ -''"«''^ 
 
 ;^«'-ed the '^o:?l S^^^l::?f ^S^-'^ -- 1 r" ;r ^'''r^" 
 
 t"ey are able to simimnn f ^^'^^ '''V''"^''' "^t" ^'^idmon v^ ■ ' ? " '« 
 -^'^ft^irorbad wS 'i^;" f ^^X motions o" :;, ^^'l'' -'''^'^-' 
 
 -0 ^r this purpose ^'r^ tie a JJT" ''' F^"'^'' "' -'''-' •:■••;;::' "^'■ 
 «'^tbox about throe feet W K . o-'' qaten, which h.s th ■ l b" ' !■"" 
 '^''e considered sc.,v« p ^ ''-^ *"o f..ct -.vide Tl • ''''^'^' "t a 
 
 IS 
 
 d 
 
 T/ie r 
 
 wruid 
 
 er 
 
 ■'^^■< ^\l//A7i.__l^|,(, ( 
 
 '11 having tbc .sh' 
 
 er. The CathVIt 
 
 oa.st Sn!i^| 
 
 :™d "hich i,/,3 b„„ -c 
 
 1 call the latter K 
 
 ■ipc of sal 
 I worship fhe 
 
 •n tl 
 
 "ri Ai ]i 
 
 M'( II 
 
 ^•'t The S 
 
 f''J':q'itr/virjii lu 
 
 •owed fr< 
 
 nmsnn'od 
 
 iiion. 
 
 'Hn and tl 
 
 icy \vcr(^ 
 
 (our eld 
 
 , lUOil.Vlu'ofl, /,■ 
 
 fianaimnq must not 
 
 iivii 
 
 ni the Kwakiwtl, Tl 
 
 P 'n the sky. The Sk 
 
 ^v/iom thoj fnli f > 
 
 partake of 
 
 fl/F,>, f (() i^- 
 
 I IS. 
 
 tht 
 
 n'» mic scrni t 
 
 ariy food 
 
 I'lnsncVotl 
 
 rrcat deity, Jf, 
 
 <> ooiiHider tl 
 
 'c .yreat 
 
 <''' I 'rot her), 
 
 '^■y pray to 
 
 . give us 
 
 '"ltd the 
 
 e \; 
 
 '^ g'-f'id nand 
 
 a,l.s,, ,..i||,,,| () 
 
 er( r. 
 
 Ih I 
 
 a 1 
 
 ^ri 
 
52 
 
 RETORT — 1889. 
 
 Slafi'lEk'am. All these tribes believe that the touch or the seeing of 
 ghosts brings sickness and death. 
 
 The Kutona'qa liave a distinct snn-worsliip. They pray and sacrifice 
 to < he sun. Before beginning tlieir cnuiicil thoy put toljacco info it ))ipe 
 and offer it three times fo the sun, liolding np the pjipe-stern to it. This 
 ceremony is called inisifhi-atJalc'O'ni' ( =malcing the sun smoke). Then tlio 
 pipe is turned round f hree times horizontally, a smuke being thus ollbrcd 
 to the four j)oints of the compass. They make ho()[)S of twigs, and 
 everyone ties to his a ])art of what ho desires to have. A horse's hiiir 
 indicates that horses are wished for. The hoop is hung to a tree as an 
 offering to the sun. Before war expeditions, and to Avard olf disaster, 
 tl'oy celebrate a great festival, in which the first joint of a finger is cut 
 oir as an offering to the sun. It is then hnng to a iroe. They also 
 pierce their flesh on arms and breast with awls, cut off tin; y)iece they 
 have thus lifted and ofler it to the sun. The first-born child is saci'i- 
 ficed to him. Tiie mother prays, ' I am with child. When it is born I 
 shall offer it to yon. Have pity upon us.' Thus they expected to S'^cure 
 hcplth and good fortune for their families. These customs evidently 
 correspond t j the similar customs of the Blackfeet, ahhough my in- 
 formant maintained that the so-called snn-dance was never held by the 
 KntoTiaqa. In winter a large dancing (' medicine ') lodge is built for 
 dancing and praying purposes. Then they pray for snow in order to 
 easily obtain game. 
 
 The dead go to the puti. One of the important features of their 
 religion is the belief that all the dead will return at a future time. This 
 event is expected to take place at Lake Pend Oreille. Therefore all 
 Kutonaqa tribes used to assemble there from time to tnne to await the 
 dead. On their journey they danced every night around a fire, gcin- in 
 the direction of the sun. Only those who were at war with any tribe 
 or family danced the opposite way. The festival at the lake, which lasted 
 many days, and consisted principally of dances, was celebrated only at 
 rare intervals. 
 
 Shamanism and Secret Societies. 
 
 In the preceding account of the religious ideas of the Indinns of 
 British Columbia I have not mentiimed shamanism, which forms a most 
 important ])art of their religions and which is closely connected with all 
 their customs. All nature is !uiimated, and the spirit of any being 
 can become the genius of a man, who thus acquires supernatural 
 powers. These spirits arc called Yek by the Tlingit : they are flu; 
 Ni:qno'q of the Tsinishian. It is a remarkable fact that this acquiring 
 of supernatural ])o\vers is designated by the Tsinishian, Bilqula, and 
 Nntka by a Kwakiutl word (Tlnk'oala), which in these instances, how- 
 ever, is restricted to the higlu^st degrees of supernatural power. This 
 proves that the ideas of the Kwilkintl exercised a great influence ovev 
 those of the neighbouring peoples, and for this reason I shall begin witli 
 a description of shamain'sm among the Kwakiutl. 
 
 The secrets of shamanism are confided to a number of secret societies 
 which are closely connecled with the clans of the ti'ihes. Tlius the art 
 of the ' medicine man ' (of the shaman proper) is dei-ived from Ibiiali- 
 Icyawe, the ancestor of the gens of that name. The secrets of others 
 are obtained by initiatior,. I faiknl to reach a fully satisfactory 
 
ns of 
 
 lUOSl 
 
 t,l. all 
 be ins 
 ,tural 
 llie 
 luviii!^ 
 , iuul 
 liow- 
 This 
 h ovi'i- 
 vsitli 
 
 Incties 
 
 ho art 
 
 llaiali- 
 
 jtlieirt 
 
 hctorv 
 
 rj 
 
 ON THE NOUlir-WKSTEUN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 53 
 
 
 > 
 
 ttnderstajuliii;^ of this subject, which ofTors one of tlio most interesting 
 • )iit at the samo time most difficult problems of Nortli-'>Ve->t Americau 
 etliiiolo^'y. The crest of a clan and the insignia of the secret societies 
 are ac(|uired in the samo way. They are obtained by marriage. If a 
 man wants to obtain a certain carving, or the membership of a secret 
 society, he must marry the daiighter of a man who is in possession of this 
 carving or '.vho is a raomber of the secret f^ociety ; but this can be done 
 only by consent of the whole tribe, who must declare the candidate 
 worthy of becoming a member of this society or of acquiring that crest. 
 Notwithstanding this fact, the iniui who is thus entitled to become a 
 member of the secret society must be initiated. 
 
 The insignia of all these societies are made of the bark of cedar, 
 carefully prepared, and dyed red by means of maple bark. It may 
 be said that the seci'ets are vested in these ornaments of red cedar bark, 
 and wherever these ornaments are found on the north-west coast secret 
 societies occur. I do not hesitate to say tliat this custom must have 
 originated among the Kwakiutl, as it is principally developed among 
 them, and as the other tribes whenever they have su(,'h societies designate 
 them with Kwilkiutl names. Historical traditions are in accord with 
 this view. 
 
 I will not attempt in this place to describe all the secret societies and 
 their insignia, my knowledge of them being still deficient, and an amply 
 illustrated article iiaving appeared in tlie ' Interinitionales Arehiv fiir 
 Ethnologic.' I shall describe, however, the general character of these 
 societies and some of the most im[)ortant among them. 
 
 The secret societies are allowed to meet and to perform their danc(;s 
 and ceremonies only in winter. The time of the year when they meet is 
 called by most tribes TVa'ek'a, or Tsetsa'eka ( = the secrets). The follow- 
 ing facts were observed among the Kwakiutl. During the Tsa'ek'a season 
 the whole tribe is divided into a number of groups which form secret 
 societies. Among tlie Kwakiutl I observed some group-, the ])rincipal 
 of -which is called the Me'emqoat (=tho seals). It erabmees the secret 
 societies, principally the lla'mats'a and the Nutlematl. Besides these the 
 masks of the crane, Ila'maa, grizzly bear, and several othei-s belung to 
 this group. Among the other groups I mention the following : • 
 
 2. K'o'k'oski'mo, who ore formed by the old men. 
 
 3. JMaa'mq'euok ( = the killers, Velpli. urea), the young men. 
 
 4. JMo'smos ( = the dams), the married women. 
 
 5. Ka'k'ao ( = the partridges), the nnmarrled girls. 
 
 G. He'mclk* ( = those who eat continually), the old chiefs. 
 7. Kcki'cp'Uak" ( = the crows), the children. 
 
 Evei'y .t of these groups has its separate feasts, in which no member 
 of another group is allowed to take part; but before beginning their feast 
 they must send a dish of food to the Ha'mats'a. At the l)eginiiing of 
 llie feast the chief of the group — for instance, of the K'a'k'ao — will say, 
 
 l)artridges always have something nice to eat,' and the 
 
 Ml 
 
 all 
 
 j)eep 
 
 like partridges. All these groups try to ollend the ^rc'emc^oat, ami every 
 one of these is ofl'endoil by a particular action or object. The grizzly 
 hoar nnisk must not be shown any red colour, his preference being black. 
 The Nutlematl and crane do not like to hear a nose mentioned, as theirs 
 are very long. Sometimes the former ti-y to induce men to mention 
 their noses, and then t!iey burn and snuish whatever thcv can lay their 
 
sas 
 
 nan 
 
 54 
 
 UEPOUT — i8sy. 
 
 liands on ; e.(j. a Nutleuritl blackens Iiis nose; tlicn tbo pcoplo will say: 
 ' Oil, your head is black ; ' but it' anybody should happen to say, ' What 
 is the matter with your nose '^ ' the Nutlmatl would take olFenoe. Some- 
 times they cut off' the prows of canoes because of their resemblance to 
 noses. Tlie Nutlematl must be as filthy as possibh;. 
 
 Sometimes a chief will give a feast to which all these groups are 
 invited. Then nobody is allowed to eat before the lla'mats'a Imis eaten, 
 and if he should decline to accept the food offered him, the feast must 
 not take place. After he has once bitten men he is not allowed to take 
 part in leasts. 
 
 The chief's wife mur.t make a brief speech l^efore the meal is served. 
 She has to sny, ' I thank you for coming. Be merry aiul eat and drink.' 
 If she should make a mistake, deviating from the formula, she has to 
 give another feast. 
 
 From these brief notes it will be seen that the winter festivals, besides 
 tlieir religious tharacter, ai"0 events of social interest in which merry- 
 making and feasting ibrm a prominent feature. The same has bteii 
 observed among numerous American ti-ibes. 
 
 Among the seciret societies forming the group of the ^fe'emqoat tuo 
 ila'mats'a is by far the most important. The lla'mats'a is initiated by 
 one of thiee spirits : Jiaqbakualanosi'uae, Baqljaknfi'latle, Ha'maa or the 
 human-headed crane. The ceremonies of initiation are as follows: Jn 
 winter the inhabitants of the village assemble every night and sing four 
 songs, accompanying the dji.nce of the novice, who is accompaiued by ten 
 companions called Sa'latlila, who carry rattles. When the dance is at 
 an end they leave the house where the festival is celebrated, always sur- 
 rounding the novice ; they go all around the village, visiting every hou.se. 
 All of a sudden the novice disappears, and his companions say that be 
 has flown away. Then his A'oice is heard in the woods, and everybody 
 knows that he is now with the spiiits. There he stays fri m one to five 
 month-', and the people believe that during this time he wanders all over 
 the world. At the end of this term his voice is again heard in the woods. 
 Hinls are heard whistling on all sides of the village, and then the Indians 
 prepare to meet the new lla'mats'a. The sound of the birds' voices is 
 produced by means of whistles, which are blown by the new Ha'mats'a 
 and by those who were initiated at former occasions, but they are kept a 
 profound .'^eeret from all those who are not initiated. 
 
 The father of the young Ha'mats'a invites the inhabitants of the village 
 to a feast. The guests sit down in the rear of tlie house, everyone caiTying 
 a stick for beating time. Two watchmen, each carrying a rattle in shape 
 of a skull, stand on each side of the door, and are occasionally relieved. 
 A chief stands in the centi'e of the house, two messengers attending him. 
 These he despatches to the wonu'ii of the gens of which the new Ha'mats'a 
 is a member, and they are oi-dered to dance. The interval until the 
 women are dressed up and make their appearance is filled with railleries 
 between the messengers. As soon as the watchmen see a woman coming 
 they begin swinging their rattles, and then the guests begin singing and 
 beating time with their sticks. The woman enters the house, and, turning 
 to the rigl:t, uoes siround the tire until she arrives in the rear part of the 
 house, riien the guests stop singing and beating time until the dance 
 l)egius. Jn dancing the woman lirst faces the singers; tlien she turns to 
 the left, to the lire, and to the right, and, finally, faci'S th(> singers again. 
 She leaves the house by going along the left siile of the fire. When the 
 
 • 
 
ON THE NORTII-WESTEILN TCIDES OF CANADA. 
 
 55 
 
 feast is almost at an end, a terrible noise is lieard on the roof of the 
 liousc, whei'e the new lia'uiats'a is daneinj^ and \vlii.>tlin^''. Sometimes 
 he throws the l)oards forming the roof aside and thi'usts his arms into 
 the house. Then he disappears again, and his whistles are heard in the 
 \\oods. 
 
 His father requests the men to assemble early in the morninfj, and 
 tliey set out to meet the younif Hfi'mats'a in the woods. They take a 
 loii^ rope made of cedar bark, and, having arrived at an open place in the 
 forest, lay it on the ground in form of a square. They then sit down 
 inside the square, all along the rope, which represents t'.ie phU form of 
 the house, and sing four new songs composed for the purpose. The two 
 lirst ones are in a quick binary measure, the third is in a live-part 
 measure, and the last has a slow movement. One man dances in the 
 centre of the square. Meanwhile the mother of the new lla'mats'a invites 
 the W(imen and the old men to a feast, which is celebrated in the house. 
 All the men are piiiuted black ; the wometi red. The latter wear button- 
 blankets, head-rings of cedar bark dyed red, and their hair is strewn with 
 eagle-down. The men who are in the forest wear head. rings and necklets 
 of hemlock branches. While they are singing and dancing tlie new 
 JIamats'a makes his appearance. He looks pale and haggard, and his 
 hair falls out readily. He wears three neck-rings, a head-riug, and 
 arui-rings made of hemlock branches, but no shirt and no blanket. He 
 is immediately surrounded by his companion-f, and the men return to the 
 village singing the new songs. When the women hea.r them a[>[)roaching 
 they come out of the house and expect them on the street, tlancin^. 
 They wish to please the new Ha'mats'a, for whosoaver excites his anger 
 is at once atta(!ked by him. lie seizes his arm and bites a snnUl piece of 
 flesh out of it. It is said that in fact this is done with a shar[), bent 
 knife, but I doubt whether this is true. At the end of the Tsa'ek'a season 
 the lla'mats'a must compensate every single person whom he has bitten 
 with a blanket or two. In the evening the people assemble in the house 
 of the Ilri'mats'a's father for singing and diincing. If anything shonld 
 displease the Ha'mafa'a, he rushes out of the house and soon returns 
 carrying a corpse. His companions continue to suri'ound him in all his 
 movements. He enters the house and, turning to the right, goes around 
 the tire until he arrives in the rear of the house. As soon as the old 
 lla'mats'a see the corpse thjy make a rush at it, and fight with each 
 other for the flesh. They break the skull and devour the brains, and 
 smash the bones to get at the marrow. The companions cut large slices 
 from the body, and put them into the mouth of the joung lla'mats'a, 
 who bolts them. At the end of this ceremony the father of the young 
 lla'mats'a presents cvi'r^yone with bracelets of copper. 
 
 The new Ha'mats'a dances four nights — twice with rings of hemlock 
 branches, twice with rings of dyed cedar bark. Strips of cedar bark are 
 tied into the hair, which is covered with eagle-down. His face is painted 
 hiack ; he wears three neck-rings of cedar bark, arranged in a peculiar 
 way, and eatli of a sejiarate design. Strips of cedar bark are tied around 
 his wrists and ankles. He dances in a squatting position, his arras 
 extended to one side, as though he were carrying a cor[)se. His hands are 
 trembling continually. First he extends his arms to the left; then ho 
 jumps to the right, at the same time moving his arms to the right. His 
 'syes ai'e staring, his lips protruding voluptuously. 
 
 The Inilians are said to prepare the corpses by laying them into tha 
 
 I 
 
li 
 
 Ir 
 
 ! ': 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 56 
 
 RliPORT — 1889. 
 
 8oa and covering tbom wilh stones. The (^'atlo'ltq, who also practise the 
 Ua'mats'a dances, make artitieial corpses by sewing dried halibut to the 
 bones of a skeleton and covering its skull with a scalp. 
 
 The new Ila'mats'a is not allowed to liave intercourse with anybody, 
 but must stay for a whole year in his rooms. He must not work until 
 the end of the following dancing season. The Ha'mats'a must use a 
 kettle, spoon, and dish of his own for four months after the dancing 
 season is at an end ; then these are thrown away and he is allowed to eat 
 with the other people. Dui'ing the time of the winter dance a pole, called 
 hil' iiiypiq, is erected in the house where the Ua'mats'a lives, it is covered 
 with red cedar bark, and made so that it can turn round. 
 
 Another secret society is called Ma'mak''a (from tnak'qa', to throw). 
 The initiation is exactly like that of the Ha'mats'a. The man or woman 
 who is to l)ecome Ma'mak''a disappears in the woods and stays for seveial 
 months with !Mri'mak*'a, the genius of this group, who gives him a magi(! 
 staff and a small mask. The staff is made of a wooden tube and a stick 
 that tits into it, the whole being covered with cloth. In dancing the 
 Ma' mak" 'a carries this stall; between the palms of his hands, which he holds 
 pressed against each other, moving his ai-ms up and down like a swim- 
 mer. 'J'hen he opens his hands, separating the palms, and his stall' is seen 
 to grow and to decrease in size. AVhen the time has conie for the new 
 Ma,'mak''a to return from the woods, the inhabitatits of the village go in 
 search of him. They sit down in a square formed by a ro[)e, aiid sing four 
 new songs. Then the new jMa'mak-'a appears, adorned with hemlock 
 branches. Wliile the Ila'mats'a is given ten companions, the Maraalc'a 
 has none. The same ni'j;ht he dances for the first time. If he does not 
 like one of tlie songs, he shakes his staff, and immediately the spectators 
 cover their heads Avith their blankets. Then ho whirls his staff, which 
 sti'ikes one of the spectators, who at once begins to bleed profusely. Then 
 Ma')nak''a is reconciled by a new song, and lie pulls out his staff from the 
 stricken man's body. lie must pay the latter two blankets for this per- 
 formance, which, of course, is agreed upon beforehand. 
 
 This may suflice as a description of the secret societies. The dance of 
 the Ma'mak''a .shows the idea of the natives regarding the origin of 
 sickness. It is the universal notion of an object having entered the body 
 of the sick man ; by its removal he is restored to health. The ]\Iri'mak"'a 
 and the ordinary medicine man have the power of finding such objects 
 and of removing them by means of sucking or pulling them out with 
 carved instruments, by the help of the noise of rattles' and incantations. 
 Among the objects thrown into the bo ly to cause sickness, (luartz is coii- 
 sidered one of the most dangerous. Sickness is also produced by the 
 st>ul leaving the body. The shaman is able to find it and to restore it. 
 Hcsides the Mri'iiiak-'a, the descendants of Ilaialikyawe and those initiated 
 in his mysteries are considered the most powerful medicine men. Magic 
 power can also be acquired by a visit to the fabulous mountain Ts'ilky- 
 nnipae, the feather mountain, on which the magic eagle-down and the 
 quat'tz which enables the possessor to fly are foniul. 
 
 The Tsimshian have four secret societies, which have evidently been 
 boi'rowcd from the Kwakiutl — the Olala or AVihalait, No'ntlem, 
 Me'itla, and SKmlialait. The words Olala, No'ntleiu ( = mad), and Aleitla 
 have been bori'owed from the Kwakiud. AVihalait means the great dance ; 
 Si:mlialait, the ordinary dam^e. Tlu! Olala corres|)onds to the Ha'mats'a 
 iif the Kwakiutl ; the No'ntleni to tlu^ Nutlmatl. The Olala is (or rather 
 
ON THE NC11T1I-"\YESTERN TiaUE.S OF CANADA. 
 
 •I? 
 
 was) a profog'ativc of tlic Gyitqa'Lla and Gyispac|1;Vots, wIhi oMiiiried 
 lliem l)v intei'iiiarriat,'e with the iiortlicrn Kwakiutl trihi'S. There t-iists 
 a ti'fiditidii atncmnc tho IViriiKhiau roferriiig to the l"ahuh)iis origin ol' thv'so 
 societies by the initiation of a man ; bat it is evident that this leo-end has 
 been invented in analogy to others of a similar chai-aeter. Iiistori(!al 
 traditions, and the fact that the Olala is confined to the southern Tsiiu- 
 shian tribes, prove that they are of foreign origin. 
 
 A man who is not a member of a secret society is a ' common man.' 
 ][e becomes a middle-class man after the first initiation, and attains 
 higher rank by repeated initiations. The novice disnppears in the same way 
 as among the Kwakiutl. It is supposed that he goes to heaven. During 
 the dancing senson a feast is given, and while the won-.en are dancing 
 the novice is suddenly said to have disappeared. If he is a child ho 
 stays away four days; youths remain absent si.x daj-s, and grown-iip 
 persons several months. Chiefs are supposed to stay in heaven during 
 the fall and the entire winter. When this period has elapsed they 
 suddenly reappear on the beach, carried by an artilicially-niade monster 
 belonging to their crest. Then all the mendjers of \hv. secret society to 
 which the novice is to belong gather and walk down in grand procession 
 to the beach to fetch the child. At this time the child's parents bring 
 presents, particularly elk-skins, strung upon a rope as long as the })fo- 
 cession, to be given at a subsequent feast. The i)eople surround the 
 novice and lead him into every house in order to show that he has 
 returned. Then he is taken to the house of his parents and a bunch of 
 cedar bark is fastened over the door, to show that the place is tabooed, and 
 nobodv is allowed to enter. The chief sings while it is being fastened. 
 In the afternoon the sacred house is ]n'epai'ed for the dance. A section 
 in the rear of the house is divided off by means of curtains ; it is to serve 
 as a stage, on which the dancers and the novice appear. When all is 
 ready, messengers, carrying large carved batons, are sent round to invite 
 the members of the society, the chief first. The women sit down in one 
 row, nicely dressed up in button-blankets, and their faces painted I'cd. 
 The chief wears the Amhalait — a carving rising from the forehead, .set 
 with seadion barbs, and with a long drapery of ermine-skins — theother.s, 
 the cedar-bark rings of the society. Then the women begin to dance. 
 After a while a ]irominent man rises to deliver a speech. 11(^ says : ' All 
 of you know that our novice t\'ent up to heaven. There he made a nn's- 
 takt;, and has been returned. Now you will sec him.' Then he begins the 
 song, the curtain is drawn, and ma.sked dancers are seen surrounding the 
 novice, and I'epi'esenting the spirits he has encountered in heaven. At the 
 same time eagle-down is blovvTi into the aii-. The novice has a pair of 
 clappers between his lir.gers, and for every now iiutiation he receives an 
 additional clapper. After the dance is over, the presents which were 
 strung on tlie rope ai'o distributed anumg the nu'mbers of the secret 
 society. 
 
 Tlie novice has a beautifully-])ainted r()oni .;et apart for his use. Ho 
 has to remain naked during the dancing season. ILc must not look into 
 the fire, must abstain from food and drink, a'jd is oily allowed to moisten 
 his lips occasionally. He has to wear his head-ring continually. After 
 the ceremonies are all gone through, the festival of 'clothing the 
 novice' is celebrated. He sits in his room quietly singing wliile the 
 people assend)le ''r. the house. His song- is heard to grow louder and 
 louder, and at last he makes his appearance. He has put oil' his ring of 
 
 ' 1 
 
58 
 
 HEroRT— 1889. 
 
 r^ i 
 
 collar bark. Then the poo[)le try to throw a bear-skin over liim, whieH 
 tliey succeed in dtiirijr only after a severe struggle. At this feast i\ll 
 societies take part, each sitting grouped together. The coninioii people 
 stand at tlie door. This ends the initiation ceremonies. 
 
 The festival of ' clothing ' is also celebrated by the Kwakiutl, when 
 it seems to indicate the enil of the trance of the novice. 
 
 The initiation is repeatedly celebrated, the rank of the person being 
 the higher the more frequently he has gone through tlie ceremonies. But 
 nobody, chiefs excepted, can be a member of moi'e than one secret society. 
 It seems that the iSKudialait are considered a preparatory step for tlio 
 initiation into other societies, so that every ])erson mnst have been 
 .Sk mhalait before he can beeome Aleitla, Nontlem, or Olala. A Meitla, 
 however, can never beeotne Nontlem or Olala. Those who passed twice 
 through the Scmhalait ceremony are called Ts'e'ik. The IMeitla have a 
 red liead-ring and red eagle-down.s, the Nontlem a neck-ring jdaited of 
 white and red ced ir l)ark, the Olala a similar but far larger one. The 
 members of the societies reccnve a head-ring for each time they pass 
 through these ceremonies. These are fastened one on top of the other. 
 Tlie Nontlem destroy everything, carry firebrands, and tear live dogs to 
 pieces, which they devour. They correspond exactly to the Nfitlniatland 
 Nontsistatl of the Kwakiutl. 
 
 The [secret societies have'eo connection whatever with the gentea. 
 Generally the father determines to what society each chiUl is to belong, 
 and has them initiated by proxy, so that they may belong to the middle 
 class from childhood. 
 
 The Haida borrowed these customs from the Tsimsliian, and some- 
 times perform the Meitla and Olala dances ; but the Tsimshian maintain 
 that they have no right to do so. Their dance, corresponding to the 
 Si;mhalait of the Tsimshian, is that of the shaman, the Sk'aga, the initia- 
 tion being identical with that of the Tsimshian SKmhalait. The Sk'aga 
 has a number of head-rings, one on to[> of the other, corresponding to 
 the number of ceremonies he went throui-li. 
 
 Tlie shamans proper of theTlingit, Haida, and Tsimshian are initiated 
 by a spirit after long fasting. Those of the Tlingit and Haida acqnire 
 their knowledge of the mysteries of shamanism by tearing out the tongues 
 of an otter, an eagle, and several other animals. In doing so they must 
 nse a bumlle of twigs strung together with spruce roots for catching the 
 filood that flows from the animal's tongue. Those twigs which have not 
 come into contact with the blooil are taken out. Sometimes a piece or 
 the whole of the tongue is wrapped in those bundles, and, in cases of 
 great emergency, worn by the shaman round the neck to endow him 
 with great [lOwer over spirits (see 'Journal Amer. Folk-Lore,' i. p. 218). 
 The dignity seems to be hereditary. They wear long hair, which must 
 never be touched with the hands, and is therefore extremely filthy and 
 matted. They wear a necklace set with bone ornaments, a long curved 
 jiiecc of bone in the septum of tlio nose, a bird's head on the breast, a 
 rattle, and a carved stall'. Their art consists in extracting the sickness or 
 in finding and restoring the soul of the sick person. In trying to find it 
 three or four shamans sing and rattle over the sick person until they 
 declare to have found the whereabouts of his soul, which is supposed to 
 be in possession of the salmon or olashen, or in that of the deceased 
 shaman. Then they go to the place where it is supposed to be and by 
 singing and incantations obtain possession of it and cnclo.se it in a hollow 
 
^?m 
 
 ON TlIK NORTII-WESTEUN TUIDES oF CANADA. 
 
 .VJ 
 
 a- 
 
 ga 
 
 to 
 
 the 
 lot 
 or 
 of 
 lim 
 8). 
 nsfc 
 utl 
 fd 
 t, a 
 or 
 I it 
 liev 
 to 
 Isecl 
 
 carvLHl l)oiie. 'ilicn rnoniitaln-proat tallow, rcil ])alnt, ca^Io. down, and 
 o'licr valuablo ohjt'cts aio l)iiriit, and the soul lifld over the tire. Tlio 
 Ixine is tiien laid noon tlio sick man's head, tlio sliainan saving, ' Hero is 
 U)ur soul. Now jou will he better and eat af,Min,' Sonietinie.s the soul 
 is supposed to he held hy a sliarnan, who is paid i'or retui'iiing it. 
 
 A supposed soreerer is tied up and starveil until a confession i.s made, 
 when he is driven into the sea to expel the evil spirit. Should he rei'uso 
 to confess ho is either starved to death or placed on shore at the limit of 
 low tide, and, being hound, is drowned when the water rises. Sci'cery is 
 jirnctised principally by means of parts of tlu; body of the person to 
 whom the sorcerer wishes to do hiii-m. If it is believed that a man died 
 in consecpienceof hiing bewitched, the I'simshian take the heart from the 
 body and put a red- hot stone into it. They wish at the same time that 
 the enemy should die. If the heart hurst their wish is expected to be 
 fuHilled ; if not, it is a sign that their suspicions were unfounded. 
 
 The shamans of the Coast Salish go into the woods in order to bo 
 initiated. Tliey swim in ponds and wash their bodies with cedar branches, 
 and thus prei)are themselves to meet the spirits and the fabulous double- 
 headed smike who giv'e them their supernatural powers. They cause sick- 
 ness by making hits of quartz and wood fly into the body of their adver- 
 sary, and heal the sick by removing these objects. To show their power 
 they perform dances in certain festivals in which they pretend to cut 
 their bodies with knives; the blood is seen to flow from the wounds; 
 hut when thev move their hands over them no trace of the cuts is to be 
 seen. At the burial, food is burnt for the dead on the beach. On this 
 occasion the shaman throws presents for the dead into the lire on l)ehalf 
 of the mourners. He then affirms that he sees the deceased person's 
 spirit, who speaks to him. In the winter dances each shaman wears the 
 painting or the mask of the spirit who initiated him. 
 
 The shamans of the Kutoiui'([a are also initiated in the woods after 
 long fasting. They cure sick j)eople, and pro])hesy the result of hunting 
 and war parties. If this is to he done, the shaman ties a rope arouriu ins 
 waist and goes into the medicine-lodge, where he is covered with an elk- 
 skin. After a short while he ap[)ears, iiis thumbs Hrmly tied to'retlicr by 
 a Icnot which is very ditlicult to open. He re-enters tiie lodge, and after 
 a short time reappears, his thumbs being untied. After he has bivn tied 
 a second time he is put into a blanket, which is tirmly tied together like a 
 bag. The line which i.-i tied around his waist, and to which his thumbs 
 nvo fastened, may be seen pixitruding from the phi'jo wdiere the blanket is 
 tied together. Before he is tied uj), a piece of hone is placed between his 
 tues. Then the num pull at the protruding end of the rope, which gives 
 way; the blanket is removed and the shaman is seen to lie under it. Tliis 
 jicrformance is called k^'equKmnri'm (= somebody cut in two). Tli'i 
 shaman remains silent, and re-enters the hidge, in wliich rattles made of 
 ]ii( ces of hone are heard. Suddenly somelhing is heard fiiUing down, 
 riii'ee times this noise is repeated, and then singing is heaiil in the lodge- 
 It is supposed that the shaman has invoked souls of certain people wdiom 
 lie wished to see, and that their arrival produced the noise. From these 
 he obtains the information ami instructions which he later on communi- 
 cates to the people. 
 
 I 
 
 low 
 
GO 
 
 liF.rouT — 1889. 
 
 LINGUISTICS. . 
 
 1. Tlincjit. 
 Vhtained/foin Mrs, Vinr, Victoria, a natirc of the tStik'Jn trihr. 
 
 PHONETICS. 
 
 Vowch : a, 
 Consonants : 
 
 u. 
 
 c, K, 1, o, 
 
 a, t ; gy, ky ; p, k, k' ; p', k- ; w, r. q, Q ; 
 h. It, y; II ; s, c ; ilz, ts ; dj, tc ; dl, ll. 
 
 Tli(! liiliials iiro ; bseiit. Tlic^ dillVTence lietwccii surds iind sojiunts is very sli;,'lit. 
 i I'ukI in my lists ii {^reiit niiiubiT oi.' casi-s in wiiicli for tlie i-jiiiic sound Imtli surds 
 and soniuits are used proniistuiously. The dil'f'creiicu is so slif^lit tliat I um inclined 
 to tinink tin' lan,<rua;^e lias onl}' surd-sonants, which we appcrccive by the means of 
 <uir surds and sruiants, and tiiat they are for this reason consichued two sound;. Tlie 
 I" is a very deej) ^■ulturai, the inc^uth as-suuiiuLC at the same time thi^ position i'or juo- 
 iiouncinp »•, tiie lips only Ix'in;.'; a iiltle further apart. The uvula vil^ratcs very lit le, 
 and thus it happens that tlu! souud is very mui^ii alike n\ In many eases, particu- 
 larly when preeedini,' w, it is very diftieult to distin^'uish both sounds. There seems 
 to be a dz .and <fj, the sonants corresjiondinp to ts and te; but as in n\\ instances I 
 was just as much inclined to \vrite the hitter, I have mostly ajijilied the latt(!r form. 
 'J'he hiatus is very ficniu-nt, and occurs after all consiuiants. No ecuuliinatioiis of 
 consonnnls occur in tiu' be^L,diiiiintj of the word, I'xci'pt dl ami //, follnwt'(l by a gut- 
 tural, and perhaps .v followed by the same. All letters can he inii ial ami terminal 
 'ounds. I I'oumi the i'oUowiuor terminal combinations of consonants : 
 
 qk 
 nk 
 nk 
 ck 
 tk 
 tlk 
 
 nq 
 
 ks 
 ks 
 
 kc 
 
 no 
 
 kts 
 
 
 kt 
 
 ktl 
 
 
 k*t 
 
 k'tl 
 
 <ltc 
 
 qt 
 
 
 ntc 
 
 
 ntl 
 
 sto 
 
 
 tctl 
 
 tlk- 
 
 Sonants occur very rarely at the end of words, but this may be accounted for by 
 ihc indelinite eharact(;r of these soimds. Combinations of consonants arc very rare. 
 ! do not attemitt to ^;ive a list, as it is in uiany instances doubtful whether the word 
 ts really a single word or a compound. 
 
 GRAMMATICAL NOTES. 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 The Tlingit lanj^funpo has no grammatical sex uvai no separate forms bu' sinfrular 
 and plural. As Weiniaminov states that there is a jilural, 1 have made frequent 
 attempts to find it, but my search has b<.>en in vain, and I agree with Krause, who 
 t-tates that there is no separate form for the plural. In two or three instances I 
 found the terminal vowel of nouns repeated, the word expressing at the same time a 
 plural ; but 1 have reason to believe that this repetition has merely eujihonic reasons, 
 as it is also finmd in other e'ases, and as tlu; jilural of the same word has fre(|Ui;ntly 
 the same form iis il>e sing\dar : t/fio and ///*, noses. Wemiaminov mentions the 
 plural Tc/:', stoi>es (singular fr), but I Iind in my collection </ry fV, two stones, if 
 it is necessary or desirable to state txpre-ssly that the plural is meant Jr toq, a nuinhvi- 
 of- -, is j'laced after tlie noun. It seems to me probable that this is the plural re- 
 ferred to by Wemianunov and spelled — khth. I have not found any indication of 
 the existence of eases, not even of tiic instrumentalis mentioniMl by Wemiaminov. 
 
 Compound nouiis are ot very frccjuent occurrence, tJie coui[ionenls being placed 
 side by side : 
 
 Cf7 qiV ini, hair = head hair. Drlnjl no, name of an island = far from 
 
 /.'•'(« foliil, ankle = leg knuckle. the corst, rock. 
 
 ,si;',sy/ rz'.Nv", mast =^>ail tree. ifio s'a't-c, tuief -steal nuister. 
 
 /.s'(//.'' .vrf, necklace = bone necklace. gids re lii'tli, (Jallinago Wilsoni = cloud 
 
 /.■// fon't', titmouse=miui heart. place bird. 
 
tilt! 
 If 
 
 iiiiucr 
 I'iil re- 
 ion ot: 
 ov. 
 
 roui 
 
 O.V THE NORTII-WKSTIIKN TIUBKS OF CANAHA. 
 
 61 
 
 Local ailvoilw onivr froqiitMitly into coinpnund words of tliis kind : 
 
 ifz'rirtf// krt, pipe = smoko around box. gan tin dn gTi'^D, \vf)odpct^ker -tn;e-oiit- 
 to uq rln't, wlii!stle = into blow iustru- sidi^ jiick. 
 
 nicnt. /.''''•'■ t'i'li'r, ii'iclc -^above ico. 
 
 (til Ira ii'iijH Arnica cordifolia- town /i.'7//////y /•« (/^"',a^Kora = liro-liki" wimiIht 
 
 on uioiliciri(\ Colour. 
 
 dill liiira hiilji't, horse-- back upon h'ni dr tcinii't, Anaa bosi^'lias = nioviny 
 
 sit. atraiglit up. 
 
 The naiiii's of colours arc compound words : 
 
 Iran iji'qiii?, n.'d i= firc-liki" colour. Ilrd iiiqufr, whitc — snow-likf co1(jui'. 
 
 kiti lia'tJr yi/jiirP, yellow = doy duny; colour. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Tlin adjective follows the sulvstantive to wldcli it belongs, except when it hu'^ u 
 verbal nu'aniii'r : 
 
 (j//a dni'i't, oar = long paddle. 
 tli'ilf r'ldz?, reed = wide grass. 
 Tiit tfPii, large bouse. 
 
 tcltl iji'd,; dried halibut. 
 vilf ciir,''', half fathom. 
 fiPtl (jv/tiiluK young dog. 
 
 When the adjective stands for our adjective with the vorbum substantivum, it 
 generally precedes the substantive : 
 
 a tlin hit, that i.s a large house. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 Cardinal Ncmhrrs. 
 
 1, flrk-\ 
 
 2, drq. 
 
 3, nntah'. 
 
 4, d.iJr'o'n. 
 r>, hrdjin. 
 
 ('), tlr diirrn'. 
 
 7, daqa ditrcii'. 
 
 8, miti^l'a ditrcit' . 
 t), (lo'c'it. 
 
 10, djiuhftt. 
 
 11, djiuhftt ka tick*. 
 20, tie k-a. 
 
 HO, natxk djinJiiTt. 
 40, diik-' ii'n djiahVf. 
 
 no, I'piijiii djiiiiiiVt. 
 
 <)0, tir diirru' dj'inh'i'f. 
 
 70, daqa di/rrit' djinlal't. 
 
 80, natKlia ihiri'ii' djinJul't, 
 
 00, qo'eulr djinhVt. 
 
 100, 'l-rdjiii lin. 
 
 200, dji'nhiTt Ivtl. 
 
 300, iiiitifh djinhl't Jnl. 
 
 400, dak' o'n djinku't kil. 
 
 Four is evidently the second two, five a derivative from djin, hand, whih' tlio 
 nuniber.s from tj to 8 are the other one, two, three. Ten .seems to mean both hands ; 
 20 is one man; 100, live men; while the numbers from 30 to DO mean three, fom-, 
 five, kc. tens. 
 
 In counting men the following numerals are used : 
 
 4 men dftk''dnc' nrq Ira. 
 (3 men lirdjinr.' ni-.q kd. 
 () men tic diircu' ni:q kd. 
 
 1 man tlP ni-:q 7,ri7. 
 
 2 men di:q ni-q kd. 
 
 3 men vafshijP nrq kd. 
 
 The same numerals may be used in counting dogs. 
 
 Ordinal Ni^MnKng. 
 
 The followirg ordinal numbers dilTer to some extent from tho.se given by 
 Wemiaminov, and appe^ir in parts doubtful : 
 
 culm', the fir.st. 
 ■i'ta, tlie second. 
 fara(dr'a), ih- thad. 
 anira{d''a), the fouifh. 
 
 traqkara(dP'a), \hc fifth. 
 flP dinTi/ra(dP'a), the sixth. 
 daqa diircura{di'c.), the seventh. 
 7iat.slM tliirci(ra(d'a), the eiglith. 
 
 So far as i was able to discover, the cardinal numbers are gencrady used in place 
 if the ordinal numbers. 
 
 ,■•;,! 
 
 H 
 
 ! 1 
 
 ,1; 
 
 
asHraeas 
 
 m 
 
 02 
 
 unroiiT — 1S80. 
 
 NUMKUAI. AliVKIlItS. 
 
 Tlicso !ir • ftinucil liv ;i(Miii'_'- tlic siidix -ilahr'n to tlui canlinul iititnbers, 
 
 tJ'iliih'ii, once. ;////.s'^' ihthi'n, tlirce times. 
 
 (liiUdahi'ii, twico. dak'on dahrii, fuur times. 
 
 DlSTIMI'.ITIVK Nl .MliKKS. 
 
 Till' ciinliiiiil iiiuiil)t:i-saro at the .s:iino tinioilistriliiitivcs. IcollfCtod tiie fullovviiii,' 
 cxiiiiiiilcs : 
 
 ilr Ivn iiKii Mild llr in://, one to each. iiattdiyi'' imq, throe to each. 
 
 r//:c/ «/■;'/, two to cac-h. 
 
 It will 1k! oljscrvcfl that, in this instance that form of numeral is used wliii'h 
 denotes a numiier of men. it is iiroh.abli! that when other substantives are rel'errc'd 
 to the other numerals take their iilace. 
 
 THE nioxouN 
 
 Pr.llHIDNAI, I'IKINOI'N. 
 
 There are two forms of the jiersonal ]ironoiin, which may ho dosij^natod thi! 
 ordinary and the aeleetivc forms. The dilTerenco of these forms will best bo inadi' 
 clear by jxivini,' examiile.i : To the question, Who is there 1 I answer, qat (D, which is 
 the ordifiary form; while to the ([uesiion, Who amonj,'all of you will help me ? ! 
 answer, ijatc (1). 
 
 Hesides these we find two forms of the personal i)ronoiin whii'li are used in tin 
 inllexion of the verb: one in inllectini,' the transitive, the other in infiectinfi: the in- 
 transitive verb, the latter beint: at the same time the object of the transitive 
 pronoun. This makes it prt)bable that the intransitive verb is really imi)ersonal. 
 
 Singular, 1st person 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 :?rd 
 Plural, 1st „ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd 
 
 Ordinary 
 
 Selective 
 
 qat 
 
 woe' 
 
 hu 
 
 oha'n 
 
 riwa'ii 
 
 has 
 
 qatc 
 
 woe'tc 
 
 hotc 
 
 ohfi'ntc 
 
 riwa'ntc 
 
 haste 
 
 Intransitive 
 
 Trnn.sitivc 
 
 Subjective 
 
 qat 
 
 qa (q) 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 — 
 
 (a) 
 
 ha 
 
 to 
 
 rl 
 
 rl 
 
 has 
 
 has (a) 
 
 The transitive and intransitive forms must not be considered prefixes, as they are 
 not inseparable from the verb. 
 
 Demonstrative Pkonoun. 
 
 Krause and Weniiaminov give the demonstrative pronouns : yataf, this ; and tintaf, 
 that. Krause states that the adjective form is ya and _y?^ J have no example of 
 this kind in my list. There exists a demonstrative word a, which is very extensively 
 used. 
 
 a tCiy something inside. a// ari ayv. ? is that mine / 
 
 a Urn hit, that large house. hit a tJ'ii a, that is a large house. 
 
 The following are evidently derivatives from the same demonstrative stem : 
 
 aq ari aim, that is mine. hit y'li'tajd asia', that is a small house. 
 
 i hiti attia, that is your house. 
 
 Note. — The demonstrative ivr is found twice in my coUoc ion : 
 
 irfitc (jilt irii ,sv )irq, that man savetl mo. 
 
 wP atqa' qat f7 )irh\ that food me makes sick. 
 
 Note.- -The personal and possessive^ pronouns, third person, are sometimes used 
 with the termination -tit, denoting that the person isat a distance, and thus reci'ive 
 a demonstrative meaning : 
 
 tnilt iiri nun, it is iiis, or that man's. hnatH, they Cat a ilista'iee). 
 

 OV TIIK NOfmi-WJk^TKKN TRIIIMS OK CAN.vr A. 
 
 rosSESSIVK I'UONOI'N 
 
 (13 
 
 Tlio possfissivo j)rnnnuii Ikh two forms, wliidi -iro <lrrivo(l fnun the porn trial pio- 
 nomi. The fi>llo\vui^' fcjiiii is nui.st fretiuciii ly found; it pnutdL's tin- noun to wliiuli 
 it bcloni,'s : 
 
 I'iiinil. 1-f person, \'a. 
 ,f -n<l „ n. 
 t, '{rd „ liii.sto. 
 
 Sin,i,Milar, 1st person, ni[, 
 „ L'nd „ 1. 
 „ :ird „ tn. 
 
 While in this form tlie noun in nat altrrcd, in tlic follo\vii\^' it tivkcs tho 
 .s\iirix -ri : 
 
 Singular, 1st person, aq -ri. I'lural, 1st [K'rson, ha — ri. 
 
 „ 2nd „ 1- ri. „ I'nd „ M-ri. 
 
 „ Hrd „ to— ri. „ ;{rd ,, liasto-ri. 
 
 I am nf)t abh? to n'wc- any rule, as to the nsn of these forms. Tlie Hubstantivo 
 possessive pronoun is formeil hy the demonstrative /f and the siTond po.ssessive form : 
 III/ II ri, mine ( = my tluit). 
 
 N'oTK.— Tlie suilix -/'i is Hometimcs contracted witli the tcruiinal somul of the 
 noun : 
 
 aq hiti, my house ; instead of mi hit —ri. 
 
 are 
 
 It (if, 
 e oE 
 ,ely 
 
 
 '1V(! 
 
 THE VERI!. 
 
 Ill fliscussinp th'^ pronoun wo stated that there are two forms, (<n(> for the transi- 
 tive, the other for tli(^ intransitive verb, tlie latter beim.'' identical uitji tin. ohjeetivi^ 
 Ci'se of the transiti\-e ))ronoun. This mal<es it |)roliahle that tlie intninsilive verb 
 may be impersonal, a theory which is the more probable onaecvumt of the remarkable 
 parliciles u.sed with iliese verbs. In Tlin^,nt all verbs arc transitive which express an 
 activity, even in oases in which we do not use an object; all verbs ex[iressinir a state 
 an; intransitiv<>, and for this reasim our passive is rendered in tlu; saine wav, Fol- 
 1. wing is a list uf transitive aud intransitive verbs in the lirst person singular : 
 
 Intransitive Vkrih. 
 
 , , I 
 
 qaf VK nr¥, I am sick. 
 qnt TV. fa inr/r hii\ I am sleepy, 
 qat wii di qui-' 1 1, I anj tired. 
 qat ran tnva hn', I am hungry. 
 
 //lit fli f.i'ii, f am strong. 
 
 fjfirt ini nPq, I reccjver from sickness, 
 
 1 am saved. 
 qat katvan-E'tl, I break down. 
 
 In another group of sucli verbs tlie pronoun is placed after the stem. 
 
 'J'lifii/if i/fit, I am a Tlingit. icil'ii qat, I am poor. 
 
 aiiku'o qat, 1 am rich. g'icu qat, 1 desire. 
 
 TUANSITIVK VeHBS. 
 
 at qa qa, I eat (it). 
 
 qa aqtc, I bear. 
 
 qa d/i'ni, I dream, 
 
 qa tl'i'q, I dance. 
 
 qa el, I sing. 
 
 qa tin, I see. 
 
 qa tit, I sU'cp. 
 
 k-\ln qa i/.if), I am angry. 
 
 qa tfii, I carry. 
 
 yiiq'a qa trii, I speak. 
 
 at qa Kilr' , I cook. 
 
 qn tana', I drink, 
 
 qa tlilt', I open my eyes. 
 
 at qa vo'nlr, I lau^^h. 
 
 qa CI' f/o/,', I know to 
 
 qii i/i'it, I walk. 
 qa t'iqt, I pound. 
 
 The verb, more es]iocially the intraiisiiive verb, appears frequently combituvl witli 
 certain particles, the meaning and origin of which I cannot explain. Kiirmer students 
 of the Tlingit language failed to .separate these particles from the words with which 
 they are connect(^d. Therefore the greater number of words of W'emiaminov's as 
 well as of other, lists are really compounds. I give lir.st an alphabetic l' t of these 
 particles. Jn those cases in which they may be omitted I have placed them in 
 brackets. 
 
 <IP 
 
 i/r qat ran inva lia, I am growing hungry. 
 
 dc ifu di qur'tl, 1 am growing tired. 
 
 [df'] ra kf na r'li, it ii- growing to be daylig'it. 
 
■'r *.i 
 
 (it 
 
 KEro;tT — 1SS!>, 
 
 lii 
 
 1,-ri a fVi'ir, it is wot. 
 
 Iru tU ijntx, it is cloudy. 
 
 dr \_(lf] hi: )}'(! ti\ it is <layli,o;ht. 
 
 \(l? \ r'l i^i-tr' udcfK? dill you .see them 7 
 
 d? Ifnli fiatrn, I shall leave. 
 
 d? qat ri kPu''//, you have saved me ! 
 
 dP qa findr'n, I have ^one. 
 
 f/a'cn d' (jii i/ud, I wish to go. 
 
 d? TKii (it (jixt qa, I h;ivc oiiteri. 
 
 dr nq taiiii', I iiave drunl<. 
 
 /,■)! ha ir/if, tall. /,'// ditff, heavy 
 
 hii ivatl, small. hii fhi, stout. 
 
 hit .''eerns to imply a reforciice to personal appearance. 
 /,■•(/, weather, out-of-doors : 
 
 ^■(7 sid't, it is cold. 
 
 k'u re ta, it is warm. 
 
 k'l'i u'li qiilr, it is dry. 
 
 tfti/d'ts, horizon, pri)".)ably helongs to this group. 
 
 h'aiijiiqlfrnvatP', aurora; tire lilce out-of-doors colour. 
 
 r«, TK 'I TE nrk\ you are sick. rw k'P, pool. 
 
 /ill TK nP'i/rni, we were sick. tk si'i', a short t imc ayn. 
 
 qat VE til HH'u ha, I am sleepy. tk dF.tl, heavy. 
 
 It is doubtful whethei' the following are derived from the same root : 
 
 at I rn, qa, you have eaten. to ra aqtc, we know. 
 
 na na tlP, far 
 
 ftPtl InjP qat ini na t/ifc'n, I am growing weak. 
 
 dP ra liP na Pii, it is growing to be d;iyliglit. 
 
 kin ra ric na fPn, the water begins to 1)0 warm. " 
 
 kin ra na x'i:t, the water begins to be cold. 
 
 aq (1) Ic {'!) na (:!) nfi'nPJr* (1), if (4) my (1) father (2) should die (:i\ 
 
 Iru na tP'nnPk-\ if lie should leave. 
 
 From these examples it would soera that na designates tlie conmienoeuicnt of a 
 certain state. 
 
 qat It'll ti qnP'tl, 1 am tired. nui ti tl'rk-, it is wet. 
 
 yiq ctiiq ti HPk\ I feel .'-ick (y/i/ = like). 
 
 ma 
 
 imi 
 
 a Im iva qats, clear sky. n'a quir, dry. 
 
 iva UK ku datl? is it heavy ? a ra ka wa dan, it is snowing. 
 
 JrP iva a, it is daylight. 
 
 n-n iiPk', ho (absent) is sick. 
 tli'tl qat trii nPk\ I am not sick. 
 flPtl. qat inir/yi:', I am bad. 
 tl'fl n-n di:tl, light (not heavy) 
 tiPtI ivH tli tup', easy. 
 
 tlPtl ivu q ei-jjid:, \ cannot 
 
 tlPqitl qat wii nek'.'' Am i not 
 
 sick .' 
 (;/iitI qat wu nPk', may be I am 
 
 [■•icli. 
 
 qat irii )iPk\ lam growing sick. 
 ri'tnV wn nPk', I just got siel:. 
 qat IVU tlitsP'n, I ain growing 
 
 strong. 
 qat v'u nvq, I recover from sit'k 
 
 ness, I atn saved. 
 qat n-u ti quP'tl, I am tired. 
 VH tli qiin, thin. 
 •iru na, dead. 
 
 d,7i/ nui .Hfanan, it was raining. 
 kas )vu tPi sPtP'n, we see iheui. 
 
 / u'li tli tsPngK ? arc you strong 1 
 
 In the great majority of cases in which ivu ' . used the state (or action ?) expressed 
 by the verb is still incomplete, not yet or not loii'Tor existing, or existing at a distance 
 Thus it would appear that the particle «•« denotes the 'no; actually being.' It seems 
 doubtful whether the wu of tiie last example can bo classed with the rest. It is 
 remarkable that this particle appears very freciuontly combined with others, especially 
 so with ti and til. 
 
 yS j/P q KinP, T have done it. 
 
 ,/akn i/P sal,' ku waf, Johv. is tall (John is bone-hmg). 
 i/P q it ■<'(//.■■ /''/ ivinl, I am small (I am bone-short). 
 y" I/;// /,'// till', I :!n stout. 
 
;in<-C- 
 
 .•,1.; 
 
 sick. 
 
 k. 
 
 rowiivj; 
 
 m sick- 
 l. 
 
 niip;. 
 cm. 
 
 ;ei 
 
 q)ro.«; 
 lUslJinci'. 
 lllsc-eiiis 
 
 It. It i' 
 
 ije 
 
 ON TIIH NOUTII-WESTKUN TRIBES OF CANADA, 
 
 af/a j/r //(lo, I put it on top of 
 
 ?•« k'e yc l-a, he is a good iniin. 
 til tscn j/r Ira, lie is a stron,'? man. 
 
 65 
 
 It may be that tins is a n-rhinn mthsfiitb'um ; at least it seems possihlc to class all 
 tlie examples given here in such a way. 
 
 til 
 
 ill (In, goorl-natured. 
 til h<rii, strong. 
 ku tU ijuta, cloudy. 
 til wutt, strong (rojic). 
 
 tn ^r, difticult. 
 
 ck-'ti(/ tl7 >tr!i\ I pretend to he sick. 
 clrdq qa fliqa, 1 pretend to cut. 
 tl7 ts'a, later on. 
 
 )i'u tli qvn thin. 
 
 To these particles might he added one wliich freqneritly, .iltliough not regularly, 
 precedes tlie future tense, and hi some instances also the past. 
 
 l/ilT) hyr qat Iriik ra «'"/.', I shall be sick. 
 
 tU'fl li/T- qnt /I'll 'in t'i turn, I am growing weak. 
 tlriiltl Inj? qat Ifuk tru n?h\ am 1 not going to be sick? 
 tlrfl ki/? qiif )ru 7trk't(\ I have not been sick. 
 tlrgitl kyr iiik'tct')) ? have you not been sick ? 
 
 The following I found only in one single instance : 
 
 dag si'tv'n, it is raining. dag mu n^nnrn, it was raining. 
 
 a tvii (lily yanP'/i, the sun was shining. 
 
 Tknses. 
 Weminminov states that there arc six tenses: present, imperfect, perfect, plus- 
 iinaTT.i.crfect, future, futiirum exactum. J[y corections contain only the present, 
 pa.--t (imiierfect), and future tenses, whicli T give here in paradigmatic form : 
 
 '«»"/.•', ,sick. 
 
 Singular, 1st person 
 2nd „ 
 „ Jhd „ 
 
 Plural, 1 st 
 
 2ud „ 
 3rd „ 
 
 Present Tense 
 
 qat ri: nek' 
 I ri-: nek's A' 
 rii nek' 
 ha TK nek' 
 ri YK nek' 
 has rA' nek' 
 
 Iniperfct't 
 
 Future 
 
 qat (r;-) ne'gun 
 i (rK) nr-'gvin/csK 
 (yk) ne'gun 
 ha (r/:) ne'grtn 
 ri (rw) ne'gun 
 has (r/:) ne'gun 
 
 (kye) (j:ii kiig" r;-; I'l k' 
 (kye) i k'ug- r;-,' nek' 
 (kye) k'ug- r;.' m'k' 
 (kye) ha k'ug rt: nek' 
 (kye) ri k'ug- yk i\i:k' 
 kye has k-ug* tk nek' 
 
 In inflecting the transitive' verb, the jironoun is pl.'iced immediately bofon- the 
 vwh. In many instances the verb has an imlednite object. ,/,', which i-' piaceil bcl'iu'i> 
 tlie subject: at qa qa, I eat (it); at qa el, I sing (it); at qa s/ir', I cook Cii). In 
 compound verbs which cunsist of a stem denoting the action or state, and attributes 
 limiting the action as to manner, ])1ace, or time, the subject is placed between these 
 two parts, and thus an apparent inlixion originates : 
 
 xk-\i (1) qa (2) da (:5) AvV/.' (i), I smoke = mnulh (1) I (2) aro nd Ci) smoke (IV 
 ka (1) qa (2) flqi-:ktl (:?), 1 rub with pestle = upon (1) I (2) re" (I!). 
 td(\) qa (2) iiq (H), I (2) blow (:}) into (1). 
 
 The following forms nuist be explained in the same way, alih nuh I atii inu able 
 tn translate the elements of these words. The place of the prc^noun is iudjcatcd liy 
 a dash : 
 
 k-^ant -^va tnik, angry (k-'an, angry). 
 yr — .sinP, to do (,s/, to make). 
 yvq'a--tK)l, to speak. 
 a- iVlq, to dance. 
 
 k'an-~ra!), cross (k-'a/i, angry). 
 su -.rrfi-'n, to think of ~- . 
 a — djfin, to dream. 
 
 .\s a ru.e, the object is ])laced before the suljject, but when the object is a pro. 
 noun and has a separates objective form the secpiencM^ may be reversed, /ia.s, the 
 iMrd peison ])lural of the pci'sonal pionomi, always precedes the ol jcct ; therefore 
 it seems probable liiid it is an attribute to the pronoun, limiting i1 to the plural li 
 
 
 ■M 
 
n ' f" 
 
 ! £ f; 
 
 66 
 
 RETORT— 1889. 
 
 also precodes the first part of compound verbs : has td vq, they blow into. Following 
 is a paradignmtic table of the transitive verb iu the present tense: 
 
 sete'n, to see. 
 
 OI)jcct 
 
 Subject, Sinnulnr 
 
 Ipt Person 
 
 2nd Person 
 
 Srd Person 
 
 Singular, 1st person 
 2nd „ 
 .■5nl „ 
 
 I'liiral 1st „ 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 ,, :5rd „ 
 
 I qa sete'n 
 qoa sete'n 
 
 rl qa sete'n 
 lias qoa sete'n 
 
 qat rl sete'n 
 
 r! sete'n 
 ha ri sete'n 
 
 has ri sete'n 
 
 qat wn s{"tr''n 
 
 1 WU Srt("'n 
 
 ac wn sete'n 
 ha WU sete'n 
 ri WU setf^n 
 hole WU sete'n 
 
 Object 
 
 Subject, Phiral 
 
 Ist Person 
 
 2n(l Person 
 
 3rd Person 
 
 Siii>,'nlar, 1st pc 
 2nd 
 ;{rd 
 
 Plural, 1st 
 2nd 
 
 :ird 
 
 rson 
 
 S WU tu sete'n 
 WU tu sete'n 
 
 rl WU In sete'n 
 has WU tu setr'n 
 
 qat rirl sete'n 
 
 rirl sete'n 
 ha riri sete'n 
 
 has rirl sete'n 
 
 has (|at WU se'e'n 
 lias i WU sete'n 
 has ae wu sr't("'n 
 has lia WU sOte'n ' 
 has ri wu sete'n | 
 
 • When the objeet is a substantive it precedes the subject : 
 
 hhi qa tana', I drink water. hin a tana', he drinks water. 
 
 Note.— In a great number of cases the first person singular of the transitive verb is 
 qoa instead of qa. I am not (luite certain how this form originates, but it seems to 
 be a contraction of qa jvu or of qa n-a. It would seem that Die third pi'i-son-suhjcct 
 as well as object — takes this particle, and this would explain the qmi in qoa srtr'n, 
 he sees him. In certain cases it is evidently contracted from qa ra.iiH in the per- 
 fect. I am, however, far from being able to explain the rules regulating the use of 
 qoa and qa. 
 
 at qoa qa, I have eaten (from at qara 
 
 qa). 
 qoa si'ti'i'n, I see him. 
 qoa sctP nPn, I have seen it once. 
 
 qo.i a'qPn, I have heard it once, occa- 
 sionally. 
 
 'lectath-u qua a'q?n,l have heard of 
 j-our father (somebody spoke of 
 him). 
 
 dli k-u<f qoa gud, I am going to go. 
 
 at qa qa, I am eating. 
 
 qa tP'nPn, I have seen it frequently. 
 
 qa illtP'n, I look at it. 
 
 qa a'qtccn, I have heard it often, I 
 
 know it. 
 I c'ctat qa a'qtcPn, I have heard of 
 
 your father (he is widely known). 
 
 qat kuff' qa god, I (emphatically) am 
 going to go. 
 
 at k'vg' qoa qa, I shall eat. 
 
 7m tlt'rP dp tug- qoa tP», I am going 
 
 far away. 
 k-'a>it qoa mik, I am angry. 
 
 The character of tlie past is— gun, -g-Pn, or -P», according to the terminal sound of 
 the verb. The tense formed by this sullix corresponds to both our imperfect iuid 
 perfect : 
 
 f qa sete'n-Pn, I saw you ju.st now. 
 
 {dP) qa god-r'n, I went. 
 
 qoa a'q-Pn, I heard it (mice, occasionally). 
 
 qa a'qic-Pn, I have heard it (frequently). 
 
 I niiP' //on s'tP'n-rti, 1 liino muui ynur country (on^.e). 
 
 Sir 
 
"IfMsiafflJiSBS 
 
 ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 67 
 
 Mr'n, 
 usc of 
 
 leanl of 
 lown). 
 
 ally) aui 
 
 ponnc! of 
 
 7 rt?i<"' (/« trn'-Pii, I have seen your country (often). 
 fiin qn tann'-g-cn, 1 was drinking (water), 
 ffrrt k'nva flan-r'n a'sr, it lias been snowing. 
 d(l(j nut .sttl'n-i'n, it has been raining. 
 a )vii dot/ gaii-c'n, the sun was sliining. 
 
 Besides this, I found the following perfect forms ; 
 
 ijntc y? qa shir', I hav^ done it. 
 (di' rtiti) tif qim qn, I have eaten, 
 {dc) qti tantV , I have drunli. 
 
 To eat, perfect. 
 
 Singular, 1st person, at qoa qa. 
 „ 2nd „ at l rti qa. 
 
 ,, 3rd „ at tvu ra qa. 
 
 Plural, 1st person, af >nt to ra t/a. 
 „ 2nd ,, at ii't ra tpt. 
 „ 3rd „ haa at tvu ra- iiti. 
 
 It seems ;.;at this form agrees with Wemiaminov's perfect tense. It must be 
 stated that in many instances the imperfect characteristic is dropped, and that iliiis 
 a form originates which is identical with the present teuse. The inllexiun of «*//cr, 
 to know, is of interest regarding this point, 
 
 Singular, 1st person, qd aqte. Plural, 1st person, to ra aqte. 
 
 „ 2nd „ t ra tiqtc. „ 2nd „ irl ra aqte. 
 
 „ 3rd „ a ra aqtc. „ 3rd „ has a ra aqtc. 
 
 This shows tliat the verb is evidently the perfect, I have heard, and ra appears to 
 be the particle expressing a completed action (see p. 61). 
 
 The future tense is characterised by k'ug-, which is placed between tlie object and 
 the subject. 
 
 at k-iig- qa taiiti', I am going to drink. 
 (qat) tug- qa god, I shall go. 
 k'ltf,' qoa aq,I shall hear it, 
 arc hug- ra d'ln, it is going to snow. 
 re a Intg- dag g<7n, the sun is going to 
 shine. 
 
 yr Iftig- qoa sitii', I shall do it. 
 (</r) kng- qoa god, I shall go. 
 Jiiig- (joa ten, I siudl leave. 
 dag Irvg' st'td'n, it is going to rain. 
 
 To eat, future. 
 
 Singular, 1st person, at k-ug- qa qa' 
 „ 2nd „ at It-ag- 1 qa (gi:). 
 
 3rd „ at Irvg- qa (gK). 
 
 Plural, 1st person, at k itg- to qa (gi:). 
 „ 2nd „ at l-itg- rt qn (gi:). 
 „ 3rd ,, has tit k-itg- a iia. 
 
 me 
 
 you 
 
 hira 
 
 us 
 
 you 
 
 them 
 
 I shall see. 
 
 {re) I k-'qoa sHe'n. 
 {re) k'qa sl-tc'n. 
 
 {re) rl Jr'qoa s'ti-'n. 
 {re) has k-'qitasPti-'ii. 
 
 To see, future. 
 
 You will ,sec. 
 {re) qat h tig- rl st'tP'n. 
 
 {re) k' rl sPtr'n. 
 (rt-) ha k' r'i sctij'n. 
 
 (rr) has tag- rl scti'n. 
 
 It seems that hnig- is sometimes abbreviated, and in other instances asssumos the 
 form kitg-. The initial rP is not necessary for forming the plural. Kyc (seep. (Jij) 
 is very frequently used in connection with future f.Tms. 
 
 INTEHROGATIVE. 
 
 The interrogative is formed by the particle agi-, which is attached to the verb, but 
 in case the latter is accompanied by an adverb it follows the latter. 
 
 Intransitive Vkhb. 
 
 To le dcJc, pre.-;ent. 
 
 Singular, 1st person, qat ra nek' ags? Plural, 1st j-erson, ha ra nek' agt:? 
 
 „ 2nd „ rl ra nPk' agy. ? 
 .. 3rd „ has ra nPk' ayi-: .' 
 
 K 1 
 
 2nd 
 3rd 
 
 7 ra nPk' agis ? 
 ra uPh' (ti/ti ? 
 
6.ft 
 
 REPonT— 188(1. 
 
 H 
 
 Imperfect. 
 qat nv'gvn agn ? was I sick? &c. 
 
 Future, 
 (kyff) qat h-vg- ra nu7i^ agii? am I going to be sick 7 
 
 Transitive Verb. 
 
 qnt r'l Mt?'n agn '.' do yon see me ? 
 Ti »(tl'n agr-iji) 1 do you sec him ? 
 
 ha r\ uPtr'n ngi: ? do you see us ? 
 has ri »Hc'it agi: 1 do you see them ? 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 (dP) qat rl sctene'n ags ? did you see rae ? 
 
 dv Ti i-rfrii?'n agv.? or rl sPtinP' ii agF.x ? did you see liim ? 
 
 ha r'l sPtPnP'ii agp. ? did you see us ? 
 
 Here arc a few instances in wiiicli agv. follows the adverb : 
 
 aPrc'iih agp. rl ha hvg- r'l sPtP'ii? will you sec; us to-moiro\v7 
 tKtgp.' agE rl .iPiP'n ? did you see liiui yesterday 1 
 Also : aq hitl ogn' rv. k't:' Y is my house all right 7 
 
 In interrogative sentences aghz stands for our rerhum siih.itantirtim (see p. G9). 
 
 aq arl agE ? is that mine ? aq hit> agK ? is that my house ? 
 
 In order to emphasise the question, it ma.v be repeated in the beginning of the 
 sentence : 
 
 agE aq hit! agE ? is that my house 7 
 
 After an interrogative pronoun the interrogative particle is not used : 
 tdsc I djnnPn ? what did you dream 7 
 
 Imperative. 
 I found two forms of imperative ; one formed by the suffix -dE, the other by ha: 
 
 •ds : at qadr.' ! eat 1 
 
 at Irl qadv.' ! oat ! (plural) 
 ka : k-a sPiP'n I look here I 
 
 a kaq sPtv'n ! let him look 1 
 
 cendE' ! get up I 
 
 qat ha sTitPi'n! look at me I 
 
 h-a liPfP'n ! look at him 1 
 
 ha h'a uPtP'n ! lofik at us ! 
 
 haii h'a KpfP'n ! look at tlicm I 
 
 qat a kaq tiPfP'iii let hiai l(/)k at me 1 
 
 rl h-a til tlifp'n ! let us look at you ' 
 
 a dP h'a xia'q ! listen now I 
 
 at ka to qa ! lot us cat 1 
 
 ye ka x'lnP' ! do it 1 
 ka snPq ! save iiiml 
 qat ka snPq 1 save me ! 
 
 Both forms are in some instances combined : 
 
 at ka gadE' 1 let him eat i at ka t gadE' 1 let us eat I 
 
 The following forms are doubtful : 
 
 siiqs'et'E'n 1 think of it ! h/lt'etlk'5'n I look here ! 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 The rondition.il has the suffix -vrk'. It will be seen from the following example:* 
 that the verbs frerjucntly take the particle na in this mood. This agrees well with 
 our supposition that the latter denotes the commencement of a state. 
 
 ddg sPtannPh', tl'fl ha dP hug- tra god, if it rains, I shall nnt come. 
 aqdag gannPk-\ ha dP k-iig- wa gPid, if the sun shines, f shall come. 
 gE nPknPk\ tlPtl a kvg- atlP'<j, if he is sick, I shall not dance. 
 qat gEnPknPk\ if I am sick, .... 
 
 qat ran haiiPk', if I am hungry 
 
 i qa sPte'n»Pk\ if I see you 
 
 tr 1 qon .sPtP' nnPk\ \i I do not see j'ou, .... 
 
 tV qua xetc'nnPk', if I do not see him, .... 
 
 to nth' k ' no tP'nPk\ every tiiiie I see you, .... 
 
-i^fPT"^ 
 
 ON THE NORTII-WESTEUN TRIBE3 OF CANADA. 
 
 69 
 
 u^o I 
 
 11 witli 
 
 The foUuwing aro const riiciud with na ; 
 
 aq ic na tu'i' n?lt ', tlitl a k in/- (itlrq, if my father dies, I shall not dance. 
 kuiiatr'n>ii'k\(iq tiiru Injclrug- wii nek*, if he leaves, luy mind will be sick„ 
 kuiutr'nnrk\ if you should leave. 
 
 tl' {\) aq{2) '<:'(:$) no ivu /la (i), rx/iOii katlrqv'n (^5), H (i) niy (2) father (15) 
 were not (I) dead (4), 1 should dance (;">). 
 
 Negative. 
 
 The negative is formed by tlPfl, not. The negative has always the particle )vu. 
 
 tU'tl qui n'lt w'A"', I am not sick. 
 
 tlctl qat ii'tt ncguii, I have not been sick. 
 
 In the interrogative negative the interrogative particle follows the negative, and 
 both are contracted into tlpgitl : 
 
 tlrifttl qat n'li mk' ? am I not sick ? 
 
 tlvgltl hjZ qat kuig- >vu 7H-k' ? am I not going to be sick ? 
 
 Impeuative Negative. 
 
 tlotlat i qak' I don't eat 1 tlrtl at rl qat I don't eat 1 (plural) 
 
 tlctl at to qak- I let us not eat I 
 
 Deiuvatives. 
 
 Undoubtedly there exist a considerable number of derivatives in Tlingit. It 
 seems ])rol)able that the majority of these derivatives arcformedby meaiisof jiarticles. 
 I shall first give a few examples of the use of these particles, and the change they 
 ctVect in the meaning of the verb : 
 
 TK nrk\ he (present) is sick. tk (h:fl,henvy. 
 
 n-ti /Irk', he (absent) is sick ; he is growing sick. tlrtl ini diitl, not heavy, 
 
 (^(■■E)(7."'ff qa til »Pk', I pretend to be sick, ku dKtl, heavy (referring to man). 
 ck\i qa tl'i qa, I pretend to eat. 
 
 The following seem to be derivatives in the proper meaning of that term : 
 
 so- ten, to look ; srtP'n, to see, 
 
 aq, to lu'ar ; sra'q, to listen. 
 
 til- tin, to see; qa tUtr'ii, I look at it. 
 
 'to aq, to hear; uqtc, to know. 
 
 nrh\ sick ; nrk'tc, to be sick a long time. 
 
 There are some sentences that seem to indicate the existence of a dubitativc 
 formed by means of the interrogative particle : 
 
 gutl (1) Ts'otsQE'n (2) agK (3) inn:' (4), may be (1, 3) you (1) are a Tsimsliian (2) ; 
 but the same may be expressed s' mply witli gutl : 
 
 qutl (1) 'JVdfsQK'n (2) n'ov:' (;?), may be (1) you (3) are a Tsimshiau (2). 
 'gutl {I) qat (2) n-ii nrk (3), may be (1) I (2) am sick (3). 
 
 The passive seems 1o be formed by means of the particle wu and the stem: 
 
 qat n'u juq, I am saved; but this appears doubtful, as the active form, slnc'q, 
 to save, may be comijoind and mean : to make sa\ed. 
 
 Note.— A circumscriptive inilexion of the verb is very frequent. It is formed 
 liy using tlie word (my, your, his) mind' instead of the pronoun : 
 
 aq torit ;•;■; k'lJ, 1 an; glad- my mind is good. 
 
 aq tarn Kigo at qa, I \'ish to cat = my mind desires to eat. 
 
 VERBUM SunSTANTIVUiM. 
 
 It was mentioned aliove that the particle yc may have the; meaning of the rcrhum 
 guhxtantiri/ni. Undoubtedly the demonstrative a is frequently used in this way : 
 
 /nt a tlrna, that is a large house. 7 hJti asia, that is your houue. 
 
 The independent pronoun stands also for tlie pronoun and rcrbum s>ib)it<uitir,ini : 
 
 qat, it is I. Tlingit wok', yon are a Tlingit. 
 
 i I i 
 
 :i 
 
 U 
 1 
 
 I f ■ 
 
 i- 
 
 i- 
 
70 
 
 nr.roRT — 1889. 
 
 The Adveur. 
 
 Tlic adverb stands mostly at the beginning of tlie sentence : 
 
 yi'irUlEt has rl srfr'n, you see tliera now. 
 
 rKsu' qat >nt nrli\ I just got sick. 
 
 fi:ff/K' (u/k' ri nPffi'n } did you see him yesterday 7 
 
 tilLs'i! (iq Ct'iir. kuif rl sctr'n, later on you will see my country. 
 
 In a ievv cases it stands at the end of the sentence : 
 
 qat (1) k'anickidcq (2) site' (3), I am (1) very (3) poor (2), 
 
 Formation of Words. 
 
 It was mentioned above that compound words are very frequent, and I believe 
 that all words can be reduced to monosyllabic stems. In many cases it is evident 
 tliat the word is a cimiiiound, nltliough we are not able to detonuine the meaning of 
 the elements. Excepting tlie particles referred to above (p. (>\), it seems that the 
 composing elements may occur independently as well as forming part of other words. 
 For instance, r'ul'ti, place fur soniet Ling, occurs both indcijendent ly and as a constituent 
 of numy words : 
 
 Vek'a rid'ti, murtar = pestle place. li-'oa'tl rUVti, bcd = feather place. 
 
 From the same stem are derived the following : 
 
 ya'k'rKrc't. canoe place. 
 
 liaqE'ffuarc't, mortfr = pestle place. 
 
 tuuqsKTr't, whistle = place into which one blows, 
 
 ffiitsir(t), heaven = cloud place. 
 
 (/ail, cti'', fire place. 
 
 tri'Hii'', beach = sand place. 
 
 Jlany adjectives are compounds of tlu{tl), being merely a negation of their 
 opposil e : 
 
 tlvtl )vu el's:, bad, and trivii ck'E, ugly. 
 tletl n-u ilEtl, light. 
 
 Probably also : 
 
 hu iratl, short (see Jju ivat, long). 
 fkSetcn, blind (^tS)i, to see). 
 
 I give finally a collection of sentences : 
 
 haliea qa tana' ! give me to drink I 
 
 a hu qa fli qPfl, 1 am afraid. 
 
 aqa//-a Jraqcriii'f, I paint my face. 
 
 aq ek'' id'rcte qii/i, I am and remain thin. 
 
 at qa qa rlt aq torn tr, I want to cat. 
 
 at qa aijF. 1 torn slyo' ? do you wish to eat ? 
 
 a(i iiiru iCKi'i' at qa, I wish to eat. 
 
 ail ITiru ira sii/n' at qua qa. r'lt, 1 wish to eat. 
 
 tlftl aq torn nut ivit sltjo' qat irii ark', I do not like to be sick. 
 
 giicu do qat n'u tir'qPk', I should like to be well. 
 
 ffdi-ii (voi:') rl i/od (yiia'), I wish you would go. 
 
 ijdca dc qa (jmI, I wish to go. 
 
 gacu' tUiKj'it k\i qa aqto, I wish I understood the Tlingit. 
 
 qa cFi/ilk rdiii/at'K'fc, 1 can swim. 
 
 t/rfl ini qa ci.grdi rdndat'ic'fc, I cannot swim. 
 
 tlctl a. dp at qoa qa rlrP, I cannot eat. 
 
 tciUl liyPtvii qa sl'ijih, I haul in halibut (halibut line I haul in). 
 
 lutlrtp} re qoa //dd, I go to the houses. 
 
 lutlrto n; a nP i/i'n/, Ik? goes to the liouscs. 
 
 tiPfl 7 till iri-Jr qPir ! don"t make it wet I 
 
 VE fli fli:'/r / don't make it wet 1 
 
 (ff'K) ch'\i qa til nPk', 1 pretend to be sick. 
 
 ck'a qa tli qa, I pretend to eat. 
 
 T)i'ritsQi'>iij<' qa fllP'q. [ pretend to hi' a 'I'sinishiai.. 
 
 tlctl wu tlltscii, weak. 
 
 tU-atck, lame. 
 
 tlkotl'aqt, deaf {aq, to hear). 
 
9^ 
 
 ON THE NORTil-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 71 
 
 'IVCtnai:'/! (UjK kU, kc tlctl tlaq^oifchd' , raaybj lie is a Ts'iusliian, but 
 
 I do not know. 
 tlrtl id (/oal'i'i ijftt nPl', I fiar I ara sick (I am not sure I am sick). 
 f/ufl hotc II? (I It'll xiin', inay1i«c lie hasdoiic it. 
 tri' i/f(jii qat ,v n?Ji\ that food makes nic sick. 
 (jat /niKtirij ! kitr' anuifa't ko yek^ ! save me, rainbow I 
 n\ifc qat ?t>u si-m'ij ! It is he who saved me I 
 ara hi nui dan, it is .snowin;?. 
 tjra ka iva i/anPn a\vu it has been snowing. 
 UTO, ktuj- tva (laK, it is goinj^ to snow. 
 tun qat ca cqairii ! no hair is on my head, 
 <?y k'of tali TK nek', ray foot is sore. 
 s^u q- s'ct'ji'n, I think of him. 
 i Ku q s'Pt'K'n, I think of you. 
 ivartc'ii at. to ta qa, wo oat together. 
 c'Ulh'K'tl, stop crying ! 
 
 7viite kiliK't has ta ku-n, they sit opposite each otJier. 
 John es kikn't qaa' , John is opposite to me. 
 n-uftc'n Onka do kaq to u't, we go together to the town. 
 n-ntcP'n anka de skuqk-a d't, they go together to the town. 
 CKila hote yi'i aiiaq si' iw ! let him do it ! 
 
 hln qa TV k'uij- qoa te ! I am going to put you into the water. 
 h'ln qa I tk' qoa tc, 1 put yuur face into the water (1 baptise you). 
 
 It will be seen from these remarks and examples how much remains to be done 
 in this language. It is evident that the grammatical structure cannot be understocjd 
 until the words Iiave been more closely studicMl an<l vvc know the meaning of their 
 cciniiionents and of the particles which are so important hi the ;inllexiou of the verb. 
 Fi'om wliat wu know, it appears that the particles and jironouns are placed bt-tween 
 the com])unents of worrls. I do not think there is a real intixion. 'J'he independence 
 wliich the oomjjonents retain is one of the most remarkable features of this language. 
 
 II. Haida. 
 
 Ohtaincil front 'Wllia, a. native of Skidcgatr, ('J'lk-a ffyitl), and Mrs. FrankHn^ a half- 
 blood Indian, livimj in I'ictoria, 
 
 PHONETICS. 
 K, I, 0, u. 
 
 Py, ky ; g, k, k' ; g-, k- 
 . . h ; w ; s, (dz), ts ; c, dj 
 There is only one labial, in, which does not occur as an initial sound except in a 
 few words which are borrowed from the Tsimshian. The ni is not the pure English 
 «), but closely related to /7, from which it is distinguished with great ditliculty, the 
 lips being not perfectly closed. The ilitTerence between surds and sonants is still 
 slighter than in Tlingit, it being in most cases impossible to deieriiiiue whether a 
 sound is the one or the other. 1 l)elieve a thorough study of thelangii.'jge would show 
 that it would be lU'oper to use only one letter for the <lentalsand one fort lie gutturals, the 
 slight variations of which cause in our ear the sensation of surds and sonants. The r 
 is very guttural, but has more of a trill than in 'J'lingit. Therefore it is easily dis- 
 tinguished from the n\ 'J'he hiatus is very frequent, and occurs afier all consonants. 
 In the beginning of words 1 found the following combinations of consonants : /, df, tl, 
 followed by a guttural, and t, n, followed by // (one instance) ; s followed by any eon- 
 sonant, except s, dz, ts, c, dj, tc. Kegarding the latter, it must be statt.'d that s fre- 
 quently does not belong to the stem; t is followed by h. I found the following con. - 
 binalions of consonants terminating words : 
 
 Vowels : 
 
 
 a, 
 
 (a). 
 
 e, 
 
 Consonan 
 
 ts 
 
 
 d, 
 m, 
 
 t; 
 n 
 
 r, 
 
 tc 
 
 q; Ji, H, y; 
 ; 1, dl, tl. 
 
 sk 
 tsk 
 tk 
 tlk 
 
 sk- 
 
 uq 
 
 ks 
 
 DS 
 
 ndl 
 
 St 
 
 n'l 
 sti 
 
 tlk- In 
 
 All letters can be initial and terminal .sound? 
 hinatioDS of consonants are very rare. 
 
 (Regarding m see above.') T'om- 
 
 f: ! 
 
kiH.i! 
 
 ljlilU'L.11.-. 
 
 'mimmm 
 
 72 
 
 UEPORT — 1889. 
 
 i!5 
 
 GRAMMATICAL NOTES. 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 Till' Flaida latif,mnge lias no grammatical sex, ami no separate forms for singular 
 arifl plural. Wlusn it is nocossary or (lt;siral)lo to state expressly that the plural is 
 nu!ant, kJcoI (a group of) is added wlieu human beings are referred to; k-oa'n in all 
 other cases. The latter nuiy also be ap^ilied to human beings. 
 
 djd'dtd xknl, women. 
 
 Pfl. xliolijii, it is we. 
 
 T>tl i/i/itiiur ahrd yun'ngit, we belong to the eagle gens. 
 
 qu'ct(ia skol i/ila'ii, uiaiiy people ; but also — 
 
 tK^K/l k-fxi'n, beavers. 
 k''rt Ifoa' n, trees. 
 na Iroa/i, houses. 
 qu'cfijii Iroaii i/i'i'iiii, many 
 IHHiple. 
 
 I have not found any indication of ca.ses. Compound nouns are as fre(]uent as 
 they are in the Tlingit language, and they are composed in the same way, the com- 
 ponents being placed sitle by side : 
 
 yifatl iVamiH, ankle = leg knuckle. 
 
 iji/dtl (jjid, dancing leggings = leg ornament. 
 
 tllnjun Ifd'Hla, wood disli. 
 
 TUrd (itjifl, stone beach, name of Skidegate village. 
 
 li-'oiltd Ird'crd, thief -steal master. 
 
 sqd'na dd'tzEh, hat with carving of Delj/hiniis orca. 
 
 'I'iie following examples consist of three components: 
 
 (j'dl Jr'al f/i/d'afk, deer-skin blanket. 
 
 qiVtlE/I i/'di'fidd'ti, ]iipe = mouth smoke box. 
 
 dd'i/id k-d't^P k-'rdd', carved spoon— spoon head figure. 
 
 (/d fa td'n, table = it eat instrument. 
 
 fjocal adverbs are frequently placed l)ctwe(!n the components of tlie word, whicli 
 always retain their independence : m u'ns'c ',-ata' = \\w^ top wltile (name of a bird). 
 
 Tlie names of several colours are evidently composed words : tjo tlratl, blue ; <jnn 
 tlratl, yellow ; dqa tlratl, many-coloured. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The adjective is placed after the substantive to which it belongs : 
 
 (/•(il yd'ho, midnight = night half. 
 dill dzi'nda, oar = long paddle. 
 Id' iia ffs'tso, small town. 
 
 Id'na i/il'dH, large town. 
 
 idti th'dfl, black cloud. 
 
 ta' liija (j\Tija, salt = dry ocean. 
 
 The adjective is rarely used alone ; if it has no noun to which it belongs, {lyiiia, 
 something, is added : 
 
 (jy'nM yadd, something white. 
 
 gjl'nui dd'rdiif/n, something bad. 
 
 t/yhia k-a'lra, something (lifl'erent, another. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 Cahdinal Numbeus. 
 
 1, squn, sqa'ggo, xqod'nsE/1. 
 
 2, nfhJ. 
 
 iJ, dlkii'/iutl. 
 
 4, sUi'/isK/l. 
 
 5, flPtl. 
 
 G, dlhuno'utl. 
 
 7, dzVyiira. 
 
 8, Ufa' nuEnra. 
 
 1», tIdlE/l aqod'usi-.n, 
 
 10, fld'dfl. 
 
 1 1, fld'iifl n'oyr', or sqod' nsBii. 
 L'(), fdyi'sqdd'iiryi). 
 
 30, tld'/I' dlk-u'nutl. 
 
 40, fld'Jj^ sfd'nsEn. 
 
 50, thVlc fle'etl. 
 
 ()0, tfd'lc dlk-xmo'utl. 
 
 70, thVl? dzi'yura. 
 
 80, fld'lP .sfii'nf!i-:/ira. 
 
 i)0, tld'H:- tld'fK/i .iqod'nS£/igd. 
 100, Id'yiia tid'dtl. 
 200, Id'yiia ttf'i/l, 
 iiOO, hl'yud dlku'mifl. 
 !)00, Id'qua fld'lEil sqod' nsEiiyo, 
 1,000, Id'yim thVU: fld'atU. 
 
ON TIIK NOKTH-WESTERN lUinKS OF f'ANAD. 
 
 73 
 
 Kvidi'iUly finir is second two, six the sccoml three, ei^rht tiic secMiul I'niir, luid live; 
 and ten arc also derived from tlio siime stem, perhaps (j*)^/, hanil. i he I'lirniation of 
 I'niir corresponds to that of the sain(! niimher in Tliiijrit (see p. 01). I foiitid no 
 doiihlc f.iriiis of numerals, oxe(!pt for one: sqou'uaj-.ii is the word general 'y "■■^tJd ; 
 xqii'iiiji') is used in counting divisions of time: 
 
 ta'ilii xijd'sijo, oxw year. 
 (/til tiij/i'Ki/ri, t)ne niglit. 
 ,</•;/( Kijii'sijo, one day, also all day long. 
 
 In counting objects classifying words are used very lixteiisively : 
 
 )ia fliri ttthl, two (slee]!) houses. 
 
 tlu'iddn 1/(1 si/dil'/ixJ-:/!, one (,llat) bed. 
 
 tlu'lil'tn H(ja tKiod'usKil, one (frame) bed. 
 
 1rii'ith( ku .sfi/l, two (o]i(mi) dishes. 
 
 tli'i h(i .tt'iii, two (open) canoes. 
 
 tit') i/l .v/7/7, two (/) canoes. 
 
 tlkci '/■('('is Kiio.'i' nxi:n., one (round) stone. 
 
 k'ri xfhl, steamboat, two (ship) steamboats. 
 
 t/k tl'it Hta Ki/iiiTii.ii-:ii, one (?) bow. 
 
 k-'i't >i/ra xi/oil'nur./l, one (long) tree. 
 
 gatatiV n th/ti sqoii' iikkiT, one (with legs) table. 
 
 No such classifying words are used in counting animals and divisions of time. 1 
 am unable to account for the following (h)uble form : 
 
 -., •' ,. - J- two 
 
 men. 
 
 Ordinal Numhisus. 
 The following ordinal numbers seem to me very doubtful : 
 
 ntlahTiiil, the fourth. 
 
 (iPhina'cf, the first. 
 (Jrtltl'a, the second. 
 liltvagd'st, the third. 
 
 Ifuva ijiistliVna, the fifth. 
 
 So far as I was able to discover, the cardinal numbers are generally used in place 
 of ordinal numbers. 
 
 NUiMEiiAii Adverbs. 
 
 The numeral adverbs arc formed by adding the sufiix -(ji-:n to the cardinal 
 numbers. 
 
 S'jod'nisi:/ii/i:n, once. stl'/igiiii, twice. 
 
 I i 
 
 DxSTRll!fTI\ IJ NU.MHKRS. 
 
 These are also expressed by the cardinal nimibers. For ' one ' the form .svy«« is 
 used : 
 
 sqim qauhiTi tia ?sta (fd'yanc, I give one to each. 
 stiri quultt' n tUi r.ffti //ii'i/mu', 1 give two to each. 
 
 TUE riiONOUN. 
 
 Personal Pronoun. 
 
 There are two forms of the personal pronoun exactly alike in character to those 
 found in Tlingit : the former denoting simply the i)erson, the second denoting that 
 the per.son is one among many. In llaida the latter is \Lsed for inflecting the transi- 
 tive verb, the former for inliecting the intransitive verb. The objective case of the 
 pronoun is the same as the intransitive ]ironoun. This would make it probable that 
 tlie intransitive verb is indeed impersonal, if it were not for tlie fact that the same 
 form is used for the ordinary pronoun. 
 
■'M 
 
 74 
 
 REroiiT — 1889. 
 
 PerHonal Pronoun. 
 
 
 Ordinary 
 
 Selective 
 
 fntransitivc 
 
 Triinsitive 
 
 Sulycctive 
 
 1 
 Objective 
 
 dS 
 
 d \:\x 
 
 la 
 
 otl 
 
 diilK'n 
 
 la 
 
 Singular, 1st poison 
 „ 2ii(l 
 
 •'fid „ 
 riiual, l.st. iicrson 
 
 liiid „ 
 
 :ird 
 
 df'a 
 
 dK'na 
 
 la'a 
 
 O'lla 
 
 dalK'figa 
 
 la'a 
 
 tla'a 
 
 (la'a 
 
 la'a 
 
 d'all/nga 
 
 fialK'nga 
 
 la'a 
 
 do 
 
 di'.fi 
 
 la 
 
 etl 
 
 dalK'ii 
 
 la 
 
 tIa, tl 
 (la 
 la, 1 
 
 d'aiiyn 
 
 drdK'n 
 la, 1 
 
 Ndi'I-; I.— 'I'ho (I at tlic cri'^ of tli{> ordinary and select ivc forms is tlio same; « 
 wliieli is atTiX(;d to all words when used indepcnduntly, and also in oilier cases wlitru 
 it seonis to stand merely for reasons of euphony. 
 
 NoTi': 2. - The a at the ord of tla and la, when the subject of transitive verbs, 
 seems to be freciuently dropped, or at least tu be pronounced very indistinctly. 
 
 Dkmonstrative Puonoun. 
 
 There are a number of words which take the place of demonstrative pronouns, 
 which, however, seem to be compounds. 1 have not referred to the list- of an ariicle, 
 as it seems to be really the demonstrative pronoun, it is n or heiI. Here are a few 
 examples : 
 
 n (IjiVoin, a woman. 7(/;;7 q'n'qn, a baby. 
 
 n mn'i'ifti, a shaman. ww/i isijoa'nsi:/l, one man. 
 
 «K/Z v'tlc/lga, a man. 
 
 The last example is suggestive of the origin of this article, which, however, is very 
 seldom used. 
 
 This article, combined with vts, then forms the demonstrative which is most fre- 
 quently used: /(r/'.v, to whicii the terminal a is fnM]uently added : lu-'tKa. To tiiis a 
 prefix ^?, of miknown origin, is frt'fpiently added : aiiv'tm. Tiiese three forms mean 
 * tliis' ; n-a (denoting distance) prefixed makes them ' that.' 
 
 ayirfs naiuni H'IkI, this is his house, it is this man's house. 
 wanTtts luirau e'ts'i, tliis is Ins liouso, it is that man's iiouso. 
 
 We also find niJi, with and without tlie pretix a, used in this sense : 
 a iiKJi t/J'u'ata.s nd'rau c'f.ii, it is this woman's house. 
 
 I find besides this the plural form stlda and astlda, and tska'c for ' these,' wliicli 
 I am unable to explain. 
 
 Note. — The prefix a occurs also in temporal adverbs and with the personal pro- 
 noun, third per.son : 
 
 a-fltitu, some time ago. a-iin-iiTt, now. 
 
 tt'la e tsitigua da khl ? do you see him ? a-da'ryatl, yesterday. 
 
 KoTE. — Tlie use of wa as denoting distance will best be seen from tlie following 
 examples : 
 
 wa ilu'qcn, all (distant). 
 
 wa fid ultid, many people (distant). 
 
 na la c'faiKf/iia da ti/l ? do you see him there ? 
 
 Ka nara thja'i T.'tKhgna da kill'/ do you see m}' land there? 
 
 gylxto wa e't.^Kn ? who is tiuit ? 
 
 ivatcyua ffi/ina r'txingua, da hiw? do you see anything there? 
 
 Ka ml ets tla JriTigaj, I see a house there. 
 
 Possessive PnoyouN. 
 
 The possessive pronoun has various forms, t lie use of whi(di is ver}' difficult to 
 understand. As tlie material which I have collected is not sutlicient for a satisfactory 
 €xplanation of the use of this pronoun, 1 must confine myself to giving e.xamples of 
 the various forms, illustrating their \x&c. 
 
 In 
 
ON THE NORTIl-WESTEKN TIUHES OF CANADA. 
 
 '5 
 
 lowing 
 
 Tlio simplest form of llic possessive promuin is identical with tlic objective form 
 of the persunal pronoun. It precedes tlie substantive, to wliicli is added the siittix 
 rn : 
 
 iSitigular, 1st person, dr—ra. Plural, 1st person, Ttl—ra. 
 
 „ 2rid „ ilin-ra. ,, 2nd ,, dnli A- rn. 
 
 „ 3rd „ l-r(j. „ llrd ,, / — ru, 
 
 (la kuil — ra, my fntlicr. 
 
 In certain compound words tlio elements are not simply pine •<! siilo l>y side, but 
 tiie possessive form is used, correspondinj;^ to oiu' ^'■cnitive. Tliis, however, seems to 
 he the case only when the object is really possessed : 
 
 lH'na I'l'ora, chief = town rrother. dja'ata q't'trn, the woman's father. 
 
 The full form ol' 'he possessive pronoun in indicative sentences is : 
 
 Singular, ist person, r/yrtr.^rw — gnl I'lural, 1st jicrson, rtl ijijiTrn— f/ni 
 
 „ 2nd ,, di-Fi i/i/il'rii—ffai „ 2nd „ dnh-il f/i/i'i'rn t/tii 
 
 I) lird „ I (jyd'ru—(j'ii ,, Itid „ I i/yu' ra —ijul 
 
 Examples : 
 
 kud'r gya'giji nfii/ni da Iri'iig-asi/d, later on you will see my house. 
 
 (lya'ijKK nil'gal, it is my house. 
 
 dml t/i/cTra lul'i/aigi/d vts? is that your house ? 
 
 (/Em (jija'tjiih I'fxru/igii, it is not mine. 
 
 The same form with the terminal vowel o is used for the substantive possessive 
 pronoun : 
 
 gya'genD, mine. etl gyfi'rao, ours. 
 
 di a gya'rao, yours. dali:' il gyd' rao, yours. 
 
 I gya'raii, his. la yyu' rao, theirs. 
 
 The second form of the possessive pronoun is the following : 
 
 Singular, 1st person, na'ra — gai Plural, 1st person, P' flora — ga't 
 
 ,, 2nd „ di: /Ira- -gai „ 2nd ,, dali:nra—gai 
 
 „ 3rd ,, Id'ra — gai „ lird ,, Lara— gai 
 
 Note.— In one instance I found for the second person singular : tlnra — gai. 
 In some instances this second form and the first are used indiscriminately : 
 
 hua'r gyn'gen nagai da Ifi' ng'uxga ) , . 
 kua'c ndra nilgai da hi' iVyatiga \ 
 
 on you svill see my house. 
 
 In other cases the Urs* form must not be used, but I diil not succeed in discovering 
 the rule. The second form serves also as a substantive po.sse.ssive pronoun : 
 
 nd'ragKa, is it mine ? 
 
 ti'Tragua la da kri/l, do you see mine ? 
 
 tlgaigiia ndra da k'i/1, do you see my land ' 
 
 la ra (la Id'ra ixta ! give his to him ! 
 
 Itala ! dr gi nd'ra isfa! give me mine ! 
 
 ddrgatl ndra ud'gai da Iri'ngaKgu, to-iMorrow you will s(!e my house. 
 
 ffytnu na'ra u'lai e'tsun ? where is my paddle ' 
 
 NoTK. — The suftix -gal is sometimes contracted with the substa live to which 
 it is alBxed : 
 
 thrai for tlogai, canoe. t^gul for tlgogai, country. 
 
 fjatai for 'ja/gai, father. 
 
 In addressing a person only the suflix -gai is used : 
 
 k-it'/lgai ! my father 1 dd'gai 1 my younger brother I 
 
 In a few instances I found the suflix -ran used for expressing the relation of 
 possession. It is evidently of the same origin as the second part cf gyd'rau (see 
 above). 
 
 gy'isto nd'rad i?'fsi:/l, whose house is that ? 
 
 d'nct.t nd'rad P'f.si, it is his house. 
 
 n-aKflda kunrao r'tui, tliat is their fallier. 
 
 \ 
 
 I ■; 
 
7G 
 
 liEPoUT — 18H9. 
 
 NoTR. I foiiml a peculiar possessive form in a few sentences, which, it would 
 seem, is used wIk^ic otijcct aiul subject are I lie same porsun : 
 
 h'lihni fl tJi'ii/ii, I \\\\>h my sl;in. 
 
 ([il I'lijiu'i III tliiiiii, Ih! \va.>lics ills face, 
 
 thjinl kii fl i'ai/o.'^id, I siiail {^u In my country. 
 
 tlijdil tl kiilij (ixijd, 1 shall see my country. 
 
 'iiiK viain. 
 
 In (lisfu-sinix the pmnnun we stated tiiat tin'i-o are two forms, one for the transi- 
 tive, the oilier for tlie iiiiransitivc; verb, the latter bein;; identical with tlie obj(M'tivo 
 case of the transitive pronoun. This makes it probable that the intransitive verl) 
 may be im[ier>onal. 'I'he divisiun of traasiiivc ami intransitive verbs is, of course, 
 jiciuiliar to the lan>;ua^'e, but it will b(^ found very niucli like that observe<l in 'i'lini^it. 
 i''vllowin,Lr is a list of intransitivi' and transitive verbs in the fust jjer.son sin},'ular : 
 
 iNTUANsiXTIVB VkRBS. 
 
 dr q(Vvti[aijn^ I am a Haiila. 
 
 <l? iiiritniiVijii^ 1 lielung to tlie eagle gens. 
 
 dv xVi^'tja, 1 am sick. 
 
 dp liVijii, I am well. 
 
 dr- lifilijii, 1 recover from sickness. 
 
 di- nij(ihtli'.n, I recover from sickness. 
 
 dP k-'or'fn, I am hnnixry. 
 
 dP If'iVitPiijii, 1 am tiiirsty. 
 
 dv stiltlijit, I like. 
 
 do v' iiHPtgn, I know to — 
 
 dp r(in(/), I have. 
 
 dp k'dPskidd'ffii, I forget. 
 
 TnAXSlTIVE Veuijs 
 
 tl(/ slriifiP'fhjii, I cry. 
 
 fid. iiiii tlijii, i (hmcc. 
 
 tia viVqn, I eat with somebody. 
 
 tin P'xtii, I give. 
 
 tld IrO'ijd, 1 go. 
 
 till diV riiijiiy I have. 
 
 tla ijfiili:' ii, I liear. 
 
 till iP'iiqan, \ kill. 
 
 till k'lTijii, 1 laugh. 
 
 tla iiiilhjii, I drink. 
 
 till ijii tiiijii, 1 eat (it). 
 
 tld fjTi'tlrdf/d, I make. 
 
 // /,-i/ii/ii, I see. 
 
 tld kWya {tUi thiVijn .■■), I sleep. 
 
 thi liJmiiiiiidi-:' iiijEii, 1 smell. 
 
 tld UP't'l.hulgd, 1 talk. 
 
 tld fiu'di:n (.sec dpffu'djcnrd), I think. 
 
 tl tlnijd, I wash. 
 
 I found four tenses: tiie i)resent, imperfect, perfect, and future; and live moods: 
 tlic indicative, inttu'iogative, negative, imperative, and infinitive. I have no examples 
 of tlie coiijunclive and eoiiditinnal wliicli make their use sutlicieiitly clear. I shall 
 tirst give tlae tenses of the inliansitivc verb in a paradigmatic form : 
 
 st\'\ sick. 
 
 ^liiS: 
 
 Sia^'ular, Istiiursou 
 „ :;ii(l „ 
 
 3nl „ 
 
 riunil 1st „ 
 
 21111 „ 
 
 3r.l „ 
 
 I'resdut toiiso 
 
 do sf ("!';^a 
 di;u st'O'giigKn 
 
 1 stT'ffa 
 f-tl sfe'^ii 
 diilK'fi st'OV'agliQ 
 
 I st'C-'roga 
 
 Inipcrfoot 
 
 do st'O'gun 
 dEfl sfO'gagan 
 
 I st'OV'aii 
 Otl st'OV.in 
 dalKu st'O'gagan 
 
 1 tt'O'rOgan 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Future ' 
 
 do sfO'gnnO 
 
 do st'i''rasga 
 
 dKfi sfO'gane 
 
 dEfl .st'O'rus^'a and 
 
 
 st'O rasafi 
 
 1 sfr'V'ivnO 
 
 1 sfO'rii.sga 
 
 Otl sl'i'^aiiO 
 
 Otl at'f''rasKa 
 
 dali;u st'O'ganO 
 
 dftlKfi st'O'nisga ami 
 
 
 st'O'i'MS'au 
 
 1 st'ui-o'panO 
 
 1 sfOi^'niasga 
 
 In inflecting the transitive verb the pronoun is placed immediately before the 
 verb. In some instances the verb has an indelinite object, ga, exactly correspond iiiu' 
 to the same indelinite object in Tlingit (see j). (io). It is placed between the subject 
 and the verb : tin tja ta, 1 eat it. As a rule, the object is placed before the subjei'l, 
 but when the object is a pronoun and has a separate objective form (1st, 2nd, person 
 singular, 1st person plural) the sequence may be reversed. Following is a paradig- 
 matic table of the transitive verb in the present tense: 
 
 ■■ I /'juiid tlie foil nvinp doubtful future ; 1 st'Oran k-acVniga, he is poiiip to l)c siok. 
 
-'a ami 
 
 -an 
 
 L I 
 
 sjriv n>i<l 1 
 
 ore the 
 
 subject 
 iibjcct, 
 person 
 iiraili!,'- 
 
 ON TlfR NORTir-WKsri:UN TRIflKS of ( ANAHA. 
 
 Irlii, to aoo 
 
 I.NDICATIVK ; r»i;SKNT TliNHK. 
 
 I / 
 
 Ol.ject 
 
 
 Subjcuf. SiiiKulnr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l8t person 
 
 2ii(l iMTson 
 
 Srd pcrsiin 
 
 Singuliir, 1st. 
 
 person 
 
 
 
 •ir- (lu ki'fi^'a 
 
 de la kifiga 
 
 2ml 
 
 If 
 
 di;fi ll k-ifiyri 
 
 — 
 
 <li:n la ki'nga 
 
 :^r.i 
 
 11 
 
 \ 1 tlji kin^M } 
 1 till 1 k'ifiL.i \ 
 
 la <Ia ki'fig!! 
 
 — 
 
 Plural, Isf 
 
 11 
 
 
 L'tl (la k'i'figa 
 
 <"tl !.' ki'nga 
 
 L'n.l 
 
 
 (IfilKfi tl kifif^'a 
 
 — 
 
 (hilK'i. la k'i'figa 
 
 „ ard 
 
 (1 
 
 lu tl kinriiga 
 
 la da ki'nrriga 
 
 ... 
 
 OUjcct 
 
 Sul.ji'ot, Plural 
 
 Ist iicrson 
 
 'Jnd person 
 
 ijnl pursdii 
 
 Singular, 1st person 
 2.h1 „ 
 ■M „ 
 
 riural, 1st „ 
 2nd „ 
 
 „ . ard „ 
 
 d'a!i;ri dF.n k'i'figa 
 Ik dr.n k-i'figa 
 
 dallOn dHu k'i'figa 
 Ik (iKfi k-i'urnga 
 
 do dfdKfi k'i'figa 
 
 la dfilKfi k'i'figa 
 Otl dalKfi ki'figa 
 
 la dalKfi k'i'nrnga 
 
 de la k'i'firriga 
 dEfi la k'i'firCiga 
 
 ("tl la k'i'fir<'iga 
 dalKfi la k'i'firnga 
 
 NoTK.— It seems tliiit in the first person plural the transitive prorKuin d'uh'n is 
 contract(!d. It is remarkable that the characteristic suflix of tlic third pcrsnn jiliiral 
 ■TO is ;ilso uscil when (lie dbjeet is in tiu> tliif-d person plural. AVhen tiie object is a 
 substantive it is placed belore <he subject : 
 
 tcVn't tl tiT'jd, I eat .salmon. 
 
 It will bo seen that the suflixesof the transitive verb ar? the .s.-une as those of thii 
 intransitive, with tin; sole exception of the second iiersuns. where the termination ■///■/< 
 is missing. This, liowever, is alscj fre(iuently the case in intransitive veibs. 
 
 Note. — Wliiie in the great majority of cases the verb is inflected, .'is indicated 
 above, I found a cdnsiderabh; nunilier (if instances in which th(> terminal -ija was 
 missing; for instance, flu i/atu' and thi (/(ttu'i/d, I eat ; tin i/rdi:'/!, I liear. In other 
 cases I found the terminal .syllable -ffi./'i instead of -//</; but I was not able to deleef 
 any rule regarding their use. 
 
 tlti f/at(7'/lf/ r'sKn tin f/dtd', I eat and eat again. 
 
 tld (iiiil i:' ihii-./i, I hear. 
 
 tin shitrHjiidi:' riijEil, I smell. 
 
 tin k-'nujF.n, I see it (.something inanimate). 
 
 NoTR. -There are a few instances in which the p 'onoun, second person singular, 
 seems to bo tin or thin : 
 
 da till k-i/'iffd, I see you. tc'm tin tlanra td ! eat your salmon 1 
 
 thlra mV(jni, your house. 
 
 NoTK. Sometimes the syllable (7//7 is added to the first person wi*;hoiit changing 
 the meaning ; 
 
 gip. dt; st(7tl i/ild'uf/dii//, 1 should like much. 
 dK/i /,-rd'/if/ni fupdr ijudr.' FKjd, I wi.sh to see you. 
 (jijl dp h-'dT'!<k\(hV(ian? ! I forgot ! 
 hdl dr f/yl squ'jvai i'sta ! give me a knife ! 
 
 It may be that it is an interjection similar to ' oh I ' (Fiatin vtinam f) 
 
 iNTKlUIOr.ATIVE. 
 
 The interrogative is expressed by the [)iirticle/-/wr/. which is placed after the subject, 
 object, or adverb, as the case may be. 
 
 !i 1 
 
r/'xmimmm 
 
 HnmmiCTMa 
 
 78 
 
 UEPORT — 188f). 
 
 IN'TUANSITIVK VkuB. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Singular, 1st. person, dP rfua sVe? Plural, 1st person, efl fiiio, stf'e ? 
 
 „ 2n<l „ (h-.n qua sfriioK? „ 2nfl ,, dnh:' n gita sfr'ifts ? 
 
 :!r'l „ III ijua st'o'dog? „ 3nl „ /a, ffua'st'd'rod'bs i" 
 
 Iiiiperfeet, 
 de gun Kt'e'iia ? ami dr' (jua d'ego'odja? was I s'ck ? 
 
 TU.VNSITIVB VEUB. 
 
 dTi (jua da k'i/J ? do you see mo ? etl rpin Iri'i, ? do j'ou see us ? 
 
 la (jua da kin- ? do you see liim ? la tjna da k-'inrD? do ^'ou see tlierii ? 
 
 da f/iia da Irin ? do you sec it ? 
 
 In the interrogative the subject frequently precedes the object ; 
 da giia qa ad'ra ? have you got a dog ? 
 
 When there is an adverb accompanying the verb the former takes the interroga- 
 tive particle : 
 
 da'rgathjua di-.n xfPrifi'ridja? 'yere you sick yesterday? 
 a la e'tsisffua da kin ? do you see them there ? 
 
 It may also be attached to both object and adverb : 
 
 tlfidigua n'i'ra da kin ? do you sec ni}' land ? 
 
 n-ateijua ggi'ia v'tsimjiia, da Iri/l '' do you see anything there (at a distance) '/ 
 
 Sentences beginning witn iuierrogati^-e words do not take this particle, and have 
 instead of the verbal sulliy. -r/a, gy-n : 
 
 gyVsto !if\''gi:n, ? who is sick ? 
 
 gg'i'^to e'tsKil .' who is tliore ? 
 
 gg'i'sto ml'mn P'f.fi-:/! .' whose house is tliat? 
 
 gri'aii da td'gKn .' wiiat are you eating? 
 
 ^"'sii wa e'tsKi'i ? what is that ? 
 
 gd'gxmronT) da It'd'gF.n ? why do you laugh ? 
 
 gul'tlrnthVii gum do da kingK/l u'odja? why did not you see me ? 
 
 kamt'/lgu diul kP'li:n ? how are you ? 
 
 dEn ggd' ra nd'gai giia ?ts .' is that your house ? 
 
 dnn, gijd'ra Id'naga.i giia etti Tlkd'gilta '.' is Tlk-agilt your town ? 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 The second person singular is form^ i by the separable particle tla, which is afhxod 
 either fo tiio verb or to its object, or precedes tlie verb. In the plural the sullix -ro 
 is added to the stem o*" the verb : 
 
 Singular, 2nd person : id. tla I .'at ! and 
 
 xqdli:'/i fla ! sing ! 
 kd'it tla! go I 
 Plural, 2nd person : td'rn tla ! eat ! and 
 
 qotlro tla ! drink I 
 
 In transitive verbs which have an object tla is always placed after the object : 
 
 de tla kin ! look at me I la tla h in ! look at him ! 
 
 d'gTOi tla k in ! look at yourself ! 
 
 Plural, 1st person : d'd'li:n ga td s'an ! let us eat I 
 
 A periphrast ic form is frequently used : 
 
 hahi ! ga ta .' come ! eat ! 
 
 hala ! de e'thva ! come ! iielp nic ! 
 
 liala! gandl de qotl da ! ome ! make me drink water ! (let me drink !) 
 
 hala ! d'ahji qotl s'ail ! come I let us drink I 
 
 The following forms seem to indicite that tiiere is still another method of forming 
 the imperative : 
 
 nd'ru i'sfa .' n-ive me mij.'j ! qnfl fa ' diink ! 
 
 ga tla ta .' oat (it) ! 
 tla g'o'tlga .' make it I 
 di:in da tla ! make it longer 
 ga tla td'ro. 
 
 i\u 
 
 (III' 
 
"=' ,*«• 
 
 ON THE NORTlI-TIVESTEnN TKinES OF CANAPA. 
 
 79 
 
 INI'INITIVK. 
 
 I found two inflniti^;cs, one cndinpf in •({lyii, llie otlicr in -//v/w. 
 
 fjr.ii] fl ¥aiftii ihiin-d' TKiir, T liniijh almost ([ am not far from laugliinpr). 
 (Ip ffu/lrn i/otiihl' i i/iV itstlo il mt'itlllnrt'ijn^ if niy father wi'ru not (Km'I, 
 
 I should (laticc. 
 (liJi Ifi'i'i' n(ia\ ijii? (Ir ufafl yud' ikjeii, I sliould liko inucli to see you. 
 Ujiihi' Tufi'ii dr u')>!(rt iju'tinifd, I understand well to sing. 
 rd'iiitltiuj-an In'nxPda, he knows to fight. 
 
 Note. —I give the fullowing comlitional sentences without an attempt at e.\|)lan;» 
 tion : 
 
 I (\) ■■<rr-':/i:.^ (2) r,r>fanr, (3) iiF.m (t) fl (5) Inritlra'iiijn (0), if (;^) he (I) is 
 
 'sick'(2), 1 (5) not (I) shall go (i",). 
 da (1) k-ii'/lra (2) r/inn (3) (fdt'utl (I) (fv.n f/ynn (.")) wn'tlracrfu ((>), if (5) 
 
 my (I ) father' (2) not (H) dead (4), I siirill riance (6). 
 dr (\) /ri('u'-/i (2) f/,->riifl(H) f/i/ini (\) f/i-m (:>) fl (')) iii//f?m'»sqri (7), if 
 
 (I) my {].) fiil'iier (2) <U'a<l (;{), I ('5) shall not r,) dance (7)'. 
 I (1) nfr'ijr (2) f/>7' ii.'<tlr> C?) lu'rf! (4) tl (o) lira' it.;!,.! ; ((!), if not (3) he 
 
 (1) were sick (2), I (.'>) should go (C.) to him (i;. 
 I (l)srp'r/P. (2) f/n'iistlo (:{) di-:'n,/Kt (4) ^r7r^i (5) tl ((>) hiVmniVija (7). if 
 not (I?) he (1) were sick (2), I (*>) should go (7) with you (4) to hiiu (.t), 
 dp (1) h-uTira (2) (jotulal (8) i/d'ust/o (4) C/ (.">) iiiatltlari'iju (G), if not (4) 
 my (1) father (2) deuJ (3), I (o) should dance (6). 
 
 Negative. 
 
 The negative is formed by ^I'.m, not, whih; the suflix -ran is added to the si em of 
 the verb : 
 
 gi.m dp Df'P'ra/h/ir, I am not sick. 
 
 (//•;/« fa fl. fri/lnntrrif/a, I do not see them. 
 
 ffh:iii na Ps fl hhlranga, I do not see a house there. 
 
 In f^\f^ interrotrativo-negative the interrogative particle is attached totne negation ; 
 the .• itlix of the verb is -ran. 
 
 ffi m f/ua I xfP'raf) / is he not sick 7 
 
 (finn ijua nui ml Pts da kinrail ' don't you see that Iiouse there I 
 
 Here is a negative imi)erativc : 
 
 gr.m td'ranga ! don't cat 1 
 
 h mger ! 
 
 Iject : 
 
 I') 
 forming' 
 
 !■ '.KIVATIVES. 
 ■gPx, repeatedly : 
 
 dp sVe-yP'iga, I am renea*e;lly sick. 
 -g7(gi:/T), he is in the habit of: 
 
 I k'a-gl'gr.iiga, he laughs alwaj'S. 
 
 / ra'HifUd-g'i'giuiga., he is in the habit of Hgliting. 
 
 tla gafag'i'ga, I eat always. 
 
 -gil (gio'i) glfh.n, it is beginning, growing to be ; 
 dp sf'P'-gifly.riga, I am getting worse. 
 SKnglfli-.tlga, dawn, it becomes (L-nlight. 
 shadga-gVlgi it, it is high water. 
 g'dittgP-g't'li/a, it is growing roup:]. 
 fatuPgl'lga, the wind is increasing in strength. 
 
 gyi'l, to cause : 
 
 gi/ina (I) tl (2) fd'gcn (3) dP (i) gghl (o) sfP'ga (0), I (2) ate (3) some- 
 thing (1) (that) makes (5) me (4) sick (D). 
 
 There are several derivatives the meaning of which I do not know : 
 
 // fa-nPi'ga, I oat. 
 
 ag-aliiiia, it begins In bo niglit. 
 
 /ftii'i'iiga, to see (from /.•*//). 
 
mmm 
 
 80 
 
 TiKPoirr — 1889. 
 
 VERnUM SirnSTANTIVUM. 
 
 Pf.1, there, and its derivations fre(juently stand for tlie rcrhvm siiligtaniivum, as 
 will be .S(;cn from the following examples. In such cases a terminal -o is generally 
 added to the siiliject : 
 
 tllfd'-o r'fKi, it is a rnck, these are rocks. 
 
 f/nt-a r'/si, it is a deer. 
 
 f/il-d r'isi, it is I. 
 
 d('i (jua cfx? IS tliat you' 
 
 'J!l"''.li'n ilii'rti-o P'txi, it is my canoo. 
 
 Qd't-dcit ihja'ra-o' r'fxi, it is the country of the llaida, 
 
 ii'd'netit ml' rnii-o r'f.ii, it is his house. 
 
 l(/ //i/(7'rii-ri r'turi'iiiii, it is thfiirs. 
 
 (jinit i/i/ii'i/i-:ii, P'fsrdHf/'i, it is not mine. 
 
 [/i:m (jtja'yiji ml'ijal (~'ftini?i//(r, it is not my house. 
 
 The Auverr. 
 
 It seems that adverbs are placed either at the beginning or at the end of a sen- 
 tence : 
 
 d(l' rtidfJ dr da l-if/f/rD/r, I saw 30U yesterday. 
 
 Uod'i'' hVrn third in If'n'Kj'Ufd Ti, j-ou will sihi mj" land later on. 
 
 dfi ijudi.' I'liffixKn liiuVr, you will hear it later on. 
 
 till I ten' lif/cn sij()d'nfsi:/'if/\:n, I saw him otiee. 
 
 ddrjiafl Ixiul ctl da Jriiiriixf/r7, you will see us again to-morrow. 
 
 d'alr.'/i d'xFH gudi:' ii{i<in?, we have he.nrd it again. 
 
 Note. — In a mnuber of instances I found the verbal aflixos -ija and -fiEn not 
 attached (o the verb, but to the adverb, so that the latlcn- would ap|>car to bi; the in- 
 llected verli, if it were not for the fact that the pronoun precedes the verb. All 
 the examples I collected refer to the advert) yfi'nn, much, very. 
 
 tttjiilii'/li/ (III d? ii'iisrd j/il'F.nyii, I know well to sing. 
 
 I'tl (lyit'uia sIM i/fi'iau/a, we belong to the eagle gens. 
 
 dS ran vri l-onn ijii' iJuja, 1 have many houses. 
 
 dv.n hciV iKjiuijc dc stdfl yu'iuhjy.n, I should like much to see you. 
 
 FORMATION OK WORDS. 
 
 It was mentioned above that compound words occur verj' frequently, and it seems 
 probable that by far the greater number of words are com])ounds of monosyllabic 
 stems. In many cases I aui unable to a>certain the meaning of the elements of words, 
 although tlie fact that they are compounds cannot be doubted. 
 
 xfc hd rati, ]ilant of foot (perhaps : foot inside above). 
 
 xl kit roil. ]vilm of hand. lii'i'yr Ira run, sky abo\'c. 
 
 ktild Ira ran, knee pan. 11a Ira ran, roof =iK)use above. 
 
 /// (n I'rd (2) daTif/o fii), wrist [(arm (1) joint (L>) ? (H)!. 
 
 gy\t(l (I) h\d (•2)da'/lyo (;}), knee joint [(leg (1) juint (2) ? (.3)]. 
 
 Ir'rda ya'ilya, post siqiporting roof, 
 
 111 tit yii'/'iyf', rat lie (/// probalily arm). 
 
 gyiVran, to stand. 
 rdiiitltii, to tigiit. 
 qitil'tHa, to boil. 
 
 l-n'ran, to walk. 
 fr'o'tlta, to steal. 
 
 The word ka'tuP, head, appears in compounds generally in the form til.i. 
 
 Iriis /S'V'7//, liead hair. /•■v7,v kh't.sp, head bono, ^kull 
 
 The word* denotinjf the a''<i\ iiy of senses art evidently derived from- the uaiuc- 
 (vf tlie respective <i^'/ati»: 
 
 Obti 
 Mrs. La 
 the inti 
 
 Th 
 
ON THE NOUrn-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 81 
 
 gyit, ear. (jikIk' n,^ to hear. 
 
 qail, eye. kin, to see (I was frequently doubtful 
 
 wliether to write k'i/l or qh'i, Imt jirc- 
 ferred the former, as I found it nioro 
 frequently the mu^t adequate spelling 
 than ([lii). 
 
 kun, nose. sJiti'nr/iafi/l,^ to smell. 
 
 Also : gfafi /l, mind. gutlEu, to think. 
 
 In the word Mo smell' we find an initial ,?, which seems to occur rather often. 
 There are some indications that it is interchangeable with tl. 
 
 skdfl and ill-dtl, black. 
 
 kux'i.' iifxiSi and katli:'/tt,iK/J, brain. 
 
 sqrt and 'jff, tiro. 
 
 Finally I give a collection of sentences illustrating various peculiarities of the 
 language : 
 
 UKfi Ii'eI g-add'(t, he is a white man. 
 
 dF.n fUringvn )ii:ii I-'kI g-iTifa.i, I see you are a white man. 
 
 tla ni:ii dd'raga, I have one. 
 
 dP ran na k'oov i/il'jJig/i, I have many house.s. 
 
 Qltliuin) iia fJii't st'in (I dd'raga, 1 have two houses. 
 
 ira fhd sliolgn, there are many people. 
 
 tigan. ka tl i'ngujKga, I shall go to my country. 
 
 dP rfgua da i'nt/as.' do you go with uie ? 
 
 n/jun qatilh.Ti Irixtla gii'ganr, I give one to each. 
 
 I >i)x-(il ggidd'ga, his shoulder is tattooed. 
 
 drilgKa gin qd'rtran ? what is your people ? 
 
 tld'o tl g'utlra'gam\ I have made it myself. 
 
 do gudi:'ngai st\' gv'an, I am downcast ^- my heart is very sick. 
 
 .''K/7 giia gi/uqt'l .' have .you n ])erfnratiou of your ear? 
 
 tl gudcn xflo di sf'r'ga, \ think 1 am .--ick. 
 
 du tiaktl frdtli'd ., / n(\ somebody has stolen mine (this form seems to 
 
 .serve for the jia-^ive). 
 dd gdtlran agi-.n nt'Pda, you make yourself sick. 
 a Idrt/i nqd'n'ai ista .' give me a knife ! 
 haldigi nd'ra Kijd'ivai dig! i'lfta .' f;ive me my knife t 
 liala dt'-'iflra kd'it ! otuie along with me I 
 ggi'iifd tlriitlrd'mn .' who u\ade that ? 
 got'iil sliol yfi'an, there aVe ttiany people. 
 
 seems 
 
 syllabic 
 
 words, 
 
 III. IVlM^niAX. 
 
 Obtained from a native of Meqllak'qa'lla, ' JIatthias '; a native ot Ft. Simpson, 
 Mrs. Lawson ; and from Mrs. Morrison, a half-blood Tsimsiiian from Meqtlakqa'tla, 
 the interpreter of the Bishop of Caledonia. 
 
 PHONETICS. 
 
 Vonrh: a, it, c, E, i, o, u. 
 
 Cimsonaiits : b, p; w; m; irv. ky ; g, k; g', 
 
 .1.-, 
 
 .1 is never pure, but i)i'ono\inoeil 
 individuals still further k'nglhen' -1 i 
 io'ot, man ; tt<'Pn and fs'P'cn, t' ' 
 except where I was sure that 1 1 
 •listinction of surds and sonant 
 formed into sonants whnnevrr . 
 by an hiatus, are very much nl 
 
 1, tl : y. 
 
 a atid ''' 
 ■ '] intf- 
 
 //,- 
 
 k ; r, q; h; d, t; 
 
 r vowels are by many 
 fur instance. ir,'f iind 
 ^ M the repeated vowel.-*, 
 
 .i :iuil peculiarity. The 
 
 .inal surds are thmughout trans- 
 h'.wever, when followed 
 ut has a dight touch of 
 
 ; I 
 
 uanu'. 
 
 The following ffirrns :•■•■ 
 dh/'l f/lia gi/il qr'l : 
 diu'i qua hunqi'l .' d 
 
 ,t ; 
 
 Al8> '•/ ^vu gyudh'tl? 
 
 I sikidu, u fh'/h/i: 1 
 
82 
 
 IlEPORT— ISSSf. 
 
 pt 
 
 kw 
 
 pts 
 
 kt 
 
 pill 
 
 kta 
 
 qp 
 
 nd 
 
 tpy 
 
 qk 
 
 nts 
 
 tk; 
 
 qt; qtk 
 
 nl 
 
 tk- 
 
 sJi, the point of tlio tonpue not quite touching the teeth. Z is prononncecT, the tip 
 of tlio tont,^uo touching; the uiiper teeth, the back being pressed against the palate. 
 iV is similar to d)i, the nose b(Mng almost closed. 
 
 All sounds occur as initial sounds. I found the following comliinations of 
 consonants beginning words: 
 
 tkw 
 
 ks ; ksp, k.?k, kstq qts ; qtsky tq 
 
 qs ; qsk, qst 
 
 qtl 
 The following consonants occur as terminal sounds : 
 
 p, m, ky, k, k-, r, q, t, n, s, 1, tl 
 
 Terminal combinations of consonants are : 
 
 Ip Iky pk tk-; ntk 
 
 tsk- 
 
 sp 
 sky 
 
 sk 
 
 tip 
 
 tig 
 
 tlk 
 
 sg- 
 
 sk- 
 
 
 sq 
 srl 
 
 
 St 
 
 
 St 7, 
 
 
 pk 
 
 qk 
 
 tk; ntk, Itk 
 
 nk ; ksk, nsk, tsk 
 
 ik 
 
 tlk; mtlk 
 
 mk- 
 
 mq 
 tq , Itq 
 nq 
 
 pt pa qtl; raqtl 
 k't ; Ik-t ms ntl 
 qt ks; Iks, tlks tstl 
 st; Ikst, mst k's 
 
 sq 
 
 nt qs ; pqs 
 It ns 
 tit Is 
 
 1 
 
 GRAMMATICAL NOTES. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Nouns and verbs form the plural in the same way. Therefore I shall treat this 
 subject before discussing the parts of speech separately. 
 
 There is a great variety of plural forms ; I observed the following classes : 
 
 1. Singular and plural have the same form; 
 
 bear, ol. day, ca. 
 
 cat, to'us (Chinook). year, katl. 
 
 deer, wan. fathom, ga'it. 
 
 seal, rE'la. hlanltet, guc. 
 
 cedar, gEla'r. to hear, nEqEnO'. 
 arrow, hauwa'l. to see, no. 
 
 It seems that all quadrupeds, the dog excepted, belong to this class ; also divi- 
 eions of time and measures. 
 
 2. The plural is formed by repetition 
 
 day, has— hasha's. 
 foot, si— sl'sl. 
 
 stone, liip— iKphVp. 
 
 tree, k-an — kank-an. 
 
 irater, aks — akEa'ks. 
 Jlat, tqa — fatjUia. 
 
 It w^ould probably be more proper to 
 
 3. The plural is formed by Teduplicat 
 
 hro iii'h, ano'ic— anane'i(;. 
 ghost, ba'laii — bilbu'laq. 
 hat, k'u'it— kaka'it. 
 soar, tl(''eky— tletle'eky. 
 sj'rucc, sK'niEn — sEmsE'mEn. 
 inside, ds'ar — ds'Eds'ft'r. 
 tii'^i, sl'opk - s'psi'cpk. 
 
 of the whole word : 
 
 good, am— ama'm. 
 to carve, gyetlk — gyetlgyetlk. 
 to cut, g-'ots — g-'a.sg''ots. 
 ti) make, ds'ap-ds'apds'ap. 
 to stri/ic, d'O'oc— d'tcdooc, 
 
 join this class to the next : 
 
 ion. 
 
 to finish, g-fi'ode— g-ag-.l'ode. 
 to knon', vvula' — wuhvula'. 
 to looh, ne'etsk — nekne'et.sk. 
 to miss, gua'adEo -gutguu'adEc. 
 to jih rsiie, loya'ek — loliya'ek. 
 to speak, a'lgiaq — ala'lgiaq. 
 t" y'''i', gvEiiri'm— gvKngEna'rn 
 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OK CANADA. 
 
 83 
 
 4. The plural is formed by diteresis : 
 
 to hang, yaq — ya'iaq. to Irtrrc the /loiisc, ksEi— l<s:i(|. 
 
 5. Tlie plural is formed by the prefix lu (ll) : 
 
 hvnffry, k'le — hik'fe. 
 to br (ifrtdd, buc— lEbac. 
 to drink, aks — laa'ks. 
 
 to hivijh, cic'fi'qs— licaa'qs. 
 
 to sh'iji, (jstoii-- laqstil'iq. 
 
 to walk on. a road, yak--liya'k. 
 
 G. Tlie plural is formed by the prefix ka : 
 
 canoe, qsa'o — k'aqsil'o. 
 face, ts'al-kats'Klts'a'l. 
 tired, cOna'tl — k'acona'tl. 
 
 to dress up, no'otk — k-ano'ot,k, 
 to leave, da'wutlt — kada'. 
 
 7. The plural is formed by the prefix hu : 
 
 house, walp — huwa'lp. 
 
 8. Singular and plural are derived from the same stem partly b}' epenthesis ; but 
 no rule of formation is evident. 
 
 covipanji, na'tatl — nalatltatl {this vunj round, tlkwii'tlk — tlkwl'yitlyatlk. 
 
 he a di.ifrilnitiee). to eall, ho'otk— hukho'otk. 
 
 man, io'ot^io'ota. to seream, aya'wa — ayaluwfi'da. 
 
 raven, k'fiq — k a'rat. to n-afeh, lOnia'kca— Liliaya'kca. 
 
 woman, haua'aq— hana'naq. to fall down, k funa — Ic'iiia. 
 
 9. Singular and plural are derived from ditlcrent stems : 
 
 ehild, tlkua'mElk'— k'apEtgErE'tlk. 
 
 large, wi— wu'd'a. 
 
 separate, lEks — liagul. 
 
 to eomefrom, watk' — Jtmia'an. 
 
 to enj, wiha'ut ( = large say) — bak. 
 
 to die, d>'ak' — dt;r. 
 
 to eat, ya'wiqk— tqa'oqk. 
 
 to enter, ts'e'en — lamts'aq. 
 
 to kill, ds'ak' — yets. 
 
 to lie {rceli>ic), nak-Iatlk. 
 
 to run, ba— otl. 
 
 to sit, d'a — wan. 
 
 to stand, bfi'yotk — maq^k. 
 
 to take, ga — doqtga. 
 
 It seems that in compound words only one }iart of the word takes the plural 
 form : 
 
 islaiul, lEks ^.''A- separate sitting —lEkfi huwa'n. 
 river, g^'ala'aks —ascending 7iwi't'r— g'ala'akaks. 
 stranger, lEksgyafc = separate people — hagulEgyat. 
 town, k'aUs'a'p — k''alts'aprs'a'ii. 
 glad, In rimak'a'ot= in good heart — lo amu'mk'ak-a'ot. 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 There is no grammatical gender, and apparently no oblique case. L'os.sessivo 
 relation is either expressed by simply co-ordinating nouns or by the particle loni ; 
 
 the ohiifs (1 ) house (2). wfdp (2) sEma'yit (1). 
 the raven's (1) master (2), mia'n (2) k-fiq (1). 
 
 But a white man's (1) eauoe (2), qsa'e (2) Kin k'amksi'oa (1). 
 
 t/ie door (1) of the house (2), lKksa'(i (1) Em wa'lbEt (2). 
 
 A.s will be seen, the nominative ahvays precedes the genitive. In a few c;isos I 
 found //E prelixed to the possessed ohjiict or to the part : 
 
 the man's (1) canoe (2), nE iisa'e (2) in'ota (1). 
 the dog's (1) tail (2), nE ts'o'bi;, (2) has ( 1 ). 
 
 When the possessor is a person whose name is given, the posses-sed object takes a 
 terminal s : 
 
 George's (1) canoe (2), qsa'es Dords (see ji. lU). 
 
 All oth^n- relations are expressed by prepositions, whicb take a terminal .< when 
 referring to a uomen /iropriun. (see p. 1>1). 
 
»»»•'**"■ 
 
 84 
 
 revout — 1889. 
 
 Tenses. 
 When tlie object spoken of bclonprs to thcpast, th;it is, if it Iia? perished, or lias been 
 destroyed or lost, the noun is used in tlie past tense, \vhi(;h is formed by the suthx 
 -rfEE. 
 
 the dead man, id'o(\RE = tlN; man tliaf mux. 
 the hrol'i'/t canac, (j.s.i'dEE— -///c canoe iltaf was. 
 
 When the object belongs to the future, the noun is us(;d in the future tense, which 
 is formed In- the- jirefix diun : 
 
 the future hushand, dEni naks. 
 
 the canoe that will he made, dEni qs;i'E. 
 
 Tliis prefix is the sarno .is the cliaractcristic of tlie future of the verb. 
 In continuous speech presence and absence are also distinguished, tlie former being 
 expressed by the suffix -t, the latter by -yfl, 
 
 THE ADJFX'TIVE AND ADYEllR. 
 
 The adjective precedes the noun, and is generally joined to it by Em : 
 
 youn/f man, sop'ar, Em io'ot. 
 
 tiiarrh'd man, naks em in'ot. 
 
 old man, wud'a'gyat Eui io'ot (-great person man). 
 
 had man, liada'q Em io'ot. 
 
 good man, am Em io'ot. 
 
 In some instances tf, stands instead of Bm: 
 
 good man, am a io'ot. 
 But : had man, hada'q a io'ot, /.s- obsolete. 
 
 Certain adjectives immediately precede the noun : 
 
 large, wl : \vl walp, a large house. 
 
 wud'a huwalp, large houses, 
 very, imjjortant, sEraral. 
 
 A number of adjectives are abbreviated in forming compounds : 
 
 rcrg, sEmral, ahhreviated, sEm: sEmhala'it, the imjiortant Janice. 
 
 good for nothing, k'amstE, ahkrcriated, k-am: k-amwalp, a misirahlc house. 
 
 The abbreviations cannot be used at pleasure, 
 
 KarastE Willi) and k'am vvfdp, miserable house, are equally correct ; but, while we 
 have atlgE sEma'm, not very nice, sEma'm would not be correct ; it must be sEmral 
 &m, rcry nice. 
 
 Note. — The meaning differs sometimes, according to whether Em is used c-r 
 omitted ; for instance : 
 
 wlha'u, to cry ; from wl, great, and hau, to say. 
 
 But : wl Em hau, to gcold. 
 
 Comparison. 
 
 I give only a few examples of comparatives : 
 
 John is taller than George, k'a wile'eks dE John tEst Chords. 
 John is smaller than George, k'a tsO'oske John tEst Dsords. 
 that is the heaviest, p'a'lak's gua'a = that is heavy. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 The Tsimshian has seven sets of cardinal numbers, which are used for van'ou.'i 
 classfs of objects that are counted. The tirat set is used in r-onntiner w^ien there is 
 no definite ol)ject refon-ed to ; the second class is used fir rounting ilat .ibjecT?< an<i 
 animals; the third for counting round objects and divisions of time ; the fouv 
 counting men ; the lifth Cor counting long objects, the numerals being coinpoH- 
 ■ k an, ivco; the sixth for counting canoes; and the seventh for measures. Tti€ last 
 •eeiu to be compose! with aiio'n, hand. 
 
i^mm 
 
 ON THE NORTII-WESTEHN TRIBES Ob' CANADA. 
 
 8.; 
 
 lich 
 
 Xo. 
 
 Counting 
 
 Flat 
 Objects 
 
 Round 
 Oiijccta 
 
 Mon 
 
 Long Objects Uanoes 
 
 Moasiirea 
 
 1 
 
 gyilk' 
 
 gak' 
 
 g'K'rK.l 
 
 k'al 
 
 k'Ti'wiit-k'an k''ania'<t 
 
 k-'al 
 
 2 
 
 t'i:i..ia'6 
 
 t'Dp'ia't 
 
 go'llliKl 
 
 t'Kp'iaila'l 
 
 '.,'-a'op<k-aii ^'-'rtlpiA'Itk 
 
 U"l'lllF.l 
 
 3 
 
 gUll'llt 
 
 giia'iit 
 
 (.'11 til"-' 
 
 f,'ula'l 
 
 ira'ltxk'an g-alt-k'a'iitk 
 
 (.'Ulr'ollt 
 
 4 
 
 t(ial|n 
 
 t,qa;p.i 
 
 t.iaip.i 
 
 t'liilp'iilil'l 
 
 tqa'alKk'iin tqalpqsk 
 
 t lalpqalo'iit 
 
 5 
 
 koronc 
 
 kotrnic 
 
 ki'tniio 
 
 kcKllFi'iVl 
 
 k''i'.t<VKntsk'aii Kctn'oiisk 
 
 kctoMsiUi'iit, 
 
 6 
 
 k'Vilt 
 
 k-ViIt 
 
 k-Vilt 
 
 k-'al.la'l 
 
 k-'ii'olt-k-aii k-';iltk 
 
 k''a'ili-;lo'nt 
 
 7 
 
 t' .Jiqi'l'lt 
 
 t'li|)iia'lt 
 
 t'Kliqa'lt 
 
 t'r.pqalda'l 
 
 I'Kpcialtfk'aii t'Kpqa'ltk 
 
 t'K iililMl.lc/llt 
 
 8 
 
 (f'niiiiri'lt 
 
 vuktii'lt 
 
 vnkta'lt. 
 
 vuktiraihi'l 
 
 rk'tlHiid^k-an vukia'^tk 
 
 viiktaldl-.lo'nt 
 
 (» 
 
 kcti-.imi'o 
 
 kctKiiia'c 
 
 kc'ti'.iia'f 
 
 kctl macii'l 
 
 ki'tKiiia'et-ik'aii ki:ti:iiia'ck 
 
 ki't Kniiisilo'nt 
 
 10 
 
 fe'y''M> 
 
 t'i'ap 
 
 k'pCi'l 
 
 k-pal 
 
 k'pO'ctsk'an ;gy"apsk 
 
 k'puont 
 
 11 
 
 ir.Mik' 
 
 
 — 
 
 k'pal tr. k'a'l 
 
 — 1 — ■ 
 
 — 
 
 U 
 
 t'Kpi|lVt 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 k'pal ti: t'Kpqa.lil'l — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 2(1 
 
 kyeilO'el 
 
 — 
 
 — • 
 
 kv.'.la'l 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 3U 
 
 fTiiIf'rtuliryaii 
 
 — 
 
 gula'lKgyitk 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 10 
 
 t"i;|)i|ailii'lk:\ itk 
 tqi'ilpiwul^rva'p 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 50 
 
 kotoiicwulgyjip 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 lou 
 
 koKMixa'l 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 200 
 
 k'piil 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 300 
 
 k'piil tn kcEUECiVl 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 _ 
 
 400 
 
 kviMiVI 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 600 
 
 kyKiia'l tr, kciaibxai 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 eoo 
 
 guIa'iKgvitk 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 700 
 
 gulii'lKfjyltk tR kcKnEcA' 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 _ 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 800 
 
 Kialptitii'lKg.vitk 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 900 
 
 t<ial|«ita'li;gj'itk tE kci-; 
 
 nEciVl 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 1,000 
 
 k'pal 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 It will bo scon nt once that this system is quiriary-vigcsiiual. It seems (l.iubtful 
 wliotlier t'/''lj>'/, four, is derived fnim tlu! same root as fiu//tji7'f, two. In live we tiiid t he 
 word for 'band,' uno'ii, in comjioundscrt (?). Six and seven are evidt'ntly the second 
 one and two. In twenty we lind tlie word f/i/nf, man. The liundreds are identical 
 with the numerals used in counting men, and here the (quinary-vigesimal system is 
 most evident. 
 
 Ordinal Xumbers. 
 
 The first luis two form.s, one for animate, the other for inanimate objects. The 
 following ordinal numbers are formed by moans of nannhitV, 'the next to,' and the 
 preceding cardinal taimeral, except in the case of the second, when the 'next to the 
 lirst' is used. The terminal t which is liere attaclied to the cardinal numbers is prob- 
 ably nothing else than the terminal euphonic t spoken of above. 
 
 Animate In.aniiiiato 
 
 Tito firfit : ksk'il'oq kstso'cj 
 
 The second : naanhiil' ksk'd*oq naanhia' kstso'q 
 
 Thetliird: 
 
 Counting 
 
 Flat Objects 
 
 Round Objects 
 
 Men 
 
 naanliia't'np- 
 qada'lt 
 
 Long Objects 
 
 Canoos 
 
 Measures 
 
 naanhia' t'Ej)- 
 qa'dEt 
 
 naanhia' t'Ep- 
 qa'ilEt 
 
 uaaiihia'go'upKlt 
 
 naanhia' 
 
 g'l'iopsk'anget 
 
 iimmhift' 
 g-alpC'eltk 
 
 naanliiiV 
 gu'lbi;lt 
 
 onec, g'E'rEl. 
 twice, gO'upEl. 
 three times, guile' 
 
 Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 /oil)' times, tqalpq. 
 Jirc times, ketone. 
 
 It will be seen that they are identical with the forms used for enumerating round 
 objects. 
 
 Distributive. 
 
 The distributive numerals are formed by mEtlK, followed by the cardinal uumeraJ 
 *'•■* instance, one{rniind) to each \ mEtlE g'E'rKl. 
 
 I - 
 
^!^! 
 
 Sfi 
 
 nnrouT — 1889. 
 
 PROXOUX. 
 
 I'liuaoNAL Pronoun. 
 
 Independent. Dcpfiident 
 
 J, ni;'rio ?«(', giVi I (present), (n)— 6, I (absent), — 6 
 
 ffioK, iiE'rKn f/iir, f;u.T(n) fhoii (niE), -i-:n 
 
 /i', s/ic { j>rc.ii'/it),ni^' E(]Et /liiii, her (prcneiit), — he, she (irrcsciif), — Kt 
 
 (dhscnt), nO'etga (absent), — (absent), — Etga, Ega 
 
 we, nE'rKiii vs, f,''Em ire, — Eiu 
 you, nE'rEsEMi (to) ijoii, piifi'.sEm you, -En.sEm 
 thvii( i>rcsi'nt),i\v.Y^r\v'FAv.i t/icm(j>rrsrnt), — t/iii/ (presrnt), — Et 
 (fibsciit), (licp iiO'eti^^a (absent), — —— (absent), I'.lga, Ega 
 
 'J'lio independent pronoun, tlie third pcr.son excepted, is formed from tiie stem 
 vi-r — , tlie origin of wliich is uulcuown to me. 
 
 . PossE.ssivE Pronoun. 
 
 The independent form of the possessive pronoun is identical with the nominative 
 of tlu) personal pronoim : mine, n7';'rio, kc. 
 
 The dependent, possessive pronoun is atlixed to the noun to which it belongs. 
 'J'liore are (iislinct forms for the object being present or absent, and three tenses, 
 past, pnscnL, and future. There is no dill'erence between the possessive f(jrm of the 
 noun and the intransitive verb, and it seems to the writer tint according to tlie 
 logiciil lojiii of the T.-imshian language both must be considered iilenlical. For this 
 reason it seems possible that the torm ni.rio (I and mine) is formed from the verb iiin 
 si/bsta?}tin/m ne and the pronominal sullix. The temporal prefixes and the 
 forms for presence and absence are also identical with those of the verb. The third 
 l)erson plural is omitted, being identical with the singular. Furtherreujarks on these 
 euflixcs will bo found on p. 88. 
 
 
 
 
 Past 
 
 Picsent 
 
 Future 
 
 I'roseut 
 
 Absent 
 
 Present 
 
 Absent 
 
 Present 
 
 dEm— 6 
 dEm -En 
 
 dEUl -Et 
 
 dKm — daa 
 
 (1 Em— EMI 
 
 (lEm -SEin 
 
 Absent 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 '-'rill „ „ . . 
 Srd ,, present, singular 
 3rd „ nbsnnt, „ 
 l8t ., plunil . 
 2nd „ 
 
 UE— 
 
 n— En 
 n— Et 
 n— da 
 n urn 
 n— Slim 
 
 HE — cdau 
 
 n — Endae 
 n— Etga 
 n— ga 
 n — Kmda 
 n— siauda 
 
 -0 
 
 — EN- 
 
 — Kt 
 
 — diia 
 
 — Km 
 — sEm 
 
 ("tra 
 'ind -edn 
 
 — EMgll 
 
 —Etga 
 
 "ga 
 
 -Kinga 
 —SEmgn 
 
 dEm— edae 
 
 dKm— Enga 
 lU-.in— Etga 
 dKm— ga 
 dKm - Emga 
 dKm— sEiiiga 
 
 
 1st pel 
 2nd , 
 .•ird 
 3rd 
 
 Demonstrative Pronoun. 
 
 Presence and absence may best be treated under this heading, as the}' correspond 
 lo a certain extent to our 'this' and 'that.' Absence is designated by the sulUxes 
 •(/'/ and -ilii(a), presence by -t, I do not know whether there is anj' dill'erence 
 between the two forms of absence. In continuous speech presence and absence are 
 a ways expressed hy -r/a. and -t. 
 
 I'csides these suflixes, we tind the particles (or pronoims) -^z.^A^r^ being absent, 
 -fl =being jiresent, frequently used. The sullix -//« is used instead of the impcn-fect 
 teuf-e, the absenc^e indicating, at: the same time, that the action or event belonged 
 to the jtast. The .-uflix is always attached to the word the presence or absence of 
 *hich is to be stated : 
 
 *ii:ffud'ts Dsordst, the (present) George's father. 
 ni.yad'ts Dsordsdaa, the (absent) George's father. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are formed by means of the same suffixes : 
 this, gue'Et and gua'a. that, gua'sga. 
 
 In sentences our demonstrative pronoun is frequently expressed by tiic corre- 
 fjionding verbal form : 
 
 this man is i/ood, am ii'i'odEt. that man is f/ood, am at i'l'odEtga. 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CAN.VDA. 
 
 87 
 
 Demonstrative adverbs are : here, gue'E; there, ya'gua. 
 
 the hook here, suwuus guc'e. 
 It seems that these suffixes are also attaclicd to words : 
 
 your children here, tlguEno'E. 
 Some prepositions have separate forms for presence and absence : 
 
 at, to, J) resent— da. at, to, abscHt—ga, gasga. 
 
 THE VERB 
 The Intransitive Verb. 
 Present tense. 
 
 1st person: 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 3rd „ present ; 
 
 3rd „ absent : 
 
 Singular. 
 («)— (-3 
 (otk) — En 
 
 —Et (Et) 
 
 —Etf/a, Kga 
 
 Plural. 
 (iJr.j)) — Em. 
 ( m E.'iE III ) — /•; ;m /•; in. 
 
 (dEJ,)-Et(Et). 
 
 {(hq))—Etga, Ega. 
 
 The prefixes placed in parentheses are not always used, but seem to serve merely 
 for the purpose of giving' greater clearness or emphasis to the sentence. 
 
 The imperfect tense is formed by the prefix ;//•; — ,the future b\' dEiii — . It seems 
 that in the imperfect tlu; personal prefixes are almost always vised. They are con- 
 tracted with the temporal character. 
 
 
 Imperfect tense 
 
 Future teuso 
 
 
 Singular j Plural 
 
 Singiilar Plural 
 
 1st person 
 
 1m\ „ 
 
 3nl „ present 
 
 3rd „ ab.sEiit . 
 
 nan— o 
 ni;m-KN' 
 
 UK -Kt 
 
 nK —Ega 
 
 nap— Km 
 namsKin— Knsiim 
 
 iiiip-Kt, or nE— Et 
 nap— Kga, or ue— Ega 
 
 1 
 dem (u)— | dKm (dKp) — Km 
 dEm (mR)— En dEm rniKsKni)"-EnsEni 
 dEni - Kt dKm (iIkii )— Kt 
 dEin- Kga ilKm (dr ji)--Kga 
 
 The perfect is formed by tla preceding the present tense, the plusquampcrfectum 
 and fulurum e.xactum by the characteristic particles of these tenses preceding the 
 perfect. 
 
 he has been sich, tla sI'epgEt. //'' had been sich, na tla si'epgEt, 
 
 he will hare been sich, dEm tla si'epgEt. 
 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 
 1st person 
 2nd „ 
 3rd 
 
 Singular. 
 — E naive 
 VIE — Ene' 
 —5 
 
 Plural. 
 — Ell a me 
 — E sent P. 
 —P.. 
 
 Negative. 
 
 1st person singular, aihjE — e. 1st person plural, otlgE — yivi 
 
 2nd „ „ atUjE — £«. 2nd ,, „ atlgi. 
 
 3rd ,, „ athjE — Et. 3rd „ „ atlgv 
 
 Ai i.n 
 
 Kt. 
 
 Note. — Nouns and adjectives with the rerbum .<iii}nitantinim are inflected in the 
 same way as the vcrhum iidransitivum, li the noun is accompanied by an adjective, 
 the former is inflected: 
 
 I am a 7A/»i.'i/;/««, Ts'Emsiano'. 
 you are Tsimxhian, Ts'Emsiu'nsEm. 
 
 I am a good woman, ama' hana'rano. 
 are you a Tsimt<hian/ Ts'EmsianEiie' ? 
 
 The tlurd person is frequently expressed by adding the demonstrative pro- 
 noun : 
 
 they arc Tsimshian, Ts'Erasian dEp gua'sga. 
 
 r I 
 
 I., 
 
 I '. 
 
88 
 
 REroRT — 1889. 
 
 VKimUM TUANSiriVL'M. 
 
 object 
 
 Sintrulnr 
 
 Plural 
 
 Ist Person ^ndTer'^iin 
 
 Dnl I'erson, 
 I'reeenl 
 
 3ril I'erson, 
 Absent 
 
 l»t Person 
 
 'Jnil I'erson 
 
 ij / 1st person, present 
 3 1st „ ulisont 
 
 ?c - -'"'1 .. 
 
 c 1 Hill „ present 
 
 'T. [■.Wd „ al.selit 
 
 B J 2n.l „ 
 
 ° IW'i „ jiresoiit 
 
 - ( .'inl „ alisent 
 
 n — i;n 
 — nt 
 
 — i'KK'a 
 
 n si:m 
 lit 
 
 — iKKa 
 
 inK— o 
 UlK - G 
 
 -Viit 
 
 — Kni-'a 
 DIE- i;ni 
 
 - i:iit 
 -Kiiga 
 
 t— Knf) 
 t— Kne 
 t— i;n 
 
 — HlKt 
 -\:ltSli 
 
 t— Kiiiiin 
 t-i:nsKia 
 
 — K(li;t 
 -Ktga 
 
 t-i:ne'(.'n 
 t i;iiej.'a 
 t— Kntra 
 
 — l-.ilKt 
 
 — i;tt.'a 
 
 t - KMKniKa 
 t-i:iisi:ni^'a 
 
 — KdKt 
 
 — KtK'a 
 
 ili.p- i:n 
 
 — i;nit 
 
 — Knipa 
 
 (li:p 8i:in 
 
 — i:mt 
 
 — Kinjra 
 
 inr.sKni — o 
 nii-;si;m-e 
 
 — KSKlnt 
 
 — i;-KniK'a 
 niKsKni- Km 
 
 — KsKint 
 
 — KSKUlga 
 
 It. will ho secii tliat t\w ol)jcct pfncnilly appears as llu! sutlix of tlie verb. Tliis 
 makes tlic inllexidii wvy niiKili like that ol' tlie pussi's.sivu prcdioiiii, and it 
 must prohahly lie understood in tlio sanu; way as tiie possossivo pronoun; for 
 instincc, 1 sec you = T your seeing. In accordance witli this fact— tliat tiio oljjcct 
 ap[H'ars as th • sullix of tlic verb — is the other: tliat when the object is in the plural 
 the verl)lias the j)lural form, while it lias tlic singular form when tlie subject is in the 
 p'.ural : I k loir i/ou, iiwulwul;VsKni ; i/dx louni' nit\ nii;si;in wulfi'vo. 
 
 The tenses are formed in the same way as those of the intransitiv'c verb. 
 
 fori 
 
 Intkrrooative. 
 
 * i' 
 
 
 
 Siiiguidf 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 Object 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2n(l Person 
 
 Srd Person 
 
 Snd Person 
 
 
 3rd Pei-son 
 
 1st person singular 
 
 mE— owe 
 
 t — owe' 
 
 mEsEin — owe 
 
 
 t — owe 
 
 2nd 
 
 It ft 
 
 • • • 
 
 t — i:nu 
 
 ( • • 
 
 
 t — Eiie 
 
 3rd 
 
 If *t 
 
 — Enc 
 
 — Ede 
 
 — ESEme 
 
 
 — Ede 
 
 1st 
 
 „ pliival 
 
 nic— Erne 
 
 t— Kino 
 
 niEsEni— Eine 
 
 
 t— Erne 
 
 2nd 
 
 
 ■ • • 
 
 t — sEine 
 
 • • 1 
 
 
 t--si:mc 
 
 3rd 
 
 
 • -Ene 
 
 — Ede 
 
 — EsEme 
 
 
 — Kde 
 
 the interrogative there is no distinction of presence and absence. 
 
 Negative. 
 atlgi-: — . 
 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 Object 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l«t Person 
 
 2ti(l PersDM 
 
 3rd Person 
 
 l.-:t Person 
 
 2nd Person 
 
 1st person, sinj^fular 
 
 niE— e 
 
 t— e 
 
 
 mEsEm — e 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 n— Kn 
 
 , , , 
 
 t— En 
 
 (lEp— En 
 
 ... 
 
 3id „ 
 
 n— t 
 
 niE — t 
 
 t— t 
 
 dEp— t 
 
 mEsKm— t 
 
 1st „ plural 
 
 
 mE— Em 
 
 t -Em 
 
 < • ■ 
 
 mEsEm- -Em 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 n— slim 
 
 ... 
 
 t — sEm 
 
 dEp — SEm 
 
 ... 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 I have not reaehc'd a satisfa(;tory under.itanding of the formation of the impera- 
 tive. I'lie following' examples show that the indicative is frequently used for ex- 
 pressing an order: 
 
 Singular: eat! ya'wiiigEn I = thou art eat'iny ! Plural: cat! ya'vvi(]SEm I 
 
 drink ! ii'kiiVA\\ =^thou art dvinhinif ! drink! laa'k.sEsEm ! 
 
 sit d(>>vn ,' d'an I = f!ir>" fifst doivii ' fit down ! wa'usEm ! 
 
ON THE NOIVni-WESTKIlN TUIDK.S OF CANADA. 
 
 89 
 
 III utlicr cases I i'uuiul the infinitive (stem) <jf tlic verb iisud us in iiiiiicnitivo 
 form : 
 
 ,sv7 tlmrn ! d'a ! inirm the n-ntrr! sK gya'niuk aks ! 
 
 come ill .' ts'e'en ! 
 
 Anollier imperative is formed willi the miIHx -// : 
 
 cat it ! gaptl ! look tit him ! ne'etl I 
 
 iahe it from vie ! de w.itktl a ga'i ' 
 
 Tlie iMi[ierative tirst persdti phiral is foriiud in various ways : 
 
 let lis nit ilo/i'/i / k'ultse wii'tiiun I 
 let IIS look III liiin ! sn'ntsc di;p nr'cst ! 
 „ „ „ wa'tsi- di;p nr'fst ! 
 
 let usf/o up the rircr brunch ! gyila' tsVi'th';_Mia I 
 
 Tlie imperative negative is formed witii L'^yila'dse ! i/o not / 
 
 NoTK 1.— It will h(' noted that in the noj.'ntive and inlcrrou'.itivf- the first person 
 singular ends in c, wiiile in llie inilieati\e it ends in o. In the I'orniur rasu the person 
 is t!vident]y considered al)sent. 
 
 NoTK 2. — Tlie first person singular has frequently, in>tead of -(^.the suflix -Kno. In 
 transitive verbs -v:no is used when there is no definite object; f<u' instance, I strike 
 it, ti'i'iishciiiif ; but : I strike my lircast, to'iiso hu'ijiijo. In tho case of intransitive 
 verbs 1 am unable to give any rule. Tlie use of -V.no or -o (h>[iends upon the ad\crb 
 aceoiii|iaiiyiiig the verl). It may be that whenever the state exj)ressed by the\erb is 
 defined -('' is used. 
 
 I am sich, si'epgEnO. 
 I i/iii fired, sona'tlKnA, 
 T mil hiiiiiirij, k'tf^'Kiio. 
 / (iin (isleej), qsta'qEnO. 
 
 7 inn. iihnii/s sieh, tla'wola si'rpgA. 
 J inn 111/1/ 1 /I iireii, tiagyik s(jn;Vllo. 
 I am iilirdi/.t hiuuirij, lla'unla k'te'yO. 
 I ininl to sleep, hasa'ran dEni qsta'qO. 
 
 NoTR I?. — Wlicn the word terminates with a vowel,// is inserted between the end 
 of the stem and -o of the tirst person singular. The same is done in the case of the 
 first person of the possessive pronoun : 
 
 I hioir, wula'yo. I use it, ha'yut. my mother, iia'y6. 
 
 Frequently a h is found inserted. I am not able to explain its use. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 It seems that the present participle is formed by reduplication : 
 
 to sjicah, e'lgyati, sjicahiiuj, KK'lgyaq. 
 
 to seir, tloopk. sewiiuj, tltlo't'pk. 
 
 to cat, ya'wiqk". eating, lieyti'wiqk*. 
 
 The past participle is formed by the suflix -de (see passive). 
 
 to sleep, qstaq. hiiriiif/ slept, qstaqde. 
 
 to ivalk, ia. hariii// lealked, ifi'de. 
 
 io saij, hau. harimj said, ha'ude. 
 
 The verbal substantive is formed ]>y dvJ'n, and might be more properly classified 
 as a relative sentence : 
 
 the maker, na dia'ii tsa'pdEt = who is he who made it .' 
 
 I do not know whether there is any dilTerence lietween this form, referring to a 
 special case, and the general verbal substantive, but it seems to be uted also in a 
 general sense : 
 
 Tia dEi'n ts'a'pa qsd'E, who is the maker of the canoe ? 
 
 Passive. 
 
 It seems that the passive is somewhat irregular. It terminates generally in -/.', 
 joined to the stem by s or ;•. ^ 
 
 to tell, matl. told, matlk. 
 
 to ttril/e. t'ous, struck, t'O'usk. 
 
*«•/' 
 
 i;^ 
 
 ^-f^- 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 // 
 
 // 
 
 '<^. 
 
 o^^ c^. 
 
 
 
 :a 
 
 C/.x 
 
 fA 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 IIM III 2.5 
 
 •^ I 
 
 32 
 
 2,2 
 
 It I4£ 111112.0 
 
 1= 
 JA 111 1.6 
 
 
 vy 
 
 # 
 
 
 <w 
 
 
 y^ 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 4^ 
 
 4 
 
 iV 
 
 <F 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^. '^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 o^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY. USttO 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 

 % 
 
 C/.X 
 
 '/. 
 
 '^ 
 
I ' 
 
 li 
 
 I , 
 
 1 ' 
 
 90 
 
 REPORT — 1889. 
 
 to vse, hii. 
 
 to sec, nc. 
 
 to hum, miiUi- 
 
 to pay, (jlkii. 
 
 to pull, su'ik. 
 
 to send, hri'3-ets. 
 
 to hurt, s^fi'yigs. 
 
 to viake, t.s'ap. 
 
 to prepare, guldem k'a'wun. 
 
 to know, wulfi'. 
 
 to smoothcn, tlE'lEp. 
 
 There are a number of other forms 
 
 to Mil, ts'ak. 
 to hate, lEba'lEqs. 
 to do, will. 
 to say, hau. 
 
 vsed, hA'yek. 
 
 seen, no'esk. 
 
 burnt, iii<'ilg-V'sk. 
 
 paid, (itki'ik. 
 
 jfullcd, sa'isk. 
 
 soit, hfi'yet.sk. 
 
 hurt, sg-a'yiksk. 
 
 made, ts'apsk. 
 
 2>reiHired, guldem k-a'wuntk. 
 
 knoirn, wula'itk. 
 
 smoot/icned, tk'bl'esk. 
 
 killed, ts'aksa. 
 katcd, lEba'lEqdS. 
 done, wfi'lde. 
 said, ha'ude. 
 
 \lc\\ 
 
 From these passive forms a present; past, future, &o. are formed in the same way 
 as from the stem. 
 
 Derivatives. 
 
 1. Causative, formed by — eh and r'an : 
 
 I cause him to make, ts'a'p'EnQt. 
 
 to cause to drink, aksEn 
 
 to cavse to stop = to hinder, gyild'En. 
 
 I hinder you to drink, gyihi'EiiO a'ksEn. 
 I cause him to eat, yawir'anot. 
 it causes him to do, r'anwa'ldet. 
 
 2. Inchoative, formed by reduplication : 
 
 I yet sick, sisi'opgKno. I get hungry, kuk'te'EnO. 
 
 I get tired, sesonfitlKno. 
 
 3. Imitative, formed by sis- and by reduplication combine<l : 
 
 I feign to be sirk, si.ssij='epkEnd. Jf'xjn to he hungry, siskuk'to'EgEnO. 
 
 J feign to he tired, sissisOnfi'tlgEnO. J feign to shep, sistjaijsta'qsEno. 
 
 4. Usitative, expressing something liabitual, also anything serious, a necessity, 
 formed by rap : 
 
 I am sick a long while, r'ap si'epkEno. 
 
 lam in the hahit of eating, r'ap yfi'wiqgEnO, 
 
 I must sleep, r'ap (ista'qEno. 
 
 lam repeatedly {always) hungry, r'ap tla'wola k'te'yO. 
 
 Frequentctivc, formed by huk : 
 
 he comes repeatedly, huk k-a'EdEksEt. 
 he i« repeatedly siek, huk si'eiigEt. 
 
 Qtiotatire, formed by k-a, which is derived from ami-Jrad, hearsay : 
 
 it is said that he is coming, k'll'EdEkska. 
 
 Duhitativc, formed by sEEn, following the personal sufhx : 
 
 viayhe he is sick, sic'pgEsEEn. 
 maybe you see vie, mEnO'etsesEEn. 
 
 The fzrst person singular has in this derivative always the absent form in -5. 
 Iteflexire. — Although the reflexive is not a real derivative, I may add here that it 
 is formed by lEp gyi'lEk8 = self back ; for instance : 
 
 I strike myself, lEp gyi'lEks t'o'uskEnO. 
 Note. — There are a number of interrogative forms in tl wliich I cannot explain ; 
 
 is that VI ins ? nEri6tl (na) wa'lde ? • 
 
 is that his ? gua'sgatl (na) wa'lde ? 
 
 will he not come? a'yentl dEM k-a'EdEksdE ? 
 
 IS 
 take.' 
 
 It 
 maur 
 vocal 
 of W( 
 
 W 
 
 verbs 
 A 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTEUN TKIBi:S OF CANADA. 
 
 91 
 
 ! way 
 
 snO. 
 
 ssity, 
 
 ;hat it 
 
 am : 
 
 dnn'f you ace him ? u'ycntl mEn("'otsrlE ? 
 
 who mid it f nfitl hri'iidK .' {prohnhhj = whoic sayiyig .^) 
 
 where in he who made it .' {he ah.senf), ndatl iia dKi'n ts'a'jjf Eda? 
 
 „ „ (he present), nda na dEi'n tsa'ptlKda ? 
 
 irhen did he arrive.^ iidatl da bats^'Edi:da / 
 wheu irill he arrire 1 tidatl dKm da batsgEdEda? 
 when did you arrire '' nda da batsgEn ? 
 when will you arrive ? nda dEm da batspEn 1 
 
 ,, „ tsEdKiida (lEin da batsgEn? 
 
 whose house is it ? natl walbE giia'a 1 
 
 I add a few sentences that will be found of interest from a syntactic point of 
 \ ifw : 
 
 I shall eavs." you not to come, AtlgEn dEm k'a'EdEksEnt. 
 
 vuiyhc he is not eominy, a'yensEntl dKm k'a'EdEkst. 
 
 do i/ou hear that he is not eominy ? nEqno'ycntl dEm wa k'u'EdEksdE ? 
 
 / hear he is sieh, nEciEnO'yO sir-'pgEtgE. 
 
 he lys he {another man) /.< sieh, nia'tldEdE si'epgEdEt. 
 
 I hope it will he yood weather, nEsKntl fimtl laqa'. 
 
 1 hope he is not sieh, nEsEntl wa sl'epgEdE. 
 
 I wish to drinh, sa'ran dEma'kso. 
 
 / order him to eome, gim.Vyr) dKm k'ii'RdEksEt = I order his future coming. 
 
 I gee you arc eating, ne'etsO wul j-a,'niqk'En=:I see where you eat. 
 
 H is mine, no'et nE'rlA. 
 
 it is Georye, nene'cs Dsords. 
 
 / miyht fall down, k-a'inanO gye'En. 
 
 you yniyht fall down, k'fi'inaEn gye'En. 
 
 if I fall, J shall hurt myself, tsKda sak-u'inao, dEm sg-a'iksgEnfi. 
 
 if I had fallen, I should have hurt myself, amo'en tsE sak'a'inae nan dEn 
 
 sgfi'iksgEnO. 
 1 yive the knife to you, gyena'mO liatlEbl'eDsgEda guan. 
 
 Note. - Every word referring to a person, more especially to a nomen proprium, 
 takes the suffix -s : 
 
 Groryc'g eanoe, fisa'E^' Dsords. 
 
 Gcorye and John, Dsords dis Dson {in other cases : ditl). 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 It may be well to call attention to a few of the formative elements and to the 
 manner of (loniposing words. One of the most rcinarkaljlc features of tlio Tslriishian 
 vocabulary is the indiscriminate use of words for nouns and verbs but still more that 
 of words as jjrepositions and verbs. Among these we note : 
 
 irdth, from and to come. 
 
 ga, at and to lake. 
 
 hsdq, out auvd to leave the house. 
 
 da, with, at and to elope, to take with. 
 
 ts'K'lEm, into and to put into. 
 
 We may .s.ay in a general way that the prcTiositions serve at the same time as 
 verbs e.xpressiiig a moti()n or location corresponding to the preposition. 
 Among formative elements of words we note the following: 
 
 am, used for: amhald'it, hoad<ln'.-:s = used in dance. 
 
 7rt, large : wlhaldi:, many ; wud'r.yyat, old = great people. 
 
 wlhdut, to cry. 
 TvD, without : wonlo'otlk, without nest (a name). 
 
 woksend'tlk, without breath (a name). 
 
 wok-'d'uts, without labret = girl. 
 
 k-, place of, only occurring in geographical names : 
 
 Laq{].)-h{2)-tlgua{:i)-rald' ms{i) = on (l) where (2) little (3) haws 
 
 (4) ; an island near Fort Simpson. 
 A'/;HK(l)-^'(2)-y'77r'(.1)--= place (1) where (!') scalps (H). 
 
 'fl 
 
 ; ■ 
 
 ¥-1 
 
 1 4!' 
 
 \ I 
 
 V 
 
 i '\' 
 
 ' - 1 
 
92 
 
 REPOUT — 1889. 
 
 ii 
 
 l! 
 
 Mh,/flti(\yi'(2)-q<Ttla{'^) = n:.vrn\v channel (1) whore (2) sea (3). 
 L>iq(\)-k(2)-l,7/i(^:Vj^un (1) where (2) (G>it)lau (H) ; village of the 
 Oyitlan. 
 
 KiitiK-, place of : 
 
 AK/i/..(l)-/^(2)-<7«7r(3) = place (1) wlicro (2) scalps (3). 
 Ki:iU:{\yhiuuVoCl) = \\M'G of (1) trade (2). 
 
 {him-, j)lace of, Gyitksan dialect.) 
 
 kxjn:-, place wliere something is frequently done : 
 
 A's7;f.(l)-/.-rtw/c''r//.7/(2) = where always (1) good for nothing say (2) 
 
 = pliiyj,T()iind. 
 A'.7y;;(P-//V7(2) = where one always (1) sits (2). 
 K,yii:{\):'ir>)it{'2) = where always (1) in suiiinjer (2). 
 
 7irtw-, miserable, good for nothin<jr, from hunntsc: 
 
 hame'cleq - good for nothing to speak = to play. 
 
 h'aH', instrument : 
 
 hnnn'd'i, rowlock = rowing instrument. 
 kayUUi'ojws, thimble = sewing instrument. 
 
 ^■, to oat, to receive: 
 
 tjjwmiio, to sm(ike = to eat smoke. 
 
 (jgi/nf, man-eater. 
 
 qana'P, bread-eater. 
 
 qloan'o'n, to receive payment for burial {Id, into ; aiio'n, hand). 
 
 q — ka, misfortune happening : 
 
 qliaitl'fplia, having sickness. 
 
 Tviilaqtldotk, when a landslide went down. 
 
 qju; half, in part, from qjihjc' : 
 
 qpiirnVk, partially wliite. 
 
 ha-, instrument, (cf. hd, to use) : 
 
 hnaha, cup, spoon = drinking instrument. 
 haa'tiiijijaq, windpipe = speaking instrument. 
 haytl'iriqii-, fork = eating instrument. 
 had'o'osk, broom = sweeping instrument. 
 
 ■Iia-, causative : 
 
 hasVi'jfk, causing sickness. 
 
 luilcmd'tk, causing salvation, saviour (Olachen). 
 
 ts'E/n; in : 
 
 ts'KiH ah*, = in water, a sea monster. 
 
 ts'i-.m tsa^ = '\n nose, nostril. 
 
 is' Km K)i'o'n — 'u\ hand, palm of hand. 
 
 tse-, future: 
 
 tsedK'iida, when ? (future) 
 twf/i/i!tse'ij>, to-morrow. 
 
 W; to make : 
 
 SK n'iild'isk = to make relative, to adopt. 
 SK tvuld' = to make know, to teach. 
 
 ti'ul-, where something is done (only once, not habitually) : 
 
 nud {Y) ijyUelis (2) iqal {•?.) d'amtk (4) = vviiere (I) self (2) on (3) 
 written (1) ; a place on Nass River. 
 
 nds-, place where something is kept : 
 ndhsu'ga, sugar-howl. 
 
T 
 
 ON THE NOKTH-WESTEHN THIBKS OF CANADA. 
 
 93 
 
 I add translations of a few names : 
 
 Geographical names : 
 
 e nf village 
 
 Laq (1) -/.' (2)-»pni/fI (3), Aberdeen = on (1) where (2) catch salmon (.'?). 
 Oyiit (\) liiq (2) (/ (;{) ian'oks (4) = r(!Oi)lo on eat canoe-boards = peopl 
 
 w)u'r(> thi.; steal canoo-boanls {lifm'nlix). 
 Glint (1) Kaiii'ii (2)-pe')plo (1) of tlu; Ksian (2) (Skeena). 
 Kfidi), i)n huhly from akn mian = tho main river. 
 Tu'eiiisIi'i'ii -(m the Ksian. 
 
 Names of persons : 
 
 M (1) f)U)i (2) okt (3), what (1) mistaken for (2) water (3). 
 
 I'x/if/d (I) '/' (2) Id'o (:?), across the water (I) also (2) staying (3). 
 
 TxF.rF.n (1) iii7'(/!/i.sk (2), ashore (1) pulling (2). 
 
 'jy Enu'd'ehy the one left alone. 
 
 TiC i:hii' s(i , cither overcast sky = close eye sky, or fastened talon (of eagle). 
 
 Wiha', great wind. 
 
 A'rix'if, making noise to each other. 
 
 jy</,ic'(fn Ic'ir/h, grandmother of watching. 
 
 jXrit tv'ihd'xlt, grandfatlu^r great storm, 
 
 J/iifii'i:qiinr'ri/, dreadful lire. 
 
 J)i:m (li nuiksh, going to In; while. 
 
 Nls i/iiI//'oj>.i, grandfather carrying stones. 
 
 L7 d'am huj fil'O, silting on ice. 
 
 Sco'/);/i/ih(l'i/it/{, flying in front of town early in moming. 
 
 Srirniffrfilr'ii'i, eagle having one coloured wing. 
 
 (Jpl' Hclr.h, contr€acte<l from qpVWtl /la;/' ul<ytitj ^partly hairy sea-monster. 
 
 ]/<>/rqs(7/i ram ^Vt'^rtrii^' = unbeliever in Neqnoq. 
 
 I cannot satisfactorily explain the formation of the last live names. 
 
 IV. Kutona'qa. 
 
 PHONETICS. 
 
 Voircis : a, e, K, i, o, u ; au. 
 
 Gmsonants : — p ; m, w ; d, t ; n ; g, k ; g", k- ; — q, h ; .s, ts ; — tl ; y. 
 
 Initial and terminal combinations of consonants are very scarce. Among my 
 collection of words only a few initial, and no termiiuil comijinalion;. are found. Tlu; 
 former are : kf, sk, xk-, sf, futf, fxp, Ilk, tin. As all words are undoubtedly co.iipound.'4, 
 numerous conibinations occur in words, one consonant being the terminal sound of 
 one part of the word, the other the initial sound of the sub equent part. 
 
 \ i 
 
 ■M 
 
 GRAMMATICAL NOTES. 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 Singular and plural liave no separate form-;. There are no cases. The genitive 
 is frequently expressed by the possessive iironoun. h'afhuja'dtnin aqhtUV ini.t, the 
 lior.se's head. 
 
 In such ca.ses in which we use the indefinite article the suffix -num, designating 
 somebody's or some, is attached to the noun. 
 
 aqli'uud'num, a tooth, somebody's tooth. 
 nogithl'iulm, a house. 
 aqk'athtma'nrnn, a mouth. 
 
 A great number of nouns have the prefi.K aq- or begin with compounds of this 
 prefix and certain others. I am unable to explain the meaning of this prefix, which 
 does not form an integral part of the word, being dropped in certain syntactic forms. 
 
 aqijifln, the house (stem : tla). 
 
 iniktj ffifla, it is ray hou.se. 
 
 xiTii till lu't' men?, there is a house. 
 
 nqkiiim'i'tiih, river : 
 
 tail initn'h'iir, there is a river. 
 
h V 
 
 11' .: <tfi 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 li 
 
 H 
 
 94 nEPoiiT— 18S9. 
 
 THE AD.IKCTIVK 
 
 The adjective jircccdes the noun. 
 
 PRONOUN. 
 TERSONAL I'UONOUN'. 
 I, lifiDiin. we, haminn'tla. 
 
 thou, Jii'iikif. you, nitih'i'iihfptt, 
 
 he, iiinku'is. they, ninko'isis. 
 
 POSSESSIVK PnONOL'N. 
 
 my, Art — . our, ka — va'tla. 
 
 thy, —nix, your, — ni'sgltl. 
 
 his, — i«. their, — isis. 
 
 The independent form of the possessive pronoun is identical with the personal 
 pronoun : 
 
 ht'min, it is mine. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 Cardinals. 
 \,o'hi'?. {i,ff-iiiki't'Sn'o. 
 
 2, tjs. 10, 'r'tTmO. 
 
 . 3, <7'fl7/.M. 2{),tii'/vr). 
 
 4, tjiVtxii. 30, yotlna'noivd. 
 
 5, u:'hk!i. ]00, ffi, if i/n'o'/iotVil. 
 
 6, nmi'xa, 200, ^7« HKVuivu'non'i). 
 
 7, ndii'tld. 300, yatlsa tliit'invo'iuiwd. 
 
 8, Duqd'tsa. 1,000, gyi'VowD tlKfun'H'ndmi^. 
 
 In some cases I found the prefix /7<i- added to the numerals one and two : 
 
 ffo'liirr (Kildxemri'Jiinih, one man. 
 tfd'kif? iii'thj!), one dollar. 
 ff'o'/i'n-ii a'qthit, one fatliom. 
 (f'b'hn'v witn'iiili, one month. 
 gia'sv natuhiik, two montiis. 
 
 The following is remarkable ; 
 
 «',««(" qd'atltsin, two dngs. 
 
 fo 
 
 au 
 
 IS 
 
 the first, o'smct. 
 once, Okkcrni'. 
 
 Ordinals. 
 the second, «** 
 
 the third, (7'rt7/»'« ; kc. 
 
 the Jirst time, O'pak. 
 onc-ha?/, as tlsEkosE'ka. 
 
 N I'M ERA L Adverbs. 
 
 twice, a'sk'atl. three times, g-(t,'tlsak'\itl. 
 
 the sceontf time, ask-'astl; cicc. 
 
 Partitives. 
 
 07ie-third, ga'tlsa tlsEkosE'ka. 
 
 nat 
 
 THE VERB. 
 
 The Intuansitive Verb. 
 
 Indicatirc. 
 
 
 Present tense 
 
 Imperfect tense 
 
 Future tense 
 
 1st pers. sing. 
 
 ku — ne 
 
 ma-ku — ne 
 
 k>i-ts(|atl — nr^'tiO 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 gin— ne 
 
 ma-gin — no 
 
 gin-tsijatl ' iu"'nc 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 1— ne 
 
 ma(k)— ne 
 
 (i;-ts(]atl — ne'ne 
 
 1st „ plur. 
 
 ku — natlaCane) 
 
 ma-ku — natla(ane) 
 
 kutsfjatl— natla(ane) 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 gin - nl'gitl 
 
 mi'i-gin — ni'ii'<^l 
 
 gin-t.s(|atl — ni'gitl(nC') 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 — ncna'raenft 
 
 ma(k) — uena'mcno 
 
 (0-t.si|atl — nenfi'nienu 
 
 froi 
 
ON THE NORTH-WESTERN TRIBES OF CANADA. 
 
 9o 
 
 The intransitive verb may also be inllcctecl by means of an auxiliary verb /, as 
 follows : 
 
 Proaent tense Imperfect tonsc Futuro toiisc 
 
 1st pcra. sing. kuini; — no mri-kuinO - ne ku-ts(iatl-iniVni' — ne. 
 
 &c. &c. Sic. 
 
 The attributive verb is formed in the same way, or by means of the auxiliary verb i : 
 
 For instance : husil'ne, or kuine sdnP, I am bad. 
 
 The noun does not tako the verbal sufllxcs and prefixes, but is used with the 
 auxiliary verb : 
 
 ffin hiS Kutona'qa, yon are a Kootonay. 
 k-'a'pr hi? Kutona'qa, they are all Kootonay. 
 inB kai/itlu, it is my house. 
 
 2nd person sinpnlar : 
 2nd ,, plural : 
 
 ImjH'ratire. 
 
 — en ; for instance : VJ/Pii, eat I ^■'D'niP)t(P), sleep f 
 — etl ; „ Vkctl, eat I 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 The interrogative particle is k-an or naqkan, which, however, is not used when it 
 is self-evident that a question is meant : 
 
 naqkan gin-g'o'menii ? and g'ui g-'D'tncne 1 are you asleep ? 
 
 naqlfaii gin iiu~ Kittana'qa 7 and gin bid Kutona'qa 1 are you a Kootonay ? 
 
 kan ine hi' mini is it mine? 
 
 kan inS aqgitld'is ? is that his house ? 
 
 After an interrogative pronoun the particle is omitted : 
 
 g-atla kl'e 1 who is that ? 
 
 Neoative. 
 The negative is formed by the prefix h-'a, which follows the pronominal prefix : 
 ku-k'a-santlqo'ond, 1 am not sick (=:bad body). 
 
 Iterative. 
 The iterative is formed by tla, which follows the pronominal prefix ; 
 ku-tla-sa7itIqo'o7id, 1 am again sick. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 The optative is formed by a compound particle, composed of the particles desig- 
 nating future and pa.st. It iS; thercfoie, a futurum exactum. 
 
 tnqK-via kui'keni\ I should like to drink. 
 
 The future is also used to express a desiderative. 
 
 ku-tsqatl-i'hcnv, I shall drink, and I want to drink. 
 
 QUOTATIVB AND RESPONSIVE. 
 
 If the verb is said in answer to a quest ion, or in repetition of a sentence heard 
 from another speaker, the prefix slu is used. 
 
 gla-rvatJenkctlatld' nil , somebody said it is snowing. 
 kii-si It- It'll' (jr, I am coining (said in reply to a question). 
 ihi-i'kenit, they say that he eats. 
 
¥tm 
 
 f • ■ i 
 
 I' i 
 
 I 
 
 ,i !'.> 
 
 96 
 
 Ilk it 
 
 11 i >'>k 
 
 m 
 
 Mm 
 
 It 
 
 ni;rouT — 1880. 
 
 TUANSITIVR VKIID. 
 Indicative, Present Tense. 
 
 Object 
 
 Siugular 
 
 riiiral 
 
 1st PcTHon 
 
 2iiil r^rson 
 
 3ril Tersoa 
 
 1 St Person 2n(l rerson 
 
 1 
 iRt person siiiKular 
 2nil „ „ kii - iilsoiii" 
 3ril „ „ kiiii-iik.j'i-i 
 1st ,, pluriil — 
 Villi „ ,, 1 ku— nisiri'lliK" 
 3ril „ „ 1 kn— iii'iikois 
 
 1 
 Kill luVpenO — n.l'pcna 
 
 -■ — iii'scm" 
 ^'iii- - 
 gin— imiiwa'tciif' — niUiwaVrnG 
 
 — uisgi'tluu 
 (.'in - niitliVanu 
 
 — '({in- nnpgi'tlnO 
 wf> ~ nauwil'sent' — 
 wo— (fin— npi'tlne 
 
 — j.'in— nauwii'senP 
 wd-nii't.'i'tliK' . 
 \v5-naUa'auC' gin— natlft'anG 
 
 The third persons plural and sinpul;ir arc identical. 
 For instance, from nn-k-o, to conniicr; 
 
 laniuk-rnii'senr, I cdnijiier tliec. 
 ]tunnitho)^koig, I conquer liira. 
 nvkrmu'jH'nr, he contiuors me. 
 nukfDii'.ieiir, he conquers thee. 
 D.UMifrv/iaiinu'i'tiene, we conquer thee ; kc. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 ku Icantln'tltitl, I am struck, 
 
 (ieor(je nn-ho-d'tlnr, (Jeorge has been beaten. 
 
 hn-kd-afl, I am beaten. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 I have not succeeded in nnalysinp many words, but a number of prefixes and 
 sufhxes iiave resuhcd from my cdmiiarisoiis. Anidug tlie words of \\\v vocabulary 
 I cul'ectcd, KM bcf^in with the prefix nq above referred to. Besides this I found a 
 number of otlier prefixes. 
 
 ginnuqthl'menti, ral)bit. 
 gia>iHi'ktj'i, pr'nind hog. 
 giai'i'ats, fool hen. 
 
 nntlqamitt'nt, snail. 
 nntlu'kuit, the white tail deer. 
 niitlfo'kitj), antelope. 
 
 gia-, animal : 
 
 gia'hqo, fisli. 
 giaJf'dnu'liOdt, eagle. 
 gid'k-'Ktla, duck. 
 gianu'ltqd, mountain-poat. 
 
 nn-, anotlier prolix of animal names : 
 
 nnhtga'Jftlr, humming-l)ird. 
 nuh tlu'lrorn, loon. 
 nufhtketli'tlilf, liawk. 
 
 Here may also belong : 
 
 gia-n u'kqo, mountain-goat. 
 gia-nvqtlu'nwna, rabbit. 
 
 gu-, separable j^refix. Meaning unknown 
 
 gu-n'VtlJra,\avgc. 
 git-atlu'sk'in, to break off. 
 
 -k'a-, opening of : 
 
 aqh'asath'i'ija'k, opening of nose = nostril. 
 aqFatle' ma, opening of {csopiiagus = mouth 
 fl/^Z''rt'^/c7(2'^"''''"'< opening of house = door. 
 
 •kali; central part, dividing line : 
 
 oqlid'neltah, notch of arrow. 
 tiqltink-nJiMi'tIa, septum, 
 
 giantlik/iS, ground hog. 
 
 gu-7va nnkntuV n'l m , war. 
 gu-wathlkuliu' kut , rain. 
 
 tlie 
 
 Pla 
 
 i'la- 
 
 Pla 
 Plai 
 Pla 
 Plai 
 
ON TIIK NOIlTII-n'KSTKIlN TKIIIKS OK ( ANAKA. 
 
 97 
 
 ■gah sulTix occurring in names of many parts of body ; 
 
 aqh'<i-xiifhl'(f(ih\ nost ril. 
 fttjf/)nri'tri/ill,', hrciist. 
 ft/j!/r'ii/iif,\ foot. 
 aqk'('i'i!/ii//, wrist. 
 aqyoatij'dtl'Kja'kf eyebrow. 
 
 'tvuh, tree : 
 
 hiitli'i' ir'ih, tliorn. 
 
 nkomon-ri/i, .sarvis (?) herry busli, 
 
 aqkund'H'ok, willow. 
 
 •tlqH, borly : 
 
 gtlii, bail. 
 sokt; good. 
 k'a, broad. 
 
 • mOtl, instrument : 
 
 y'ln-dJi'i'uiihitlf bru^li. 
 itli' iiiiiotl, in.s1 rument. 
 lisahoiihitl, net -dipping in.-^trument. 
 (juintlokrtuih'o' iiuill, sling. 
 
 -kill, to do .something with hand or foot ; 
 
 yVti'iThhi, to paint. 
 
 aqtsi:' liin, to erush with foot. 
 
 7jfi'f.fiki)i, to stand on top of some- 
 thing. 
 
 (j-at^ni'iiliin, to break. 
 •qan, to do something with teeth: 
 
 ffUf/'d'sq/in, to bite off a piece. 
 -qil, to do .something by hammering : 
 
 ([/')(i'/>/xq('>, to pound. 
 
 rqif'ti'/lii/iif:, forehead. 
 oqijii' nijiih, beak. 
 (ihqii 'sijiil;, brea.st bone. 
 aqijd' iiijiik, neck. 
 aqgoijHlithV mijdk, nape. 
 
 aqhltlmn'kivAh, cherry tree. 
 aqkun-iVtlwoh, bireli. 
 
 sii'iif/qi'i, sick. 
 fo'/.'rt/qo, well. 
 
 k'a'flqO, stout. 
 
 (I'lil-fitqo' Dhitl, pestle. 
 
 itluhtxri' I'loll, .sewing machine. 
 
 tiiKinlil'i' iihill, broom. 
 
 ipiaf hi' skill, to break off. 
 hiV wut.flnii, to iiold in iiand. 
 itk'nt, to make .suinetiiing with the 
 
 hand. 
 atlktii, to carry in hand. 
 
 frasni'iiqan, to break by biting. 
 
 riiunflu'qo, to break to pieces witli 
 hummer. 
 (jnathi'sqli, to break ofT with Iiamraer. ij'iihtsv'lhnakq'\ to pound. 
 
 ■ m'lh, vibrate : 
 
 athiskii' ni>k, a cut. aqh'ayi' nmik, a war. 
 
 [A comparative vocabulary of all the languages of British Columbia, including 
 the principal dialects, will be given v> a future report.] 
 
 ilJ 
 
 DKHCniPTION OF PLATES. 
 
 Plate I., Fig. 1. Tsimshian, male, virc. Ho years [cul. lio.-is, Xo. 8.">]. Xnmiti 
 ffdiitdHs. 
 „ Fig. 2. Tsimshian, rirr. 50 years. [Morton (•(illcetion in tlic .Museum of the 
 
 Aeademy of Natural Sciences, riiiladelphia, No. 211!.] .Vnnini 
 frail fal in. 
 riatc II., Fig. 1. Tsim:<hian. [Morton collection in the Museum nf tiie Acadi'mj- 
 of Natiu'al Sciences, I'liiiadelpliia, No. 214.] XoriiKi /ruiitii/in. 
 „ Fig. 2. Tsimshian, rii-i'. If* years. [Morton collfctinii in the Museum fif the 
 
 Academy of Natural Sciences, J'liiJadeljdiia, No. 1)87.] Xoniia 
 /ruiifii/ix. 
 Plate III., Fig. 1. Same . as i'late I., Fig. 1. Xoniia la/< nilig. 
 „ Fig. 2. Sanu! as Plate 1., Fi^r. 2. A^n-wrt latirali.i. 
 
 Plate IV., Fig. 1. Same as Plate II., Fig. I. Xurnin /iifrrnli.f. 
 „ Fig. 2. Same as Plate II., Fig. 2. Xonmi hiternHs. 
 
 Plate v., Fig. 1. Sam(> as Plate I., Fig. 1. Xoriiia I'lniicniis. 
 „ Fig. 2. Same as Plate I., Fig. 2. Xarma I'erticulia. 
 
 Plato VI., Fig. 1. Same as Plate II., Fig. 1. Xorina rcrtiatli.i. 
 „ Fig. 2. Same as Plate II., Fig. 2, Xorma rvrtinili.'^ 
 
ridte /.— TSIMSIIIAN, I., II. 
 
 
 ' ft 
 
 n 
 
 
 |1 
 
 * 
 ... J 
 
 Fio. 1. — Half naturnl size. ^ 
 
 ^nr.i.. 
 
 l\ii. I.*. - lliilf natural size. 
 
Plate //.— TsiMSiilAN, III., IV. 
 
 Fio. 1. — Half natural siise. 
 
 ' Vi 
 
 i :■ U 
 
 I Mi 
 
 I 
 
 Fig. 2.— Half natural size- 
 
 i 
 
t\' 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 I' 1 
 
 
 ii 
 
 H 
 
 i'' ft 
 
 /'/</^' r//.— TwrMsiiiAN, r., II. 
 
 Flu. 1. — Half iiiitural size. <? 
 
 TIUlLI 
 
 Fig. 2.— Half natural size. 
 
PUltt^ /r.— TSIMSHIAN, III. IV 
 
 / 
 
 Fio. 1.— Ilalf natural size. 
 
 M 
 
 ) 
 
 / 
 
 Fig. 2.— Half natural size. 
 
 > : H 
 
T7«7r K.— T8IMBHIA5, 1., 11. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 J \ t 
 
 
 If 
 
 Fio, 1. — Half natural size. ^ 
 
 Fig. 2.— Half natural eize. 
 
Plate TT.— TsiMsiIIAN, III,, IV. 
 
 Fio. 1. — Halt' natural nzt 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 ill 
 
 I'"i(;. 2. — Iluirimturul size. 
 
tJT^*A %f -I nT-m*u»t»' ■ «i 
 
 'I ! t 
 
 
 rniNTKn ry 
 RromswooDK and fo., kkw-stukkt kqi'mik 
 
 LONDON' 
 
'^■i«>«Hin<PvifM«-4«w 
 
 t f 
 
 1 i 
 
 wa